EPA-430/ 1-75-005
  FRESHWATER BIOLOGY AND
  POLLUTION ECOLOGY
TRAINING MANUAL
u
 S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
WATER PROGRAM OPERATIONS

-------
                                       EPA-430/1-75-005
                                       April 1975
       FRESHWATER BIOLOGY
This course is designed as an introduction to aquatic
biology for sanitary engineers,  scientists, and others
who are involved in freshwater pollution studies,
surveillance,  and control.  Biologists new to the field
of aquatic biology and pollution problems may find it
useful for orientation.
                     AND
  FRESHWATER POLLUTION ECOLOGY
This course is offered for aquatic biologists or persons
with comparable experience concerned with and/or
involved in the application of biological principles,
techniques and parameters to pollution studies and
abatement programs.
  ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
      Office of Water  Program Operations
          TRAINING   PROGRAM

-------
                                      CONTENTS                             •   ,



Title or Description                                • -                    Outline. Number

Survey of the Biota

   The Aquatic Environment                                                    1

   Types of Algae                                                              2

   Production of Excess Organic Material in Freshwater                         3

   Aquatic  Macrophytes                                                        4

   An Artificial Key to Some Common Aquatic Plants                             5
    (Freshwater,  Estuarine,  and Marine)

   Key to Selected Groups of Freshwater Animals                                6

   Biota of Wastewater Treatment Plants (Microscopic                           7
    Invertebrates)

   Biology  of Zooplankton Communities                                         8

   Macro Invertebrates                                                         9

   Fishes                                                                    10

   Fungi and the "Sewage Fungus" Community                                  11

Freshwater Pollution Ecology

   Biological Aspects of Natural Self Purification                               12

   The Interpretation of Biological Data with Reference to                       13
    Water  Quality

   Effects  of Pollution on Aquatic Life                                         14

   Global Deterioration and Our Environmental Crisis                          15

   Fundamentals of the Toxicity Bioassay                                      16

   Biological Field Methods                                                   17

   Stream Invertebrate Drift                                                   18

   Artificial Substrates                                                        19

   Attached Growths (Periphyton or Aufwuchs)                    '              20



 140.4.75

-------
                                        Contents
Title or Description                                      '                 Outline Number





   Application of Biological Data                                                 21




   Using Benthic Biota in Water Quality Evaluation                          '     22

-------
                SURVEY  OF  THE BIOTA
The first half of this manual is a synoptic review of the components
of the aquatic community to aid the observer in recognizing many
common types of organisms encountered both in the field, laboratory,
and treatment facilities.

A comprehension of the system of biological nomenclature and
ecological classifications, is basic to an understanding of aquatic
life communities.  The first exercise in ecology is systematics.
Application of systematics will depend on one's background, present
limitations,  and program objectives.

Systematics, broadly defined, is the study of the diversity of organisms.
In connotation it is a wedding between taxonomy and ecology.  In applied
biology or ecology,  good systematics is indispensable and is an immensely
useful system of information storage and retrieval.  The following
definitions are basic.
SYSTEMATICS:  "The scientific study of the kinds and diversity of
organisms and of any and all relationships among them. "

CLASSIFICATION:  "The ordering of organisms into groups (or sets)
on the basis of their relationships; that is, of their associations by
contiguity, similarity,  or both."

TAXONOMY: "The theoretical study of classification, including its
bases, principles, procedures,  and rules."

IDENTIFICATION:  "The use of a key (or key substitute like an expert)
to place an unknown organism into a specific taxonomic rank."

-------
                                    THE AQUATIC ENVIRONMENT

                              Part 1:  The Nature  and Behavior of Water
I  INTRODUCTION

The earth is physically divisible into the
lithosphere or land masses, and the
hydrosphere which includes the oceans,
lakes,  streams,  and subterranean waters.

A  Upon the hydrospere are based a number
   of sciences which represent different
   approaches.  Hydrology is  the general
   science of water itself with its various
   special fields such as hydrography,
   hydraulics,  etc.  These in  turn merge
   into physical chemistry and chemistry.

B  Limnology and oceanography combine
   aspects of all of these,  and deal not only
   with the physical liquid water and its
   various naturally occurring solutions and
     forms, but also with living organisms
     and the infinite interactions that occur
     between them and their environment.

  C  Water quality management, including
     pollution control, thus looks to all
     branches of aquatic science in efforts
     to coordinate and improve man's
     relationship  with his aquatic environment.
 II   SOME FACTS ABOUT WATER

  A  Water is the only abundant liquid on our
     planet.   It has many properties most
     unusual for liquids, upon which depend
     most of the familiar aspects  of the  world
     about us as we know it.  (See Table 1)
                                               TABLE 1
                                      UNIQUE PROPERTIES OF WATER
                           Property
         Significance
                   Highest heat capacity (specific heat) of any
                   solid or liquid (except NH3>
Stabilizes temperatures of organisms and
geographical regions
                   Highest latent heat of fusion (except
Thermostatic effect at freezing point
                  Highest heat of evaporation of any substance
Important In heat and water transfer of
atmosphere
                  The only substance that has its maximum
                  density as a liquid (40 C)
Fresh and brackish waters have maximum
density above freezing point.  This is
important In vertical circulation pattern
In lakes.
                  Highest surface tension of any liquid
Controls surface and drop phenomena,
important In cellular physiology
                  Dissolves more substances In greater
                  quantity than any other liquid
Makes complex biological system possible.
Important for transportation of materials
In solution.
                  Pure water has the highest di-electrlc
                  constant of any liquid
Leads to high dissociation of Inorganic
substances In solution
                  Very little electrolytic dissociation
Neutral, yet contains both H+ and OH ions
                  Relatively transparent
Absorbs much energy In Infra red and ultra
violet ranges, but little in visible range.
Hence "colorless"
  BI.  21e. 1.74
                                                                                                   1-1

-------
The Aquatic Environment
B  Physical Factors of Significance

   1  Water substance

      Water is not simply "HgO" but in
      reality is a mixture of some 33
      different substances involving three
      isotopes each of hydrogen and oxygen
      (ordinary hydrogen H1, deuterium H2,
      and tritium H^; ordinary  oxygen O  ,
      oxygen 17, and oxygen 18) plus  15
      known types  of ions.   The molecules
      of a water mass tend to associate
      themselves as polymers rather than
      to remain as discrete units.
      (See Figure 1)
     SUBSTANCE OF PURE WATER
                 TABLE 2

 EFFECTS OF TEMPERATURE ON DENSITY
        OF PURE WATER AND ICE*

 Temperature (°C)          Density

                   Water         Ice**
-10
- 8
- 6
- 4
- 2 .
0
2
4
6
8
10
20
40
60
80
100
.99815
.99869
.99912
.99945
.99970
.99987 	
.99997
1.00000
.99997
.99988
.99973
.99823
.99225
.98324
.97183
.95838
.9397
.9360
.9020
.9277
.9229
.9168










                   Ftfure 1
 *  Tabular values for density,  etc., represent
    estimates by various workers rather than
    absolute values,  due to the variability of
    water.

**  Regular ice  is known as "ice I".  Four or
    more other "forms" of ice are known to
    exist (ice  II, ice III,  etc.), having densities
    at 1 atm.  pressure ranging from 1.1595
    to 1.67.  These are of extremely restricted
    occurrence and may be ignored in most
    routine operations.
   2  Density

     a  Temperature and density:  Ice.
        Water is the only known substance
        in which the solid state will float
        on the liquid state.  (See Table 2)
           This ensures that ice usually
           forms on top of a body of water
           and tends to insulate the remain-
           ing water mass from further loss
           of heat. Did ice sink,  there
           could be little or no  carryover of
           aquatic life, from season to season
           in the higher latitudes.  Frazil or
           needle ice forms colloidally at a
           few thousandths of a degree
           below 0° c.   It is adhesive and
           may build up on submerged objects
           as "anchor ice", but it is still
           typical ice (ice I).
1-2

-------
                                                      The Aquatic Environment
1) Seasonal increase in solar
   radiation annually warms
   surface waters in summer
   while other factors result in
   winter  cooling.  The density
   differences resulting establish
   two classic layers:  the epilimnion
   or surface layer, and the
   hypolimnion or lower layer, and
   in between is the thermocline
   or shear-plane.

2) While for certain theoretical
   purposes a "thermocline" is
   defined as a zone in which the
   temperature changes one
   degree centigrade for each
   meter of depth, in practice,
   any transitional layer between
   two relatively stable masses
   of water of different temper-
   atures  may be regarded as a
   thermocline.

3) Obviously the greater the
   temperature differences
   between epilimnion and
   hypolimnion arid  the sharper
   the  gradient in the thermocline,
   the  more stable will the
   situation be.

4) From information given above,
   it should be evident that while
   the  temperature  of the
   hypolimnion rarely drops
   much below 4° C, the
   epilimnion may range from
   0° C upward.

5) When epilimnion and hypolimnion
   achieve the same temperature,
   stratification no  longer exists.
   The entire body of water behaves
   hydrologically as a unit, and
   tends to assume  uniform chemical
   and physical characteristics.
   Even a light breeze may then
   cause the entire  body of water
   to circulate.  Such events are called
   overturns, and usually result in
   water quality changes of consider-
   able physical,  chemical, and
   biological significance.
        Mineral-rich water from the
        hypolimnion, for example,
        is mixed with oxygenated
        water from the epilimnion.
        This usually triggers a
        sudden growth or "bloom"
        of plankton organisms.

     6) When stratification is present,
        however,  each layer behaves
        relatively independently, and
        significant quality differences
 =       may develop.

     7) Thermal stratification as
        described above has no
        reference to the size of the
        water mass; it is found in
        oceans and puddles.

  b  The  relative densities of the
     various isotopes of water
     influence its molecular com-
     position.  For example, the
     lighter O16 tends to go off
     first in the process of evaporation,
     leading to the relative enrichment
     of air by O16 and the enrichment
     of water by O17 and O18.   This
     can lead to a measurably higher
     OIB  content in warmer climates.
     Also, the temperature of water
     in past geologic ages can be
     closely estimated from the ratio
     °f QIQ  in the carbonate of mollusc
     shells.

  c  Dissolved and/or suspended solids
     may also affect the density of
     natural water masses (see Table 3)

            TABLE 3
EFFECTS OF DISSOLVED SOLIDS
           ON DENSITY
Dissolved Solids
(Grams per liter)
0
1
2
3 •
10
35 (mean for sea water)
Density
(at 40 C)
1.00000
1.00085
1.00169
1,00251
1.00818
1.02822
                                                                               1-3

-------
The Aquatic Environment
      d Types of density stratification

        1) Density differences produce
           stratification which may be
           permanent,  transient, or
           seasonal.

        2) Permanent stratification
           exists for example where
           there is a heavy mass of
           brine in the deeper areas of
           a basin which does not respond
           to seasonal or other changing
           conditions.

        3) Transient stratification may
           occur with the recurrent
           influx of tidal water in an
           estuary for example,  or the
           occasional influx of cold
           muddy water into a deep lake
           or reservoir.

        4) Seasonal stratification is
           typically thermal in nature,
           and involves the annual
           establishment of the epilimnion,
           hypolimnion, and thermocline
           as described above.

        5) Density stratification is not
           limited to two-layered systems;
           three, four, or even more
           layers may be encountered in
           larger bodies  of water.

      e  A "plunge line" (sometimes called
        "thermal line") may develop at
        the mouth of a stream.  Heavier
        water flowing into a lake or
        reservoir plunges below the
        lighter water mass of the epiliminium
        to flow along at a lower level.  Such
        a line is usually marked by an
        accumulation of floating  debris.

      f  Stratification may be modified
        or entirely suppressed in some
        cases when deemed expedient, by
        means of a simple air'lift.

      The viscosity of water is  greater at
      lower temperatures (see Table 4).
        This is important not only in situations
        involving the control of flowing water
        as in a sand filter, but also since
        overcoming resistance to flow gen-
        erates heat, it is significant in the
        heating of water-by internal friction
        from wave and current action.
        Living organisms more easily support
        themselves in the more viscous
        (and also denser) cold waters of the
        arctic than in the less viscous warm
        waters of the tropics.  (See Table 4).

                   TABLE 4

VISCOSITY OF WATER (In millipoises at 1 atm)
Temp, o c
-in
- 5
0
5
. 10
30
1UU
Dissolved solids in g/L
0
OA n
21.4
17.94
15.19
13.10
8.00
. 84
5



18.1
15.3
13.2
8.1

10



18.24
15.5
13.4
8.2

30



18.7
16.0
13.8
8.6

     4  Surface tension has biological as well
        as physical significance.  Organisms
        whose body surfaces cannot be wet by
        water can either ride on the surface
        film or in some instances may be
        "trapped" on.the surface film'and be
        unable to re-enter the water.

     5  Heat or energy

        Incident solar radiation is the prime
        source of energy for virtually all
        organic and most inorganic processes
        on earth.  For the earth as a whole,
        the total amount (of energy) received
        annually must exactly balance that
        lost by reflection and radiation into
        space if climatic and related con-
        ditions are to remain relatively
        constant over geologic time.
 1-4

-------
                                                            The Aquatic Environment
   a For a given body of water,
     immediate sources of energy
     include in addition to solar
     irradiation:  terrestrial heat,
     transformation  of kinetic energy
     (wave and current action) to  heat,
     chemical and biochemical
     reactions,  convection from the
     atmosphere, and condensation of
     water vapor.

   b The proportion of light  reflected
     depends on the angle  of incidence,
     the temperature, color, and other
     qualities of the water; and the
     presence or absence  of films
     of lighter liquids such as oil.
     In general,  as the depth increases
     arithmetically, the light tends to
     decrease geometrically.  Blues,
     greens,  and yellows tend to
     penetrate most deeply while  ultra
     violet, violets, and orange-reds
     are most quickly absorbed.  On
     the order of 90% of the  total
     illumination which penetrates the
     surface  film is absorbed in the
     first 10  meters of even the clearest
     water, thus tending to warm the
     upper layers.

6  Water movements

   a Waves or rhythmic movement

     1)  The best known are traveling
        waves caused by wind.  These are
         effective only against objects near
        the surface.  They have little
         effect on the movement of large
        masses of water.

     2)  Seiches

         Standing waves or seiches occur
        in lakes,  estuaries,  and other
         enclosed bodies of water, but are
         seldom large enough to be
        observed.  An "internal wave or
         seich" is an oscillation in a
         submersed mass of water such
        as a hypolimnion,  accompanied
        by compensating oscillation in the
        overlying water so that no
      significant change in surface
      level is detected.  Shifts in
      submerged water masses of
      this type  can have severe effects
      on the biota  and also, on human
      water uses where withdrawals
      are  confined to a given depth.
      Descriptions and analyses of
      many other types and sub-types
      of waves  and wave-like movements
      may be found in the literature.

b  Tides

   1) Tides are the longest waves
      known, and are responsible  for
      the once or twice a  day rythmic
      rise and fall of the ocean level
      on most shores around the world.

   2) While part and parcel of the
      same phenomenon,  it is often
      convenient to refer  to the rise
      and  fall of the  water level as
      "tide, " and to  the^resulting
      currents  as  "tidal currents. "

   3) Tides are basically caused by the
      attraction of the sun and moon on
      water masses, large and small;
      however, it  is only  in the oceans
      and  possibly certain of the larger
      lakes that true tidal action has
      been demonstrated.  The patterns
      of tidal action  are enormously
      complicated by local topography,
      interaction with seiches, and other
      factors.  The  literature on tides
      is very large.

c  Currents (except  tidal currents)
   are steady arythmic water movements
   which have had major  study only in
   oceanography although they are
   most often observed in rivers and
   streams.   They  are primarily
   concerned with the translocation of
   water masses.  They may be generated
   internally by virtue of density changes,
   or externally by wind or terrestrial
   topography.   Turbulence phenomena
   or eddy currents  are largely respon-
   sible for lateral mixing in a current.
   These are of far  more importance
   in the economy of a body of water than
   mere laminar flow.
                                                                                    1-5

-------
The Aquatic Environment
       d  Coriolis force is a result of inter-
         action between the rotation of the
         earth, and the movement of masses
         or bodies on the earth.  The net
         result is a slight tendency for moving
         objects to veer to the right in the
         northern hemisphere, and to the
         left in the southern hemisphere.
         While the result in fresh waters is
         usually negligible,  it may be con-
         siderable in marine waters. For
         example, other factors permitting,
         there is a tendency in estuaries for
         fresh waters to move toward the
         ocean faster along the right bank,
         while salt tidal waters tend to
         intrude farther inland along the
         left bank.  Effects are even more
         dramatic in the open oceans.

       e  Langmuir circulation (or L. spirals)
         is the interlocking rotation of
         somewhat cylindrical masses of
         surface water under the influence
         of wind action.  The axes of the
         cylinders are parallel to the
         direction of the wind.
                               To somewhat oversimplify the
                               concept, a series of adjoining cells
                               might be thought of as chains of
                               interlocking gears in which at every
                               other contact the teeth are rising
                               while at the alternate contacts, they
                               are sinking.(Figure 2).

                               The result is elongated masses of
                               water rising or sinking together.
                               This produces the familiar  "wind
                               rows" of foam, flotsam and jetsam,
                               01- plankton often seen streaking
                               windblown lakes or oceans.  Certain
                               zoo-plankton struggling to maintain
                               a position near the surface tend to
                               collect in the down current between
                               two Langmuir  cells, causing such
                               an area to be called the "red dance",
                              .while the clear upwelling water
                               between is the "blue dance".

                               This phenomenon may be important
                               in water or plankton sampling on
                               a windy day.
               b
                                      b
_WATER
SURFACE
            WATER
            RISING
WATER
SINKING
                  Figure 2.  Langmuire  Spirals
                  b.  Blue  dance,  water  rising, r.  Red
                  dance,  water  sinking,  floating  or
                  swimming  objects  concentrated.
 1-6

-------
                                                               The Aquatic Environment
   6   The pH of pure water has been deter-
       mined between 5. 7 and 7. 01 by various
       workers.  The latter value is most
       widely accepted at the present time.
       Natural waters of course vary widely
       according to circumstances.

C  The elements of hydrology mentioned
   above represent a selection of some of
   the more conspicuous physical factors
   involved in working with water quality.
   Other items not specifically mentioned
   include: molecular structure of waters,
   interaction of water and radiation,
   internal pressure,  acoustical charac-
   teristics, pressure-volume-temperature
   relationships,  refractivity, luminescence,
   color, dielectrical characteristics and
   phenomena,' solubility,  action and inter-
   actions of gases, liquids and solids,
   water vapor, phenomena of hydrostatics
   and hydrodynamics in general.
REFERENCES

1  Buswell, A. M. and Rodebush,  W. H.
       Water. Sci. Am.  April 1956.

2  Dorsey, N. Ernest.  Properties of  '
       Ordinary Water - Substance.
       Reinhold Publ.  Corp. New York.
       pp. 1-673.  1940.

3  Fowle, Frederick E.  Smithsonian
       Physical Tables.  Smithsonian
       Miscellaneous Collection, 71(1),
       7th revised ed.,  1929.

4  Hutcheson, George  E.  A Treatise on
       Limnology.  John Wiley Company.
       1957.

This outline was prepared by H. W. Jackson,
Chief Biologist,  National Training Center,
Water Programs Operations, EPA, Cincinnati,
OH 45268.
                                                Descriptors:
                                                Aquatic Environment, Estuarine Environment,
                                                Lentic Environment, Lotic Environment,
                                                Currents,  Marshes,  Limnology, Water
                                                Properties
                                                                                   1-7

-------
                              THE AQUATIC ENVIRONMENT

                    Part 2:  The Aquatic Environment as an Ecosystem
 I  INTRODUCTION
                                        •. •
 Part 1 introduced the lithosphere and. the
 hydrosphere. Part 2 will deal with certain
 general aspects of the biosphere, or the
 sphere of life on this earth, which photo-
 graphs from space have shown is a finite
 globe in infinite space.

 This is the habitat of man and the other
 organisms.  His relationships  with the
 aquatic biosphere are our common concern.
II   THE BIOLOGICAL NATURE OF THE
    WORLD WE LIVE IN

 A  We can only imagine what this world
    must have been like before there was life.

 B  The world as we know it is largely shaped
    by the forces of life.

    1   Primitive forms of life created organic
       matter and  established soil.

    2   Plants cover the lands and enormously
       influence the forces of erosion.

    3   The nature  and rate of erosion affect
       the redistribution of materials
       (and mass)  on the surface of the
       earth (topographic changes).

    4   Organisms  tie  up vast quantities of
       certain chemicals, such as carbon
       and oxygen.

    5   Respiration of plants and animals
       releases carbon dioxide to the
       atmosphere in influential quantities.

    6   CO? affects the heat transmission of
       the atmosphere.

 C  Organisms respond to and in turn affect
    their environment. Man is one  of the
    most influential.
Ill.. ECOLOGY IS THE STUDY OF THE
    INTERRELATIONSHIPS BETWEEN
    ORGANISMS, AND BETWEEN ORGA-
    NISMS AND THEIR ENVIRONMENT.

 A The ecosystem- isrthe basic functional
    unit of ecology.  Any area of nature that
    includes living'Organisms and nonliving
    substances interacting to produce an
    exchange of materials between the living
    and nonliving parts constitutes an
    ecosystem. (Odum,  1959)

    1  From a structural standpoint, it is
       convenient to recognize four
       constituents as composing an
       ecosystem (Figure 1).

       a  Abiotic NUTRIENT  MINERALS
          which are the physical  stuff of
          which living protoplasm will be
          synthesized.

       b  Autotrophic (self-nourishing) or
          PRODUCER organisms.  These
          are largely the green plants
          (holophytes),  but other minor
          groups must also be included
          (See Figure 2). They assimilate
          the nutrient minerals,  by the use
          of considerable energy, and combine
          them into living organic substance.

       c  Heterotrophic (other-nourishing)
          CONSUMERS (holozoic). are chiefly
          the animals.  They ingest  (or eat)
          and digest organic matter, releasing
          considerable energy in the process.

       d Heterotrophic REDUCERS are chiefly
          bacteria  and fungi that return
          complex organic compounds back to
          the original abiotic mineral condition,
          thereby releasing the remaining
          chemical energy.

    2  From a functional standpoint,  an
       ecosystem has two parts (Figure 2)
 BI.2le.l.74
                                                                                   1-9

-------
The Aquatic Environment
                                CO  NSUMERS
        PRO DUCERS
              REDUCERS
                                    NUTRIENT
                                    MINERALS
                                      FIGURE 1
     a  The autotrophic or producer
        organisms, which construct
        organic substance.

     b  The heterotrophic or consumer and
        reducer organisms which destroy
        organic substance.

   3  Unless the autotrophic and hetero-
     trophic phases of the cycle approximate
     a dynamic equilibrium, the ecosystem
     and the environment will change.

   Each of these groups includes simple,
   single-celled representatives, persisting
   at lower levels on the evolutionary stems
   of the higher organisms. (Figure 2)

   1  These groups span the gaps between the
     higher kingdoms with a multitude of
     transitional forms.  They are collectively
     called the PROTISTA.
    2  Within the protista, two principal sub-
       groups can be defined on the basis of
       relative complexity of structure.

       a  The bacteria and blue-green algae,
         lacking a nuclear membrane may
         be considered as the lower protista
         (or Monera).

       b  The single-celled-algae and
         protozoa are best referred to as
         the Higher Protista.

    Distributed throughout these groups will
    be found most of the traditional "phyla"
    of classic biology.
IV  FUNCTIONING OF THE ECOSYSTEM

 A  A food chain is the transfer of food energy
    from plants through a series of organisms
    with repeated eating and being eaten.
    Food chains are not isolated sequences but
    are interconnected.
  1-10

-------
                                                          The Aquatic Environment
RELATIONSHIPS  BETWEEN  FREE  LIVING AQUATIC  ORGANISMS

          Energy Flows from Left to Right, General Evolutionary Sequence is Upward

    PRODUCERS    |

 Organic Material Produced,
 Usually by Photosynthesis I
                             CONSUMERS
                         Organic Material Ingested or
                                Consumed
                             Digested Internally
     REDUCERS
Organic Material Reduced
by Extracellular Digestion
and Intracellular Metabolism
to Mineral Condition
     ENERGY STORED
                            ENERGY RELEASED
                                                          ENERGY RELEASED
Flowering Plants and
Gymnosperms
Club Mosses, Ferns
Liverworts, Mosses
Multicellular Green
Algae
Red Algae
Brown Algae
Arachnids
Insects
Crustaceans
Segmented Worms
Molluscs
Bryozoa
Rotifers
Roundworms
Flatworms
Mammals
Birds
Reptiles
Amphibians
Fishes
Primitive
Chordates
Echinoderms

Coelenterates
Sponges
Basidiomycetes

Fungi Imperfect!
Ascomycetes

Higher Phycomycetes
         DEVELOPMENT OF MULTICELLULAR OR COENOCYTIC STRUCTURE

               H  I  G" H  E  R      P  R 0  T  I~S  T  A
Unicellular Green Algae
Diatoms
Pigmented Flagellates
Protozoa
Amoeboid Cilliated
Flagellated, Suctoria
(non-pigmented)
Lower
Phycomycetes
(Chytridiales, et. al. )
                     DEVELOPMENT OF A NUCLEAR MEMBRANE
                LOWER      PROTISTA
                                or:_  Monera)

                                                          Actinomycetes

                                                      Spirochaetes
Blue Green Algae



       Phototropic Bacteria



              Chemotropic Bacteria
                                   I  I
                                            Saprophytic
                                            Bacterial
                                            Types
 BI.ECO.pl. 2a. 1.69
                               FIGURE 2
                                                                              1-11

-------
The Aquatic Environment
B  A food web is the interlocking pattern of
   food chains in an ecosystem.  (Figures 3, 4)
   In complex natural communities, organisms
   whose food is obtained by the same number
   of steps are said to belong to the same
   trophic (feeding) level.

C  Trophic Levels

   1  First - Green plants (producers)
      (Figure 5)  fix biochemical energy and
      synthesize basic organic substances.
      This is 'primary production .
   2  Second - Plant eating animals (herbivores)
      depend on the producer organisms for
      food.

   3  Third - Primary carnivores, animals
      which feed on herbivores.

   4  Fourth - Secondary carnivores feed on
      primary carnivores.

   5  Last- - Ultimate carnivores are the last
      or ultimate level of consumers.
D Total Assimilation

   The amount of energy which flows through
   a trophic level is distributed between the
   production of biomass (living substance),
   and the demands of respiration (internal
   energy use by living organisms) in a ratio
   of approximately 1:10.
E Trophic Structure of the Ecosystem

   The interaction of the food chain
   phenomena (with energy loss at each
   transfer) results in various communities
   having definite trophic structure or energy
   levels. Trophic structure may be
   measured and described either in terms
   of the standing crop per unit area or in
   terms  of energy fixed per unit area per
   unit time at successive trophic levels.
   Trophic structure and function can be
   shown  graphically by means of ecological
   pyramids (Figure 5).
        Figure 3. Diagram of the pond ecosystem. Basic units are as follows:' I, abiotic substances-basic inorganic and
        organic compounds; HA, producers-rooted vegetation; IIB, producers—phytoplankton; IU-1A, primary consumers
         (herbivores)-bottom formi; Ill-IB, primary consumers (herbivores)-zooplankton; III-2, secondary consumers (or*
        oJvoru); III-3. tertiary consumers (secondary carnivores); IV, decomposers-bacteria and fungi of decay.
 1-12

-------
                                                               The Aquatic Environment
        .•••// \ Light .':;;;_	
    .•   /  •  \  •.  s. •.    ••..              	     vT   —————=»_
   Nutrient
   supply
    Bacterial
     action
                        A
Death and decay
 \
Predatory
animals
Figure 4.  A  MARINE ECbSYSTEM (After Clark,  1954 and Patten, .1966).
                                                                      1-13

-------
 The Aquatic Environment

1






\r<
(a)
Decomposers II Carnivores (Secondar
[| Carnivores (Primary
1 [ Herbivores
Producers ]
*
1 1
1 1
(c)
.. rl~l •
(•-U777TT7T
f U/V ///////// 1
' '/ /" / 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I 1 1
 Figure 5.  HYPOTHETICAL PYRAMIDS of
 (a) Numbers of individuals, (b) Biomass, arid
 (c) Energy (Shading Indicates Energy Loss).
V  BIOTIC COMMUNITIES

A Plankton are the macroscopic and
   microscopic animals, plants,  bacteria,
   etc., floating free in the open water.
   Many clog filters, cause tastes, odors,
   and other troubles in water supplies.
   Eggs and larvae of larger forms are
   often present.

   1  Phytoplankton are plant-like.  These
      are the dominant producers of the
      waters, fresh and salt, "the grass
      of the seas".

   2  Zooplankton are animal-like.
      Includes many different animal types,
      range in size  from minute protozoa
      to gigantic marine jellyfishes.

B  Periphyton (or Aufwuchs) - The communities
   of microscopic organisms associated with
   submerged surfaces of any type or depth.
    Includes bacteria, algae,  protozoa, and
    other microscopic animals, and often the
    young or embryonic stages of algae and
    other organisms that normally grow up
    to become a part of the benthos (see below).
    Many planktonic types  will also adhere
    to surfaces as periphyton;  and some
    typical periphyton may break off and
    be collected as plankiers.

  C Benthos are the plants and animals living
    on, in, or closely associated with the
    bottom.  They include  plants and
    invertebrates.

  D Nekton are the community of strong
    aggressive swimmers  of the open waters,
    often called pellagic.   Certain fishes,
    whales, and invertebrates such as
    shrimps and squids are included here.

  E The marsh community is based .on larger
    !!higher" plants, floating and emergent.
    Both marine and freshwater marshes are
    areas of enormous biological production.
    Collectively known as "wetlands",  they
    bridge the gap between the waters  and the
    dry lands.

VI  PRODUCTIVITY

  A The biological resultant of all physical
    and chemical factors in the quantity of
    life that may actually be present.  The
    ability to produce this  "biomass" is
    often referred to as the "productivity"
    of a body of water.  This is neither good
    nor bad per se.  A water of low pro-
    ductivity is a "poor" water biologically,
    and also a relatively "pure" or "clean"
    water; hence desirable as a water  supply
    or a bathing beach. A productive water
    on the other hand may  be a nuisance to
    man or highly desirable.  It is a nuisance
    if foul odors and/or weed-chocked
    waterways result,  it is desirable if
    bumper crops of bass, catfish,  or
    oysters are produced.  Open oceans have
    a low level of productivity in general.
   1-14

-------
                                                              The Aquatic Environment
REFERENCES

1  Clarke.  G. L.   Elements of Ecology.
      John Wiley & Sons, New York.   1954.

2  Cooke, W.B.  Trickling Filter Ecology.
      Ecology 40(2):273-291.   1959.

3  Hanson,  E.D.   Animal Diversity.
      Prentice-Hall,  Inc., New Jersey.  1964.

4  Hedgpeth,  J. W.  Aspects of the Estuarine
      Ecosystem.  Amer. Fish. Soc., Spec.
      Publ. No. 3.   1966.
 5  Odum, E.P.  Fundamentals of Ecology.
      W.B. Saunders Company,
      Philadelphia and London.   1959.

 6  Patten, B.C.   Systems Ecology.
      Bio-Science.   16(9).   1966.

 7  Whittaker, R.H.  New Concepts of
      Kingdoms. Science 163:150-160. 1969.
This outline was prepared by H. W. Jackson,
Chief Biologist,  National Training Center,
Water Programs Operations, EPA,
 Cincinnati,  OH  45268.
                                                Descriptors:
                                                Aquatic Environment, Estuarine  Environment,
                                                Lentic Environment,  Lotic Environment,
                                                Currents, Marshes,  Limnology, Water Properties
                                                                                  1-15

-------
                              THE AQUATIC ENVIRONMENT

                           Part 3.  The Freshwater Environment  .
 I  INTRODUCTION

 The freshwater environment as considered
 herein refers to those inland waters not
 detectably diluted by ocean waters, although
 the lower portions of rivers  are subject to
 certain tidal flow  effects.

 Certain atypical inland waters such as saline
 or alkaline lakes, springs, etc., are not
 treated, as the main objective here in typical
 inland water.

 All waters have certain basic biological cycles
 and types of interactions most of which have
 already been presented, hence this outline
 will concentrate on aspects essentially
 peculiar to fresh inland waters.
H  PRESENT WATER QUALITY AS A
   FUNCTION OF THE EVOLUTION  OF
   FRESH WATERS

 A The history of a body of water determines
   its present condition.  Natural waters have
   evolved in the course of geologic time
   into what we know today.

 B Streams

   Inthe-course of their evolution,  streams
   in general pass through four stages of
   development which may be called: birth,
   youth, maturity,  and old age.

   These terms or conditions may be
   employed or considered in two contexts:
   temporal, or spatial.  In terms  of geologic
   time, a given point in a stream may pass
   through each of the stages  described below
   or:  at any given time, these various stages
   of development can be loosely identified
   in successive reaches of a stream traveling
   from its headwaters to base level  in ocean
   or major lake.
1  Establishment or birth.  This
   might be a "dry run" or headwater
   stream-bed, before it had eroded
   down to the level of ground water.

   During periods of run- off after a
   rain or  snow-melt,  such a  gulley
   would have a flow of water  which
   might range from torrential to a
   mere trickle.  Erosion may proceed
   rapidly  as there  is no. permanent
   aquatic  flora or fauna to  stabilize
   streambed materials.  On the other
   hand,  terrestrial grass or  forest
   growth may retard erosion.  When
   the run-off has passed, however,
   the "streambed" is  dry.

2  Youthful streams.  When the
   streambed is eroded below the
   ground water level, spring or
   seepage water enters, and  the
   stream becomes permanent.  An
   aquatic  flora and fauna develops
   and water flows the year round.
   Yout hful streams typically have a
   relatively steep gradient, rocky beds,
   with rapids, falls, and small pools.

3  Mature  streams.  Mature streams
   have wide valleys, a developed
   flood plain,  are deeper,  more
   turbid,  and usually  have  warmer
   water,  sand, mud,  silt,  or clay
   bottom materials which shift with
   increase in flow.  In their more
   favorable reaches,  streams in this
   condition are at a peak of biological
   productivity.  Gradients  are moderate,
   riffles or rapids are often separated
   by long pools.

4  In old age,  streams have approached
   geologic base level, us,ually the
   ocean.   During flood stage  they scour
   their beds and deposit materials on
   the flood plain which may be very
   broad and flat. . During normal flow
   the channel is  refilled and many
   shifting bars are  developed.
BI. 21e.l.74
                                                                                      1-17

-------
 The Aquatic Environment
         (Under the influence of man this
         pattern may be broken up,  or
         temporarily interrupted.  Thus an
         essentially "youthful" stream might
         take on some of the characteristics
         of a "mature" stream following soil
         erosion,  organic enrichment,  and
         increased surface  runoff.  Correction
         of these conditions might likewise be
         followed by at least a partial reversion
         to the "original" condition).

C Lakes and Reservoirs

   Geological factors which significantly
   affect the nature of either a stream or
   lake include the following:

   1  The geographical location of the
      drainage  basin or watershed.

   2  The size and shape of the drainage
      basin.

   3  The general topography, i.e.,
      mountainous or plains.

   4  The character of the bedrocks and
      soils.

   5  The character,  amount, annual
      distribution, and rate of precipitation.

   6  The natural vegetative cover of the
      land, is, of course, responsive to and
      responsible for many of the above
      factors and is also severely subject
      to the whims of civilization.  This
      is one of the major factors determining
      run-off versus soil absorption, etc.

D Lakes have a developmental history which
   somewhat parallels that of streams.  This
   process is often referred to as natural
   eutrophication.

   1  The methods of formation vary greatly,
      but all influence the character and  '
      subsequent history of the lake.

      In glaciated areas, for example, a
      huge  block of ice may have  been covered
      with till.   The glacier retreated,  the
      ice melted, and the resulting hole
1-18
   became a lake.  Or,  the glacier may
   actually scoop out a hole.   Landslides
   may dam valleys, extinct volcanoes  may
   collapse, etc., etc.

2  Maturing or natural eutrophication of
   lakes.

   a  If not already present shoal areas
      are developed through erosion
      and deposition of the shore material
      by wave action and undertow.

   b  Currents produce bars across bays
      and thus cut off irregular areas.

   c  Silt brought in by tributary streams
      settles out  in the quiet lake water

   d  Algae grow attached to surfaces,
      and floating free as plankton.  Dead
      organic matter begins to accumulate
      on the bottom.

   e  Rooted aquatic plants grow on
      shoals and  bars, and in doing so
      cut off bays and contribute to the
      filling of the lake.

   f  Dissolved carbonates and other
      materials are precipitated in the
      deeper portions of the lake in part
      through the action of plants.

   g  When filling is well advanced,
      mats of sphagnum moss may extend
      outward from the shore.  These
      mats are followed by sedges and
      grasses which finally convert the
      lake into a  marsh.

3  Extinction of lakes.  After lakes reach
   maturity, their progress toward
   filling up is accelerated.   They become
   extinct through:

   a  The downcutting of the outlet.

   b  Filling with detritus eroded from
      the shores  or brought in by
      tributary streams.

   c  Filling by the accumulation of the
      remains of vegetable materials
      growing in  the lake itself.
      (Often two or three processes may
      act concurrently)

-------
                                                                 The Aquatic Environment
III  PRODUCTIVITY IN FRESH WATERS

 A Fresh waters in general and under
    natural conditions by definition have a
    lesser supply of dissolved  substances  ;
    than marine waters, and thus a lesser
    basic potential for the  growth of aquatic
    organisms.   By  the same token, they
    may be  said to be more sensitive to the
    addition of extraneous  materials
    (pollutants, nutrients,  etc.) The
    following notes are directed toward
    natural  geological and  other environ-
    mental factors as they affect the
    productivity of fresh waters.

 B Factors Affecting Stream Productivity
    (See Table 1)

                TABLE 1

    EFFECT OF SUBSTRATE ON STREAM
                PRODUCTIVITY*

    (The productivity of sand bottoms is
    taken as 1)
         Bottom Material
  Sand
  Marl
  Fine Gravel
  Gravel and silt
  Coarse gravel
  Moss on fine gravel
  Fissidens (moss) on coarse
    ;   gravel
  Ranunculus (water buttercup)
  Watercress
  Anacharis  (waterweed)
Relative
Productivity
     1
     6
     9
    14
    32
    89
   111

   194
   301
   452
 ^Selected from Tarzwell 1937

    To be productive of aquatic life, a
    stream must provide adequate nutrients,
    light, a suitable temperature, and time
    for growth to take place.

    1 Youthful streams, especially on rock
      or sand substrates are low in essential
      nutrients.  Temperatures in moun-
      tainous regions are usually low,  and
      due to the steep gradient,  time for
      growth is short.  Although ample
      light is available, growth of true
      plankton is thus greatly limited.
       2  As the stream flows toward a more
          "mature" condition, nutrients tend to
          accumulate, and gradient diminishes
         . and so time of flow increases, tem-
          perature tends to increase, and
          plankton flourish..

          Should a heavy load of inert silt
          develop  on  the other hand, the
          turbidity would reduce the light
          penetration and consequently the
          general  plankton production would
          diminish.

       3  As the stream approaches base level
          (old age) and the time available for
          plankton growth increases, the
        •  balance  between turbidity, nutrient
          levels,  and temperature and other
          seasonal conditions,  determines the
          overall  productivity.

  C Factors Affecting the Productivity of
    lakes (See Table  2)

        1  The size,  shape, and depth of the
          lake basin.  Shallow water is more
          productive  than deeper water since
          more light  will reach the bottom to
          stimulate rooted plant growth.  As
          a corollary,  lakes with more shore-
          line, having more shallow water,
          are in general more productive.
          Broad shallow lakes and reservoirs
          have the greatest production potential
          (and hence  should be avoided for
          water supplies).

                TABLE 2

         EFFECT  OF SUBSTRATE
        ON LAKE PRODUCTIVITY *

(The productivity of sand bottoms is taken as 1)
Bottom Material
Sand
Pebbles
Clay
Flat rubble
Block rubble
Shelving rock
Relative Productivity
1
4
8
9
11
77
                   * Selected from Tarzwell 1937
                                                                                       1-19

-------
 The Aquatic Environment
    2  Hard waters are generally more
      productive than soft waters as there
      are more plant nutrient minerals
      available.  This is often greatly in-
      fluenced by the character of the soil
      and rocks in the watershed and the
      quality and quantity of ground water
      entering the lake.  In general, pH
      ranges of 6. 8 to 8. 2 appear to be
      most productive.

    3  Turbidity reduces productivity as
      light penetration is reduced.

    4  The presence or absence of thermal
      stratification with its semi-annual
      turnovers affects productivity; by
      distributing nutrients throughout the
      water mass.

    5  Climate, temperature, prevalence of
      ice and snow, are also of course
      important.

    Factors  Affecting the Productivity  of
    Reservoirs

    1  The productivity of reservoirs is
      governed by much the same principles
      as that of lakes, with the difference
      that the water level is much more
      under the control of man.   Fluctuations
      in water  level can be used to de-
      liberately increase or decrease
      productivity.  This can be demonstrated
      by a comparison of the TVA reservoirs
      which practice a summer drawdown
      with some of those in the west where
      a winter  drawdown is the rule.

    2  The level at which water is removed •
      from a reservoir is important to the
      productivity of the stream below.
      The hypolimnion may be anaerobic
      while  the epilimnion is aerobic,  for
      example, or the epilimnion is poor in
      nutrients while the hypoli'mnion is
      relatively rich.

   3  Reservoir discharges also profoundly
      affect the DO, temperature, and
      turbidity  in the stream below a dam.
      Too much fluctuation in flow may
      permit sections of the stream to dry,
      or provide inadequate dilution for
      toxic waste.
IV CULTURAL EUTROPHICATION

 A The general processes of natural
   eutrophication, or natural enrichment
   and productivity have been briefly out-
   lined above.

 B When the activities of man speed up
   these enrichment processes by intro-
   ducing unnatural quantities of nutrients
   (sewage, etc.) the result is often called
   cultural eutrophication.  This term is
   often extended beyond its original usage
   to include the enrichment (pollution) of
   streams, estuaries, and even oceans, as
   well as lakes.
V CLASSIFICATION OF LAKES AND
   RESERVOIRS

A The productivity of lakes and impound-
   ments is such a1 conspicuous feature that
   it is often used as a convenient means of
   classification.

   1  Oligotrophic lakes are the younger,
      less productive lakes, which are deep,
      have clear water, and usually support
      Salmonoid fishes in their deeper waters.

   2  Eutrophic lakes  are more mature,
      more turbid, and richer.  They are
      usually shallower.  They are richer
      in dissolved solids; N,  P, and Ca are
      abundant.  Plankton is abundant and
      there is often a rich bottom fauna.

   3  Dystrophic lakes, such as bog lakes,
      are low in Ph,  water yellow to brown,
      dissolved solids, N, P,  and Ca scanty
      but humic materials abundant, bottom
      fauna and plankton poor,  and fish
      species are limited.

B Reservoirs may also be classified as
   storage, and run of the river.

   1  Storage reservoirs have a large
      volume in relation to their inflow.

   2  Run of the river reservoirs have  a
      large flow-through in relation to their
      storage value.
1-20

-------
                                                                The Aquatic Environment
  C According to location, lakes and
    reservoirs may be classified as polar,
    temperate, or tropical.   Differences in
    climatic and geographic conditions
    result in differences in their biology.
VI  SUMMARY

 A A body of water such as a lake, stream,
    or estuary represents an intricately
    balanced system in a state of dynamic
    equilibrium.  Modification imposed at
    one point in the system automatically
    results in compensatory adjustments at
    associated points.

 B The more thorough our knowledge of the
    entire system, the better we  can judge
    where to impose control measures to
    achieve a desired result.
 6   Tarzwell,  Clarence M.  Experimental
      Evidence on the Value of Trout 1937
      Stream Improvement in Michigan.
      American Fisheries Society Trans.
      66:177-187.  1936.

 7   U. S. Dept. of Health, Education, and
      Welfare.  Public Health Service.
      Algae and Metropolitan Wastes.
      Transactions of a seminar held
      April 27-29,  1960 at the Robert A.
      Taft Sanitary Engineering Center.
      Cincinnati, OH. No.  SECTRW61-3.

 8   Ward and Whipple. Fresh Water
      Biology. (Introduction).  John
      Wiley Company.  1918.
 REFERENCES

 1  Chamberlin,  Thomas C. and Salisburg,
       Rollin P.  Geological Processes and
       Their Results.  Geology 1: pp i-xix,
       and 1-654. Henry Holt and Company.
       New York. 1904.

 2  Frey,  David  G.  Limnology in North
       America.   Univ.  Wise. Press.  1963.

 3  Hutcheson, George E.  A Treatise on
       Limnology Vol. I  Geography, Physics
       and Chemistry.  1957.  Vol. II.
       Introduction to Lake Biology and the
       Limnoplankton.  1115pp.  1967.
       John Wiley Co.

 4  Hynes, H.B.N.  The Ecology of Running
       Waters.  Univ. Toronto Press.
       555 pp.  1970.

 5  Ruttner,  Franz.   Fundamentals of
       Limnology.  University of Toronto
       Press,  pp. 1-242.  1953.
 This outline was prepared by H. W.  Jackson,
 Chief Biologist, National Training Center,
 Water Programs Operations, EPA,  Cincinnati,
 OH 45268.
 Descriptors:
Aquatic Environment, Estuarine  Environment,
Lentic Environment, Lotic Environment,
 Currents, Marshes, Limnology, Water
 Properties
                                                                                     1-21

-------
                             THE AQUATIC ENVIRONMENT
    Part 4.  The Marine Environment and its Role in the Total Aquatic Environment
                                                                TABLE i
I  INTRODUCTION

A  The marine environment is arbitrarily
   defined as the water mass extending.
   beyond the continental land masses,
   including the plants and  animals harbored
   therein. This water mass is large and
   deep, covering about 70 percent of the
   earth's surface  and being as deep as
   7 miles.  The salt content averages
   about 35 parts per thousand.  Life extends
   to all depths.

B  The general nature of the water cycle on
   earth is well known.  Because the  largest
   portion of the surface  area of the earth
   is covered with  water, roughly 70  percent
   of the earth's rainfall is on the seas.
   (Figure 1)
                            >*w
     SE« SURFACE

         Figure 1. THE WATER C1CLE
 Since .roughly one third of the
 rain which falls on the land is again
 recycled through the atmosphere
 (see Figure  1 again),  the total amount
 of water washing over the earth's  surface
 is significantly greater than one third of
 the total world rainfall.  It is thus not
 surprising to note that the rivers which
 finally empty into the sea carry a
 disproportionate burden of dissolved and
 suspended solids picked up from the land.
 The chemical composition of this burden
 depends on the composition of the  rocks
 and soils through which the river flows,
 the proximity of an ocean,  the direction
 of prevailing winds,  and other factors.
 This is the substance of geological erosion.
 (Table 1)

BI. 21e.l.74
                                                PERCENTAGE COMPOSITION OF THE MAJOR IONS
                                                      OF TWO STREAMS AND SEA WATER

                                               (Data from Clark, F.W.,  1924, "The Composition of River
                                               and Lake Waters of the United States", U.S. Geol. Surv.,
                                               Prof. Paper No. 135; Harvey, H. W., 1957, "The Chemistry
                                               and Fertility of Sea Waters", Cambridge University Press,
                                               Cambridge)
Ion
Na
K
Ca
Mg
Cl
•so4
C03
Delaware River
at
Lambertville, N. J.
6.70
1.46
17.49 ,
4.81
4.23
17.49
32.95
Rio Grande
at
Laredo, Texas
14.78
.85
13.73
3.03
21.65
30. 10
11.55
Sea Water
30.4
1. 1
1.16
3.7
55.2
7.7.
•mco, 0.35
o
                                                C  For this presentation, the marine
                                                   environment will be (1) described using
                                                   an ecological approach,  (2) characterized
                                                   ecologically by comparing it with fresh-
                                                   water and estuarine environments, and
                                                   (3) considered as a functional ecological
                                                   system (ecosystem).
                                                  H  FRESHWATER,  ESTUARINE, AND
                                                     MARINE ENVIRONMENTS

                                                  Distinct differences are found in physical,
                                                  chemical, and biotic factors in going from
                                                  a freshwater to an oceanic environment.
                                                  In general, environmental factors are more
                                                  constant in freshwater (rivers) and oceanic
                                                  environments than in the highly variable
                                                  and harsh environments of estuarine and
                                                  coastal waters.  (Figure 2)

                                                  A Physical and Chemical Factors

                                                     Rivers, estuaries,  and oceans are
                                                     compared in Figure 2 with reference to
                                                     the relative instability (or variation) of
                                                     several important parameters.  In the
                                                     oceans, it will be noted,  very little  change
                                                     occurs in any parameter.  In rivers, while
                                                     "salinity" (usually referred to as "dissolved
                                                     solids") and temperature (accepting normal
                                                     seasonal variations) change little, the other
                                                     four parameters vary considerably.  In
                                                     estuaries, they all  change.
                                                                                         1-23

-------
  The Aquatic Environment
Type of environment
and general direction
 of water movement
Salinity
                                     Degree of instability
Temperature
 Water
elevation
Vertical
 strati-
 fication
 Avail-
 ability
   of
nutrients
(degree)
Turbidity
 Riverine
    Oceanic
       Figure2 .  RELATIVE VALUES OF VARIOUS PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL FACTORS
                  FOR RIVER, ESTUARINE, AND OCEANIC ENVIRONMENTS
 B  Biotic Factors

    1 A complex of physical and chemical
      factors determine the biotic composi-
      tion of an environment.  In general,
      the number of species in a rigorous,
      highly variable environment tends to be
      less than the number in a more stable
      environment (Hedgpeth, 1966).

    2 The dominant animal species (in
      terms of total biomass) which occur
      in estuaries are often transient,
      spending only a part of their lives in
      the estuaries.  This results in better
      utilization of a rich environment.
                           C Zones of the Sea

                             The nearshore environment is often
                             classified in relation to tide level and
                             water depth.  The nearshore and offshore
                             oceanic regions together, are often
                             classified with reference to light penetra-
                             tion and water depth.  (Figure 3)

                             1  Neritic - Relatively shallow-water
                                zone which extends from the high-
                                tide mark to the edge of the
                                continental shelf.
  1-24

-------
                                               The Aquatic Environment
                       MARINE ECOLOGY
                                   _____ _ ___ _/-„
                                                            "
                              S//S/SSSSSS/JSSSSS':"
                                     wsssssssssss
      opt/Of*

BENTHIC (Bottom)
  Supro-IIMorol
  Littorol 0/MarfiJal)
  Subliftarot
    Inntr
    Ovt«r
            FIGURE 3—Classification of marine environments
   a  Stability of physical factors is
      intermediate between estuarine
      and oceanic environments.

   b  Phytoplankters are the dominant
      producers but in some locations
      attached algae are also important
      as producers.

   c  The animal consumers are
      zooplankton, nekton, and benthic
      forms.

2  Oceanic - The region of the ocean
   beyond the continental shelf.  Divided
   into three parts, all relatively
   poorly populated compared to the
   neritic zone.

   a  Euphotic zone -  Waters into which
      sunlight penetrates (often to the
      bottom in the neritic zone).  The
      zone of primary productivity often
      extends to 600 feet below the surface.
                                         1) Physical factors fluctuate
                                            less than in the neritic zone.

                                         2) Producers are the phyto-
                                            plankton and consumers are
                                            the zooplankton and nekton.

                                      b  Bathyal zone - From the bottom
                                         of the euphotic zone to about
                                         2000 meters.

                                         1) Physical factors relatively
                                            constant but light is absent.

                                         2) Producers are absent and
                                            consumers are scarce. '

                                      c  Abyssal zone - All the sea below
                                         the bathyal zone.

                                         1) Physical factors more con-
                                            stant than in bathyal zone.

                                         2) Producers absent and consumers
                                            even less abundant than in the
                                            bathyal zone.
                                                                       1-25

-------
  The Aquatic Environment
III  SEA WATER AND THE BODY FLUIDS

 A Sea water is a remarkably suitable
    environment for living cells, as it
    contains all of the chemical elements
    essential to the growth and maintenance
    of plants and animals.  The ratio and
    often the concentration of the major
    salts of sea water are strikingly similar
    in the cytoplasm  and body fluids of
    marine organisms.  This similarity is
    also evident, although modified somewhat
    in the body fluids of fresh  water and
    terrestrial animals.  For example,
    sterile sea water may be used in
    emergencies as a substitute for blood
    plasma in man.

 B Since marine organisms have an internal
    salt  content similar to that of their
    surrounding medium (isotonic condition)
    osmoregulation poses no problem.  On the
    other hand,  fresh water  organisms are
    hypertonic (osmotic pressure of body
    fluids is higher than that of the surround-
    ing water).  Hence, fresh water animals
    must constantly expend more energy to
    keep water out (i.e.,  high osmotic
    pressure fluids contain more salts, the
    action being then to dilute this concen-
    tration with more water).

    1  Generally, marine invertebrates are
       narrowly poikilosmotic, i.e.,  the salt
       concentration of the body fluids changes
       with that of the external medium. This
       has  special significance in estuarine
       situations where salt  concentrations
       of the water  often vary considerably
       in short periods of time.

    2  Marine bony fish (teleosts) have lower
       salt content internally than the external
       environment (hypotonic). In order to
       prevent dehydration, water is ingested
       and  salts are excreted through special
       cells in the gills.
IV FACTORS AFFECTING THE DISTRI-
   BUTION OF MARINE AND ESTUARINE
   ORGANISMS

 A Salinity.  Salinity is the single most
   constant and controlling factor in the
   marine environment, probably followed
   by temperature.  It ranges around
   35, 000 mg. per liter,  or  "35 parts per
   thousand" (symbol: 35%0) in the language
   of the oceanographer.  While variations
   in the open ocean are relatively small,
   salinity decreases rapidly as one
   approaches shore and proceeds through
   the estuary and up into fresh water with
   a salinity of "0 %„ (see Figure  2)

 B Salinity and temperature as limiting
   factors in ecological distribution.

   1  Organisms differ in the salinities
      and temperatures in which they
      prefer to live, and in the variabilities
      of these parameters which they can
      tolerate.  These preferences and
      tolerances often change with successive
      life history stages,  and in turn often
      dictate where the organisms live:
      their "distribution."

   2  These requirements or preferences
      often lead to extensive migrations
      of various species for  breeding,
      feeding, and growing stages.  One
      very important result of this is that
      an estuarine environment is an
      absolute necessity for  over  half of
      all coastal commercial and  sport
      related species of fishes and invertebrates,
      for either all  or certain portions of their
      life histories. (Part V, figure 8)

   3  The Greek word roots  "eury"
      (meaning wide) and "steno"  (meaning
      narrow) are customarily combined
      with such words as "haline" for salt,
      and "thermal" for temperature,  to
      give us  "euryhaline" as an adjective
      to characterize an organism able to
      tolerate a wide range of salinity, for
      example; or "stenothermal" meaning
      one which cannot stand much change
      in temperature. "Meso-" is a prefix
      indicating an intermediate capacity.
   1-26

-------
                                                               The Aquatic Environment
   Marine, estuarine,  and fresh water
   organisms.  (See Figure 4)
Fresh Water
Stenohaline
Marine
Stenohaline
                  Salinity
       ca.;35
 Figure 4.  Salinity Tolerance of Organisms

   1 Offshore marine organisms are, in
     general, both Stenohaline and
     stenothermal unless, as noted above,
     they have certain life history require-
     ments for estuarine conditions.

   2 Fresh water organisms are also
     Stenohaline,  and (except for  seasonal
     adaptation) meso- or stenothermal.
     (Figure 2)

   3 Indigenous or native estuarine species
     that normally spend their entire lives
     in the estuary are relatively few in
     number. (See Figure 5). They are
     generally meso-  or euryhaline and
     meso- or eurythermal..
              10
                   15   20   25   30  35
                      lity
     Figure 5.  DISTRIBUTION OF
                ORGANISMS IN AN ESTUARY
        a  Euryhaline,  freshwater
        b  Indigenous, estuarine,  (mesohaline)
        c  Euryhaline,  marine
   4   Some well known and interesting
       examples of migratory species which
       change their environmental preferences
       with the life history stage include the
       shrimp (mentioned above), striped bass,
       many herrings and relatives, the salmons,
       and many others.  None are more
       dramatic than the salmon hordes which
       lay their eggs in freshwater streams,
       migrate far out to sea to feed and grow,
       then return to the stream where they
       hatched to lay their own eggs before
       dying.

    5  Among euryhaline animals landlocked
      (trapped), populations living in lowered
      salinities often have a smaller maximum
      size than individuals of the same species
      living in more saline waters.  For
      example, the lamprey (Petromyzon
      marinus)  attains a length of 30  - 36"
      in the sea, while in the Great  Lakes
      the length is 18 -  24".

      Usually the larvae of aquatic organisms
      are more sensitive to changes in
      salinity than are the adults.  This
      characteristic both limits and dictates
      the distribution and size of populations.

D  The effects of tides on organisms.

   1  Tidal fluctuations probably subject
      the benthic or intertidal populations
      to the most extreme an'd rapid variations
      of environmental stress encountered
      in any aquatic habitat.  Highly specialized
      communities have developed in this
      zone,  some adapted to the rocky surf
      zones of the open  coast, others to the
      muddy inlets of protected  estuaries.
      Tidal reaches of fresh water rivers,
      sandy beaches, coral reefs and
      mangrove swamps in the tropics; all
      have their own floras and faunas.  All
      must emerge and flourish when whatever
      wate'r there is  rises  and covers or
      tears at them,  all must collapse or
      retract to endure drying,  blazing
      tropical sun, or freezing arctic ice
      during the low tide interval. Such  a
      community is depicted in Figure 6.
                                                                                      1-27

-------
The Aquatic Environment
®
    SNAILS

    Littorina neritoides
    L. rudis
    L. obtusata
    ' L. littorea

    P,AiWACLES

    Chthamalus .stellatus
    Balanus balanoides
    R. pert'oratus
                                  ^Avv
^&m^*^^^  ,.
"t*^W:V^\^-5^r^k€:?,c
& »$W;/ v::\;;fe.;:C;^:^  «
) * « o  %t;^:,;;:.\v^)y/;c;;::^fe-v-;:i
           J^^^^N^^fc^i"
          tfe^ "1 - W .
                                    Figure'6

            Zonation of plants, snails, and barnacles on a rocky shore.  While
            this diagram is based on the  situation on the southwest coast of
            England, the general idea of  zonation may be applied to any  temper-
            atf rocky ocean shore,  though the species will differ.  The gray
            zone consists largely of lichens.  At the left is the zonation  of rocks
            with exposure too extreme to support algae; at the right, on a  less
            exposed situation, the animals are mostly obscured by the algae.
            Figures at the right hand margin refer to the percent of time that
            the zone is exposed to the air, i. e.,  the time that the tide is out.
            Three major zones can be  recognized: the Littorina zone (above the
            gray zone);  the Balanoid zone (between the gray zone and the
            laminarias); and the Laminaria zone.  a. Pelvetia canaliculata;
            b. Fucus spiralis; c. Ascophyllum nodosum; d. Fucus serratus;
            e. Laminaria digitata. (Based on Stephenson)
  1-28

-------
                                                              The Aquatic Environment
V  FACTORS AFFECTING THE
   PRODUCTIVITY OF THE MARINE
   ENVIRONMENT

A  The sea is in continuous circulation.  With-
   out circulation, nutrients of the ocean would
   eventually become a part of the bottom and
   biological production would cease.  Generally,
   in all oceans there exists a warm  surface
   layer which overlies the colder water and
   forms a two-layer system of persistent
   stability.  Nutrient concentration is usually
   greatest in the lower zone. Wherever a
   mixing or disturbance of these two layers
   occurs biological production is greatest.

B  The estuaries are also a mixing zone of
   enormous importance.  Here the fertility
   washed off the land is mingled with the
   nutrient capacity of seawater,  and many
   of the would1 s most productive waters
   result.

C  When man adds his cultural contributions
   of sewage, fertilizer,  silt or toxic waste,
   it is no wonder that the dynamic equilibrium
   of the ages is rudely upset, and the
   environmentalist cries,  "See what man
   hath wrought"!
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT:

This outline contains selected material
from other outlines prepared by C. M.
Tarzwell, Charles L. Brown, Jr.,
C. G. Gunnerson,  W. Lee Trent, W.  B.
Cooke, B. H. Ketchum, J.  K.  McNulty,
J. L.  Taylor, R. M. Sinclair, and others.
REFERENCES

1  Harvey,  H.  W.  The Chemistry and
      Fertility of Sea Water (2nd Ed.).
      Cambridge Univ. Press,  New York.
      234pp.   1957.

2  Hedgpeth, J. W. (Ed.).  Treatise on
      Marine Ecology and Paleoecology.
      Vol. I.  Ecology Mem.  67 Geol.
      Soc. Amer.,  New York.   1296pp.
      1957.

3  Hill, M. N. (Ed.).  The Sea. Vol. II.
      The Composition of Sea Water
      Comparative  and Descriptive
      Oceanography.  Interscience Publs.
      John Wiley & Sons,  New York.
      554pp.   1963.

4  Moore, H. B. Marine Ecology..  John
      Wiley & Sons, Inc.,  New York.
      493 pp.   1958.

5  Reid, G. K.  Ecology of Inland Waters
      and Estuaries.  Reinhold Publ.
      Corp.  New York.  375pp.  1961.

6  Sverdrup, Johnson, and Fleming.
      The Oceans.  Prentice-Hall, Inc.,
      New York.  1087 pp.   1942.
This outline was prepared by H. W.  Jackson,
Chief Biologist, National  Training Center,
Water Programs Operations, EPA, Cincinnati,
OH. 45268.

Descriptors:
Aquatic Environment, Estuarine Environment,
Lentic Environment, Lotic Environment,
Currents, Marshes, Limnology, Water Properties
                                                                                    1-29

-------
                                 THE AQUATIC ENVIRONMENT

                                        Part 5:   Wetlands
  I  INTRODUCTION

  A  Broadly defined, wetlands are areas
     which are "to wet to plough but too
     thick to flow. "   The soil tends to be
     saturated with water, salt or fresh,
     and numerous channels or ponds of
     shallow or open water are common.
     Due to ecological features too numerous
     and variable to list here, they comprise
     in general a rigorous (highly stressed)
     habitat, occupied by a small relatively
     specialized indigenous (native) flora
     and fauna.

  B  They are prodigiously productive
     however, and many constitute an
     absolutely essential habitat for some
     portion of the life history of animal
     forms generally recognized as residents
   '  of other habitats (Figure 8).  This is
     particularly true of tidal marshes as
     mentioned below.

  C Wetlands  in toto comprise a remarkably
    large proportion of the earth's surface,
    and the total organic carbon bound in
    their mass constitutes an enormous
    sink of energy.

 D Since our main concern here is with
                  environment, primary
    emphasis will be directed toward a
    description of wetlands as the transitional
    zone between the waters and the land, and
    how their desecration by human culture
    spreads degradation in both directions..
II   TIDAL MARSHES AND THE ESTUARY     (=--
B Estuarine pollution studies are usually
   devoted to the dynamics of the circulating
   water, its chemical,  physical,  and
   biological parameters, bottom deposits,  etc.

C It is easy to overlook the intimate relation-
   ships which exist between the bordering
   marshland,  the  moving waters, the. tidal
   flats, subtidal deposition, and seston
   whether of local, oceanic, or riverine
   origin.

D The tidal marsh (some inland  areas also
   have salt marshes) is generally considered
   to be the marginal areas  of estuaries and
   coasts in the intertidal zone, which are
   dominated by emergent vegetation.  They
   generally extend inland to the farthest
   point reached by the spring tides, where
   they merge into  freshwater swamps and
   marshes (Figure 1).  They may range in
   width from nonexistent on rocky coasts to
   many kilometers.
    "There is no other case in nature,  save
    in the coral reefs, where the adjustment
    of organic relations to physical condition
    is seen in such a beautiful way as the
    balance between the growing marshes
    and the tidal streams by which they are
    at once nourished and worn away. "
    (Shaler,  1886)
                                              Flfuro 1. Zoiuttoo In > positive Now England Mtturr.  1. Spring lido le»«l 1. Mewl hljh lUs.
                                              3. Mean low tlda, 4. Dog hole, 5. Ice cleavage pool, 6. Chunk of Spartlna turt deposited by ice.
 .        , .      ,  .          , .
7. Organic ooce with •MOctated community, 8. velfraia (ZoBlere)
cUm Inural • mud «iull (Mjurel commviUtt. 10. 3«» lettuce |Ulv»>
                                            .
                        (ZoBlere), 9. Ribbed muafel* (motttolu*)*
BI, 21e.l.74
                                                                                        1-31

-------
  The Aquatic Environment
III  MARSH ORIGINS AND STRUCTURES

 A In general, marsh substrates are high in
    organic content, relatively low in minerals
    and trace elements.   The upper layers
    bound together with living roots called
    turf,  underlaid by more compacted peat
    type material.

    1  Rising or eroding coastlines may
       expose peat from ancient marsh
       growth to wave action which cuts
       into  the soft peat rapidly (Figure 2).
Such banks are likely to be cliff-like,
and are often undercut.  Chunks of
peat are often found lying about on
harder substrate below high tide line.
If face of cliff is well above high water,
overlying vegetation is  likely to be
typically terrestrial of  the area.
Marsh type vegetation is probably
absent.

Low lying deltaic,  or sinking coast-
lines,  or those with low energy wave
action are likely to have active marsh
formation in progress.  Sand dunes
are also common in such areas
(Figure 3).  General coastal      :
configuration is a factor.
       Figure 2.  Diagrammatic section of eroding peat cliff
                                                                      MHW HI iiootec
                                                                      MHWO'  I9SOIAD
                                               Figure 3
                       Development of a Massachusetts Marsh since 1300 BC, Involving an
                       18 foot rise In water level.  Shaded area indicates sand dunes. Note
                       meandering marsh tidal drainage.  A:  1300 BC. B:  1950 AD.
  1-32

-------
                                                               The Aquatic  Environment
Rugged or precipitous coasts or
slowly rising coasts,  typically
exhibit narrow shelves, sea cliffs,
fjords, massive beaches, and
relatively less marsh area  (Figure 4).
An Alaskan fjord subject to recent
catastrophic  subsidence and rapid
deposition of glacial flour shows
evidence of the recent encroachment
of saline waters in the presence of
recently buried trees  and other
terrestrial vegetation, exposure
of layers of salt marsh peat along
the edges of  channels, and a poorly
compacted young marsh turf developing
at the new high water  level  (Figure 5).
                                             Figure 4  A River Mouth on a Slowly Rising Coast. Note absence
                                                     of deltaic development and relatively little marshland.
                                                     although mud flats stippled are extensive.
Figure 5 Some general relationships in a northern fjord with a rising water level. 1.  mean low
         water, 2.  maximum high tide, 3. Bedrock, 4.  Glacial flour to depths in excess of
         400 meters,  5. Shifting flats and channels, 6. Channel against bedrock, 7. Buried
         terrestrial vegetation,  8. Outcroppings of salt marsh peat.
Low lying coastal plains tend to be
fringed by barrier islands, broad
estuaries and deltas, and broad
associated marshlands (Figure 3).
Deep tidal channels fan out through
innumerable branching and often
interconnecting rivulets.  The
intervening grassy plains are
essentially at  mean high tide level.
                                                                                     1-33

-------
  The Aquatic Environment
          Tropical and subtropical regions
          such as Florida, the Gulf Coast,
          and Central America, -are frequented
          by  mangrove swamps.  This unique
          type of growth is able to establish
          itself in shallow water and move out
          into progressively deeper areas
          (Figure 6).  The strong deeply
          embedded  roots enable the mangrove
          to resist considerable wave action
          at times,  and the tangle of roots
          quickly accumulates a deep layer of
          organic sediment.  Mangroves
          in the south may be considered to
          be  roughly the equivalent of the
          Spartina marsh  grass in the north
          as  a land builder.  When fully
          developed, a mangrove  swamp is an
          impenetrable thicket of  roots over
          the tidal flat affprding shelter to an
          assortment of semi-aquatic organisms
          such as various molluscs and
          crustaceans,  and providing access
          from the nearby land to predaceous
          birds, reptiles, and mammals.
          Mangroves are not restricted to
          estuaries,  but may develop out into
          shallow oceanic lagoons, or upstream
          into relatively fresh waters.
  Figure 6   Diagrammatic transect of a mangrove swamp
            showing transition from marine to terrestrial
            habitat.
      tidal marsh is the marsh grass,  but very
      little of it is used by man as grass.
      (Table 1)

      The nutritional analysis of 'several
      marsh grasses as compared to dry land
      hay is  shown in  Table 2.
'TABLE 1. General Orders of Magnitude of Gross Primary Productivity in Terms
             of Dry Weight of Organic Matter Fixed Annually
      Ecosystem
    gms/M /year      . r
(grams/square meters^year)
                                            Iba/acre/year
 Land deserts, deep oceans        Tens
 Grasslands, forests, cutrophlc     Hundreds
   lakes, ordinary agriculture
 Estuaries, deltas, coral reefs.     Thousands
   intensive agriculture (sugar
   cane, rice)
                       Hundreds
                       Thousands

                       Ten-thousands
      TABLE 2. Analyses of Some Tidal Marsh Grasses
                                                         T/A
                                                        Dry Wt.
                 Perccntaj?e Composition
           Protein   fal      Fiber    Water
                                         Ash
                                                N-free Eitract
 Oitlichlit spicata (pure stand, dry)
   2.8       5.3     1.7      32.4      8.2      6.7        45.5
 Short Spartina-allcrniflora and Salicornia curopaea {in standing water)
   1.2       7.7     2.5      31.1      8.8      12.0        37.7
 Spartina atlcrnitlora (tall, pure stand in standing water)
   3.5       7.S     2.0      29.0      8.3      15.5        37.3
 Spartina patent 'purr: stamj, rlry)
   3.2       >,t)
   2.2       &8     2.4      30.4      8.7      13.3        36.3
Comparable Analyses (or Hay
 IstMjt      fi.O     2.0      36.2      6.7      4.2        44.9
 in.J.ul     11.0     1.7      20.5      10.4      5.9        30.5

   Analyses performed by Roland W. Gilbert, Department
   of Agricultural Chemistry, U.R.I.
IV  PRODUCTIVITY OF  WETLANDS

 A  Measuring the productivity of grasslands
    is not easy,  because  today grass is seldom
    used directly as such by man.  It is thus
    usually expressed as production of meat,
    milk,  or in the case of salt marshes, the
    total crop of animals that obtain food per
    unit of area.  The primary producer in a
  1-34

-------
                                                               The Aquatic Environment
The actual utilization of marsh grass is
accomplished primarily by its decom-
position and ingestion by micro organisms.
(Figure 7) A  small quantity of seeds and
solids is consumed directly by birds.
   Figure  7  The nutritive composition of
   successive stages of decomposition of
   Spartlna marsh grass, showing increase
   in protein and decrease in carbohydrate
   with Increasing age and decreasing size
   of detritus particles.

   The quantity of micro invertebrates
   which thrive on this wealth of decaying
   marsh has  not been estimated, nor has
   the actual production of small  indigenous
   fishes and invertebrates such as the
   top minnows (Fundulus),  or the  mud
   snails (Nassa), and others.

   Many forms of oceanic life migrate
   into the estuaries, especially the
   marsh areas,  for important portions
   of their life histories as is mentioned
   elsewhere (Figure 8).  It has been
   estimated that in excess of 60% of the
   marine commercial and sport fisheries
   are estuarine or marsh dependent in
   some way.
                                                      Figul-e 8  Diagram of the life cycle
                                                      of white shrimp (after Anderson and
                                                      Lunz 1965).
3  An effort to make an indirect
   estimate of productivity in a  Rhode
   Island marsh was made on a single
   August day by recording the numbers
   and kinds of birds that  fed on a
   relatively small area (Figure 9).
   Between 700 and 1000 wild birds of
   12 species,  ranging from  100 least
   sandpipers to uncountable  numbers
   of seagulls were  counted.  One food
   requirement estimate for three-
   pound poultry in the confined inactivity
   of a poultry yard is approximately one
   ounce per pound of bird per day.
                                                      Greater yellow legs (left)
                                                        and black duck
                                                                    Great blue heron
                                                   Figure 9  Some Common Marsh Birds
                                                                                     1-35

-------
The Aquatic Environment
      One-hundred black bellied plovers
      at approximately ten ounces each
      would weigh on the order of sixty
      pounds.  At the same rate of food
      consumption, this would indicate
      nearly four pounds of food required
      for this species alone.  The much
      greater activity of the wild birds
      would obviously greatly increase their
      food requirements,  as would their
      relatively  smaller size.

      Considering the range of foods con-
      sumed, the sizes of the birds, and the
      fact that at certain seasons, thousands
      of migrating ducks and others pause
      to feed here, the enormous productivity
      of such a marsh can be better under-
      stood.
V  INLAND BOGS AND MARSHES

A  Much of what has been said of tidal
   marshes also applies to inland wetlands.
   As was mentioned earlier, not all inland
   swamps are salt-free, any more than all
   marshes affected by tidal rythms are
   saline.

B  The specificity of specialized floras to
   particular types  of wetlands  is perhaps
   more spectacular in freshwater wetlands
   than  in the marine, where Juncus,
   Spartina, and Mangroves tend to dominate.

   1  Sphagnum,  or peat moss, is
      probably one of the most widespead
      and abundant wetland plants on earth.
      Deevey (1958) quotes an estimate that
      there is probably upwards of 223
      billions (dry weight) of tons of peat
      in the world- today, derived during
      recent geologic time from Sphagnum
      bogs.  Particularly in the northern
      regions, peat moss tends to overgrow
      ponds and shallow depressions,  eventually
      forming the vast tundra plains and
      moores of the north.

   2  Long lists of other bog and marsh plants
      might be cited, each with its own
      special requirements, topographical,
      and geographic distribution,  etc.
      Included would be the familiar cattails,
      spike rushes, cotton grasses, sedges,
      trefoils, alders,  and many, many
      others.

C  Types of inland wetlands.

   1   As noted above (Cf:  Figure 1)
      tidal marshes often  merge into
      freshwater marshes and bayous.
      Deltaic tidal swamps and marshes
      are often saline in the seaward
      portion, and fresh in the landward
      areas.

   2   River bottom wetlands differ from
      those formed from lakes, since wide
      flood plains subject to periodic
      inundation are the final stages of
      the erosion of river  valleys,  whereas
      lakes in general tend to be eliminated
      by the geologic processes of natural
      eutrophication  often involving
      Sphagnum and peat formation.
      Riverbottom marshes in the southern
      United States, with favorable climates,
      have luxurient growths such as the
      canebrake of the  lower Mississippi,
      or a characteristic timber growth
      such as cypress.

   3   Although bird life is the most
      conspicuous animal element in the
      fauna (Cf:  Figure 9), many mammals,
      such as muskrats, beavers,  otters,
      and others  are  also marsh-oriented.
      (Figure 12)
      Figure 12
1-36

-------
                                                                  The Aquatic'Environment
VI  POLLUTION

 A No single statement can summarize the
    effects of pollution'on marshlands as
    distinct from effects noted elsewhere on
    other habitats.

 B Reduction of Primary Productivity

    The primary producers in most wetlands
    are the grasses and peat mosses.
    Production may be reduced or eliminated
    by:

    1  Changes in the  water level brought
       about by flooding or drainage.

       a  Marshland areas are sometimes
          diked and flooded to produce fresh-
          water, ponds. This may be  for
          aesthetic reasons,  to suppress the
          growth of noxious marsh inhabit at ing
          insects such as mosquitoes or biting
          midges,  to construct an industrial
          waste  holding pond, a thermal or a
          sewage stabilization pond, a
          "convenient" result of highway
          causeway construction, or other
          reason.  ' The result is the elim-
          ination of an area of marsh. A
          small  compensating border of
          marsh may or may not develop.

       b  High tidal marshes were often
          ditched and drained in former days
          to stabilize the sod for salt hay or
          "thatch" harvesting which was highly
          sought after  in colonial days. This
          inevitably changed the character
          of the  marsh, but it remained as
          essentially marshland.  Conversion
          to outright agricultural land has
          been less widespread because of the
          necessity of  diking to exclude the
          periodic floods or tidal incursions,
          and carefully timed drainage to .
          eliminate excess precipitation.
          Mechanical pumping of tidal marshes
          has not been economical in  this
          country,  although the success of
          the Dutch and others in this regard
          is well known.
2  Marsh grasses may.also be eliminated
   by smothering as, .for example,  by
   deposition of dredge spoils, or the
   spill or discharge of sewage sludge.

3  Considerable marsh area has been  ..
   eliminated by,industrial construction
   activity such as wharf and dock con-
   struction, oil well construction and
   operation, and the discharge of toxic
   brines and other chemicals.

Consumer production (animal life) has
been drastically reduced by the deliberate
distribution of pesticides.  In some cases,
this has been aimed at nearby agricultural
lands for  economic crop pest control,  in
other cases the marshes have been sprayed
or dusted directly to control noxious
insects.

1  The results have been universally
   disastrous for the marshes, and the
   benefits to the human community often
   questionable.

2  Pesticides designed to kill nuisance
   insects,  are also toxic to other
   arthropods so that in addition to the
   target  species, such forage staples as
   the various scuds (amphipods), fiddler
   crabs, and other macroinvertebrates
   have either been drastically reduced
   or entirely eliminated in many places.
   For example, one familiar with fiddler
   crabs can traverse  miles of marsh
   margins, still riddled with their burrows,
   without seeing a single live crab.

3  DDT and related compounds have been
   "eaten up the food chain" (biological
   magnification effect) until fish eating
   and other predatory birds such as herons
   and egrets (Figure 9),  have been virtually
   eliminated from vast areas, and the
   accumulation of DDT in man himself
   is  only too well known.
                                                                                       1-37

-------
The Aquatic Environment
D  Most serious of the marsh enemies is
   man himself.  In his quest for "lebensraum"
   near the water, he has all but killed the
   water he  strives to approach.  Thus up to
   twenty percent of the marsh--estuarine
   area in various parts of the  country has
   already been utterly destroyed by cut and
   fill real estate developments (Figures
   10,  11).
Swimming birds such as ducks,  loons,
cormorants,  pelicans, and many others
are severely jeopardized by floating
pollutants such as oil.
                     Figure 10.  Diagrammatic representation of cut-and-fill for
                                 real estate development,  mlw = mean low water
                     Figure 11.  Tracing of portion of map of a southern
                                 city showing extent of cut-and-fill real
                                 estate development.
 1-38

-------
                                                               The Aquatic Environment
VII SUMMARY

 A Wetlands comprise the marshes, swamps,
    bogs, and tundra areas of the world.
    They are essential to the well-being of
    our surface waters and ground waters.
    They are essential to aquatic life of
    all types living in the open waters.  They
    are essential as habitat for all forms of
    wildlife.

 B The tidal marsh is the area of emergent
    vegetation bordering the ocean or an
    estuary.

 C Marshes are highly productive areas,
    essential to the maintenance of a well
    rounded community of aquatic life.

 D Wetlands may be destroyed by:

    1  Degradation of the life forms of
       which it is  composed in the name of
       nuisance control.

    2  Physical destruction by cut-and-fill
       to create more land area.
5  Morgan,  J.P.  Ephemeral Estuaries of
      the Deltaic Environment in: Estuaries,
      pp.  115-120. Publ. No. 83,  Am.
      Assoc. Adv. Sci.  Washington,  DC. 1967.

6  Odum,  E.P.  and Dela Crug, A. A.
      Particulate Organic Detritus in  a
      Georgia Salt Marsh - Estuarine
      Ecosystem,  in:  Estuaries, pp.  383-
      388, Publ. No. 83,  Am. Assoc.  Adv.
      Sci. Washington, DC.  1967.

7  Redfield, A.C.  The Ontogeny of a Salt
      Marsh Estuary, in: Estuaries,  pp.
      108-114.  Publ. No. 83, Am.  Assoc.
      Adv. Sci.  Washington, DC.  1967.

8  Stuckey,  O. H.  Measuring the Productivity
      of Salt Marshes.  Maritimes (Grad
      School of Ocean., U.R.I.) Vol.  14(1):
      9-11.  February  1970.

9  Williams, R. B. Compartmental
      Analysis of Production and Decay
      of Juncus reomerianus.   Prog.
      Report,  Radiobiol. Lab., Beaufort, NC,
      Fiscal Year  1968, USDI, BCF,  pp.  10-
      12.
  REFERENCES

  1  Anderson, W. W.  The Shrimp and the
        Shrimp Fishery of the Southern
        United States.  USDI,  FWS, BCF.
        Fishery Leaflet 589.   1966.

  2  Deevey, E.S., Jr.  Bogs. Sci. Am. Vol.
        199(4):115-122.  October  1958.

  3  Emery, K. O.  and Stevenson.  Estuaries
        and Lagoons.   Part n, Biological
        Aspects by  J. W.  Hedgepeth,  pp.  693-
        728. in: Treatise on Marine Ecology
        and Paleoecology.  Geol.  Soc. Am.
        Mem. 67.   Washington, DC.   1957.

  4  Hesse, R., W. C. Allee, and K. P.
        Schmidt. Ecological Animal
        Geography.   John Wiley & Sons.  1937.
This outline was prepared by H.  W.  Jackson,
Chief Biologist, National Training Center,
Water  Programs Operations, EPA, Cincinnati,
OH   45268.
Descriptors:  Aquatic Environment, Estuarine
Environment,  Lentic Environment  Lotic
Environment,  Currents, Marshes,  Limnology
                                                                                    1-39

-------
                                      TYPES OF ALGAE
 I   INTRODUCTION
 A   Algae in general may be defined as small
     pigmented plant-like organisms of rela-'
     tively simple structure.  Actually the
     size range is extreme:  from only a
     few microns to over three hundred
     feet in length.  Commonly observed
     examples include the greenish pond
     scum or frog spittle of freshwater
     ponds, much of the golden brown
     slime covering rocks in a trout stream,
     and the great marine kelps and sea-
     weeds.  Large freshwater forms as
     Nitella and Chara or stonewort are also
     included.

 B   Algae approach ubiquity in distribution.
     In addition to the commonly observed
     bodies of water,  certain algae also
     live in such unlikely places as thermal
     springs, the surface of melting snow,
     on the hair of the three toed sloth in
     Central America, and in conjunction
     with certain  fungi to form lichens.
II   ALGAE WILL BE GROUPED FOR THE
     SAKE OF CONVENIENCE INTO FOUR
     GENERAL TYPES:
     Blue-greens (See plate: Blue-Green
     Algae, Cyanophyceae).  This is a valid
     technical group.  The size range is not
     very great, some being so small as to
     approach the size range  of the bacteria.

     1  These are the only algae in which
        the pigments are not localized  in
        definite bodies but dissolved through-
        out the cell.  Blue, red, or other
        pigments are present in addition to
        chlorophyll thus giving the cells a
        bluish green, -yellow,  or red color,
        at least enmasse.
   2  The nucleus lacks a nuclear membrane.

   3  Tend to achieve nuisance concentrations
      more frequently in the warm summer
      months and in the richer waters.

   4  Vegetative reproduction, in addition
      to cell division,  includes the forma-
      tion of  "hormogones, " or short specif-
      ically delimited sections of trichomes
      (filaments).

   5  Spores of three types are encountered:

      a Akinetes are usually larger,  thick
        walled resting spores.

      b Heterocysts appear like empty
        cell walls,  but are actually filled
        with protoplasm,  have occasionally
        been observed to germinate.

      c Endospores, also called "gonidia"
        or conidia, are formed by repeated
        division of the protoplast within a
        given  cell wall. Present in only a
        few generaj
   6  Some common examples of blue
        green algae are:

      Anacystis (Microcystis or
      Polycystis). Anabaena, Aphani-
      zomenon, and Oscillatoria.
B  The. Pigmented flagellates '("in contrast
   to the non-pigmented or animal-like
   flagellates) are a heterogeneous
   collection of motile forms from several
   different algal groups (See plate:
   Flagellated algae).

   1  There may be one, two, four, or
      more flagella  per cell.

   2  There  is a well organized nucleus.

   3  A light-sensitive  red eyespot usually
      present.
BI. MIC.cla. 19a.8.69
                                   2-1

-------
Types of Algae
   4  The chlorophyll is contained in one
      or more distinctive bodies called
      plastids.

   5  Two or more cells may be associated
      in a colony.

   6  Non-motile life history stages may
      be encountered.

   7  Masses of stored starch-called
      pyrenoid bodies are often conspicuous.

   8  Some examples of pigmented flag-
      ellates are: Euglena,  Phacus,
      Chlamydomonas. Gonium, Volvox,
      Peridinium, Ceratium Mallomonas,
      Synura  and Oinobryon.
C The Non- motile green algae constitute
   another heterogeneous assembly of un-
   related forms (See plate: Non-Motile
   Green Algae)

   1  Like the flagellates they have well
      organized nuclei and  chloroplasts.
      The shape of the chloroplast is often
      distinctive.

   2  They lack' flagella or  any other loco-
      motor device.

   3  There is extreme  structural variation
      among the group.

   4  Some  types tend to occur as a general
      planktonic mass or "bloom, " often
      in  combinations of two or more species.

      Some  examples are: Sphaerocystis;
      Pediastrum,  Scenedesmus, and the
      desmid  Cosmarium.

   5  Threadlike (filamentous) green algae may
      form masses or blankets, cutting off
      light,  and reducing water circulation.
      They also add considerably to the total
      mass  of organic matter.  Some examples
      of  this type are: Spirogyra, Hydrbdictyon,
      Cladophora, Oedogonium,  and Chara.
D The Diatoms constitute another valid
   technical group (See plate: Diatoms-
   Bacillariophyceae).

   1  In appearance,  they are geometrically
      regular in shape.'  The presence  of a
      'brownish  pigment in addition to the
      chlorophyll gives them a golden to
      greenish color.

   2  Motile forms have a distinctive
      hesitating progression.
      The  most distinctive structural
      feature is the two-part shell
      (frustule )  composed of'silicon
      dioxide (glass). '

      a  One  part fits inside the other as
         the two halves of a pill box, or a
         petri dish.

      b  The surface of these shells are
         sculptured with minute pits and
         lines arranged with geometrical
         perfection.

      c  The  view  from the side is  called
         the "girdle view, " that from above
         or below,  the  "valve view. "

      There are two general shapes of
      diatoms, circular (centric)  and
      elongate (pennate).   The elongate
      forms may be motile,  the circular
      ones  are not.

      Diatoms may associate in colonies
      in various ways.

      Examples of diatoms frequently en-
      countered are: Stephanodiscus
      Cyclotella, Asterionella, Fragilaria.
      Tabellaria,  Synedra,  and Nitzschia.
This outline was prepared by H. W.  Jackson,
Chief Biologist, National Training Center,
Water Programs Operations, EPA, Cincinnati,
 OH 45268.
  2-2

-------
                                                                          Types of Algae	
            KEY FOR IDENTIFICATION OF GROUPS OF FRESHWATER A LGAE
               Beginning with "la" and "ib", choose one of the two contrasting
               statements  and follow this procedure with the  "a" and "b" state-
               ments of the number given at the end of the chosen statement.
               Continue until the name of the algal group is given instead of
               another key number.
               la.   Plastid (separate color body) absent; complete protoplast
                    pigmented; generally blue-green; iodine starch test*
                    negative	Blue-green algae

               Ib.   Plastid or plastids present; parts of protoplast free of some
                    or all pigments; generally green, brown, red, etc.,  but not
                    blue-green; iodine starch test* positive or negative	2
               2a.   Cell wall permanently rigid (never showing evidence of
                    collapse), and with regular pattern of fine markings
                    (striations,  etc.); plastids brown to green; iodine starch test*
                    negative; flagella absent; wall of two essentially similar halves,
                    one placed over the other as a cover	Diatoms

               2b.   Cell wall, if present, capable of sagging,  wrinkling, bulging
                    or rigidity,  depending on existing turgor pressure of cell
                    protoplast; regular pattern of fine markings on wall generally
                    absent; plastids green,  red,  brown,  etc.;  iodine starch test*
                    positive or negative;  flagella present or absent; cell wall
                    continuous and  generally not of two parts	3
               3a.   Cell or colony motile; flagella present (often not readily visible);
                    anterior and posterior ends of cell different from one another in
                    contents and often in shape	Flagellate algae

               3b.   Non-motile; true flagella absent; ends of cells often not
                    differentiated	•	Green algae and associated forms
*Add one drop Lugol's (iodine) solution, diluted 1-1 with distilled water.  In about 1 minute,
 if positive,  starch is stained blue and, later black.  Other structures (such as nucleus,
 plastids, cell wall) may also stain,  but turn brown to yellow.

                                                                                    2-3

-------
 Types of Algae
 CMP
                COMPARISON OF FOUR MAJOR GROUPS OF ALGAE

Color
Location
of pigment
Starch
Slimy
coating
Nucleus
Flagellum
Cell Wall
"Eye "spot
Blue-Green
Blue-Green
(Brown)
Throughout
cell
Absent
Present
Absent
Absent
Inseparable
from slimy
coating
Absent
Pigmented
flagellates
Green
Brown
In plastids .
Present or
Absent
Absent
in most
Present
Present
Thin or
Absent
Present
Greens
Green
In plastids
Present
Absent
in most
Present
Absent
Semi-rigid
smooth or
with spines .
. Absent
Diatom s
Brown
(Light-Green)
In plastids
Absent
Absent
in most
Present
Absent
Very rigid,
with regular
markings
Absent
2-4

-------
                                  Name '
                Production of Excess Organic
                  Material in Freshwater
  1.  What is  it?.
  2.  Through sensory perception characterize at  least
      five things about it which could be  significant?
      a .

      b.

      c .

      d .

      e .
  3.  If present in excessive amounts  in water  courses  or
      water bodies, what would be  its  significance?

      a .

      b.

      c .
  4.  How do you account for  the contrast  in  color  of  the
      two samples?
AT. TW. 5. 8. 74                                                3-1

-------
                          This   alga   using    the   key   below
                          (Circle   the  correct   number   in
                          choice   between   the   two)
                               is	
                               each  pair   as   you   make   a
     Th* tailoring key it designed to aid in the recognition of alffM In thtlr nature)
 habitat*.  The decision* to  he  made will depend upon the features of  th« habitats
 •nd upon the gross structure of the algae. A  hand lens may be  helpful but it IB not
 essential.                                                       '
     The key includes  only those  algae which are  macroscopic  and with  a  definite,
 organization, or those which have distinguishing features because of numbers present.
 The users judgement prevludrs the necessity for minutely describing each habitat.

                  FIELD KEY TO SOME GENERA OF ALGAE

  1.  Living  hi or upon animals    	  j
  1.  \ot living in such association with animals 	  6
     2. On  shell* of snapping turtles (also on Viripona
        m«ttrot*i Reeve in L.  Erie); filamrnious, tuftsd,
        rosn«              .   •	
     2. Not oa turtle shells         .  .  .	'.	
  3.  Forming a hard green coating on snail shells 	
  3-  Not on snail shells            	
     4. Green masws attached to  anterior and posterior
        append*nets  of fairy shrimp or to eopepod*	
     •1. Nut attached to fairy  shrimp or copepod•  	
  5.  In old egg masses .of the  salamander Ambyitoma; dark green
 S.  Living within green Hydro or green planaria 	
    Baslcladia
   	3
  . Gongrosira
  	  4
21.
23.
23.
27.
27.
29.
39.
ai.
11.
     6.  Aquatic, submerged or nearly so  	
     6.  Not aquatic; on soil, rock, concrete, wood, or bark 	
  7.  On soil,  rock, or concrcu 	
  7,  On wood or bark .      ,      	„	
     8.  On shaded side of tre* trunks,
        or on weathered siding of old buildings	
     8.  On rotting logs  or pilings, pale greta 	  .  ...:

  9.  On rock or concrete	.'	.-.	
  9.  On soil .      	
     10.  A lra I mass orange or reddish; on "dry" cliff or quarry faces
     10.  A Iral majs dark olive to black; slimy (peeling if dry) ... ....
 31.  Algal  ma»« filamentous; often in greenhouses  	
 ]1.  Algal mass not filamentous or fe)t-)ike; location* various	
     12,  Dark  green; felt-like, coarsely branched ...'	
     12.  Yellow green,  tawny or olive-brown 	
 13.  Ytllow green; filmy         	
 13.  Tawny or olive brown;  velvet or felt-Kkt	
     14.  Alga] mass jelly-like, ipherical or in expanded sheets 	
     14.  Aliril mass globular, l-2mm  in diameter;
         shining, with white flakes	
 15.  Running water, lake shores, or in spray; attached 	
 15.  Standing or very alow moving water;  attached or net  	
     If,.  Water cold; late winter, early spring, or spring fed  	
     1C.  Water cool to warm; late spring, summer, autumn  	
.  .  Ch tract en*
 	   ft
	   OophiUa
 . .  Chlorella
 (ZoocMorella)
	16
	7
	„	9
	8


. .. Ho r mid ion
  Stichococcns
	10
	11
.,. TrentepoMJa
... OacillstorU
	12
	14
  ... Vagcheria
	13
   Hormfdlara
... Scytonetna
	Nostoc

	Botrydtnm
	16
	34
	17
	27
	•  ...18
	  	 24
	 Vancherla
Algal mass filamentous 	
Algal ma» not filamentous  ,	
18.   Algal mass a felt-like mat 	
18.   Alga] mass not a felt-like mat 	

Plants not branched         -'	".....10
Plants profusely branched (bushy)	 Jl
20.   Plant* short; slippery; bright green    	 Ulothrlx
20.   Plants noduiosv; i-urtilagenous; ulive    	 	Lenanea
Plants emb«4cfccl in a jvijy-likc ma*s                	  22
Plants not gelatinous, "dry," coarse; often in very swift water   ..   Cladophora
22.   Olive.green to rt-d-purptv             .         ...    Batrachoipermum
22.   Brilliant green                        .       	   23
Gelatinous mass soft, in.l»-finite, lateral branches long	Stifftoe Ionium
Gelatinous mass firm, definite, lateral branches  short
and mostly at right anglva to main axis
24*   Colony brown, jr?Iatin» not filani*:ntous                   	 ...
28.  Filaments  branj I f*-cti. silky, gn-tn;  mus* tough  .          Khltoclunium
, .Draparnaldia
  . .. Diatoms
 .   ..     25
Enteromorpha
          20
  ManoKtroma
.  . Tctraspora
  	   28
	  32-
	   29
  	31
    Vaueherla
          30
   Cladophora
      Ionium
                 33.
                 33.
                35.
                33.
                37.

                37.
39.
39.
                 41.


                 41.
                43.
                43.
                 45.
                 45.
                47.
                47.
                49.


                49.
                51.
                51.
                                                                              S3.
                                                                              53.
                                                                              55.
                                                                              55.
                 57.
                 57.
                                                                              69.
                                                                              59.
                                                                              (11.

                                                                              61.
    32. Colonies "shot-like," olive to black; on  ruck        .. ..  .
    32. Coloniej not "jhot-liJc*-," some shade of green
    Grten incrustation  on rocks and sticks; cslean-out     ..  .
    Colonies grwn, gvlulinous pads or saca            	
    34. Cold water; late winter or early spring       	
    34. Cool to warm  water:  late spring, summer, autumn
    Woodland pool.*, leaf litter  bottom                 	.'.....
    Open ponds, lake margin*, pools, "cut-offs"     .     	
    3d. Algal mo.*s yellow-green, filamentous,  itlky         .  .
    3ft. Green, motile  sphere* visible in * glass jar of the water .
    Plants tree-like, often calcareous, attached to bottom  	
                                                                                        31
                                                                               Calorol'liom
                                                                                Tetraspora
                                                                                        35
                                                                                        40
                                                                                ...       36
                                                                                        37
                                                                               .. Tribafrema
                                                                               ..  .  Volt 01
                                                                                    Chara
                                                                                    Ntte Ma
                                                                                        as
                                                                                Oedoreoivm
                                                                                        39
                                                                                 Spirogjra
                                                                              Filamentous      .                         .    . ............
                                                                              30.  Attached to dead or living sticks, weeds and grass
                                                                              38.  Free' floating
                                                                              Brilliant green, slippery; ends of mass curling when held aloft
                                                                              Bright to light green, less slippery; ends of mass not distinctly curling   Zygnemj
                                                                                                                                          Moageotia
                                                                              40.  Temporary bodies of water           ...............................   41
                                                                              40.  Permanent  or semipermanent bodies of water  . ................................ 44 '
                                                                              Bird baths, urn», limestone shoreline depressions;
                                                                              reddish scum on bottom and sides          ...................... Sphaerorystia
                                                                                                                                    (Haema tococrvs )
                                                                              Puddles, cow tracks, ruts, manure water pools     ...........................         42
                                                                              42.  Blue-green, olive, black; slimy, membranareous, often on mud   Oscillatoria
                                                                              42.  Green or red; living in or on the water        ........................    43
                                                                              Forming a red or preen *cum on the surface of th« water ......     .  Cujtlena
                                                                              Water uniformly green throughout     .............................. Ctilamydamunas
                                                                                                                                          Pandorina
                                                                                                                                           Eudorina
                                                                              44.  Aquaria, bo t tits and culture dishes in laboratory  or greenhouse .        45
                                                                              44.  Ponds, lakes,  lake  margins, "cut-offs"       .. .   . .............. ... .      46
                                                                              As a green film on the  pins* wall* ............................................... Chlorella
                                                                              Water uniformly green throughout    ................. ........................ Scenedesmiu
                                                                                                                                     Ankfstrodeaaiu
                                                                              46.  On wet soil at margin* [[[ ! .................................... 4?
                                                                              46.  Aquatic, floating or submerged ................... . [[[ *8
                                                                              Globular, gelatinous colonies [[[ Noatoe
                                                                              Slimy, membranareous colonies, blue-green,  olive,  black ................... Oscillatoria
                                                                              48.  'Submerged  and attached   [[[ <*
                                                                              48.  Free  floating, or enmeshed In other aquatics .................................. > ................. 53
                                                                              Plant* tree-like; often calcareous; growing on bottom mud,
                                                                              scarcely submerged to 30 feet
                                                                    Chara
                                                                   Nitella
                                                                       50
    Plants not tree-like; not calcareous 	
    50.  Filamentous  	'-	51
    50.  Not  filamentous   ...              	    52
    Filaments dichotomously branched; crowing on bottom  mud   Dtchotomoslphon
    Filaments not trenched; attached to stick:., vrrj and grass stems     Oedrf>Konlum
    52.  Small hemispherical or branched gelatinous colonies;
        green; atUrhed to weed*, sti.-ks, or st&nes      	       Cftaetophora
    52.  Flat green discs, often attached to dead cattail
        or water lily leaves   	"...       ColeochaeU
    Algal  mass forming a net	        Ilydrodlctyon
    Algal  maun not net-Hke     ...      	   	 54
    54.  Alk'al man* a tough, membranaceous, paper-likt sheet;
        gri-*-n to olive-green ....     	    Lyngbya
    54.  Altai mass not a membranaceous sheet	   ...".  -      55
    Algal  rnafii filamentous; green 	•-	   59
    Algal  ma** not filamentous	     56
    .r>tt.  Green motile sphere*  visible in a glass jar of tht  water 	    VoKot
    />£.  Alcnl mttrn  nonmotile, definitely mscroscoplc  	      .         57
    Aliral  nin"8 irrvirular, gel«tinnu!i  tump*; yellow to tawny     ..    f>lo#otrkMa
    Alcal  particlfff blur.preen; dii-pvrM-d throughout the waUr,
    or floating as a bluish scum; sticky in mass	
    58.  Particles appearing as "chopped grans" In tht water
    58.  Particles of irregular  shape and sist  	
    FUamei.ts coarse, branched, not slippery  	
    Filament.*  silky, unbranched,  slippery
    CO.  filament* with well defined, ^altered, dark, swollen areas
    60.  Filaments without  dork, swollrn  areas   	
    Bright gret-n to  yellowish,  very Mipprry If green; tnds of
    mass  curling if  held aloft              	
    Green to yellowish, only slightly slippery;
    and* of mass not curling 		
                                                                             Aphafllsomenoa
                                                                                  Anabaena
                                                                                  Aaaryntis
                                                                               {Mferorystu)
                                                                                        60
                                                                             .  .         Cl
                                                                                 PltKophnrs
                                                                                 Cladophora

                                                                                  Splrogyra

                                                                                  Zygntm*
                   6.     Classification   of   this   alga   is:
                           Kingdom
                           Phylum
                           Class
                           Order
                          Family
                          Genus

-------
                                 AQUATIC MACROPHYTES
I  INTRODUCTION

A  This non-taxonomic description of aquatic
   plants includes not only the higher vascular
   plants, but also the larger algae like
   Chara and Lemanea and the mosses and
   liverworts.  Many manuals on higher
   aquatic plants will also include the larger
   algae and lower plants for  ecological
   convenience.

B  Ecologically they are primary producers
   as are the phytoplankton.  Their role in
   detrital cycles is considerable.

C  The littoral zone of lakes and estuaries
   are often dominated by this group while
   in streams they fill important niches in
   both the riffles and shallow pool areas.

   Water depth determines the adjustment
   of aquatic seed plants into three principal
   categories.

   1  Surface or floating weeds generally
      grow in deeper water at the front of
      (oftentimes commingling with) the
      emersed weeds.  The larger floating
      weeds are waterlilies that may be
      rooted in the mud of the bottom and bear
      large leaves that float upon the surface.
      Smaller types such as the duckweeds
      are free-floating.

   2  Emersed weeds are those that occupy
      shallow water, are rooted in bottom
      mud, and support foliage, seeds and
      mature fruit one or more feet above
      the water 'surface.  Cattails, rushes,
      and the marsh grasses are familiar
      examples.

   3  Submersed aquatic growths often form
      a belt or zone of herbage farthest from
      shore. Except for those forms that
      dwell in quiet waters,  they are rooted
      to the bottom.  Depth varies considerably
      within this zone and may extend down
      to the limits of effective light penetration.
 D In the long-term cycle of the change in the
   aquatic terrain there is a  continuing
   tendency for the land to encroach upon
   shallow ponds and shallow areas of lakes,
   decrease their size, make them more
   shallow and eventually return them to dry
   land.  Rooted and other aquatic vegetation
   plays a prominent role in  this gradual
   process by:

   1  Invading shallow water areas through
      entrapment of particulate matter that
      is carried into lakes and ponds.  The
      rooted vegetation will continue to
      spread as water areas  become more
      shallow and the bottom mud provides
      suitable anchorage for  roots.
      Mangrove growths in estuaries and
      along seashore areas have made
      swamps out of once open water areas.

   2  Plants contribute also to the filling in
      of lakes and estuaries through both
      the precipitation of calcium carbonate
      and the accumulation of their remains
      upon death and decay; e.g.,  marl and
      peat moss.

 E While these lake invasions by higher
   aquatic plants may sometimes be
   sufficiently rapid to be recognized by
   those who habitually use the lake,  the
   common objections to rooted vegetation
   stem from their immediate  interference
   with recreational use euch as boating and
   encroachment on navigation channels and
   swimming beaches.
II  MACROPHYTE GROUPS

 A Division Algae

   The green alga Chara (and related genera
   Nitella and Tolypella) may form "weed
   beds" (in lakes, ponds, streams, and
   estuaries) as extensive as higher plants
   and grossly similar.  Other algae such
   as  Lemanea may form dense mats in
 BI.PL. lb.3.70
                                                                                     4-1

-------
Aquatic Macrophytes
   riffle areas of streams or springs.  In
   marine waters the larger marine algae
   may form dense mats.

B Division Bryophyta (Liverworts and Mosses)

   These are relatively small plants which
   lack flowers and conducting tissues
   (xylem and phloem).

   1  The Life Cycle consists of two phases:

      a The leafy green gametophyte which
        produces  motile gametes.

      b The sporophyte generation producing
        spores.

   2  This is a freshwater group consisting
      of less than 50 genera.  About one
      fourth of these are liverworts.

      a The liverworts (Class Hepaticae) are
        small flattened green plants, which
        may lack  stems and leaves. Riccia
        is a slender, branched surface form
        growing in loose clusters of flat
        slender sprays. Fragments of these
        are often  taken in plankton samples.
        Ricciocarpus is a notched oval form
        about one centimeter in diameter that
        is often found in the same environ-
        ment.

      b The true mosses (Class Musci) have
        distinct leaves and stems.  Sphagnum
        forms extensive bogs in some areas.
        In cooler  streams Fontinalis may
        occupy large areasl  One species of
        the latter has been found resistant
        to a variety of complex wastes,
        including  zinc.
             i
      c In swamps and along lake shores
        many species pass from an aquatic
        to terrestrial environment without
        showing specific morphological
        changes.

C  Vascular Plants (Division Tracheophyta)
   include the aquatic fern or fern-like plants
   (Class Pteridophyta).
   1  The aquatic lower tracheophytes are
      primarily freshwater.  The Quillworts
      (Isoetaceae) are related to the club
      mosses and may form numerous
      rosettes on the silt-sand bottoms of
      lakes.

      Division Tracheophyta - .This division,
      like the preceding one (Bryophyta) has
      the life cycle of alternation of
      gametophyte and sporophyte.  In this
      group, however, the sporophytes
      always become free living,  independent
      plants with possession of conducting
      or vascular tissues (xylem and phloem).
      The aquatic lower Tracheophyta are .
      primarily freshwater and only repre-
      sented by a few species.

   2  Included in the higher Tracheophyta
      are ferns (Class Filicinae) containing
      aquatic genera, Azolla, Salvinia,
      Marsilea, Ceratopteris.

      a  Azolla and Salvinia form floating
        masses sometimes interspersed
        with Duckweed.   The former often
        forms a red carpet.

      b  Marsilea occupies the area between
        high and low water of stream and
        bayou margins.

      c  Ceratopteris is  a floating form
        often of nuisance locally.

D  Vascular Plants (Division Tracheophyta,
   Class Angiospermae)

   1  Structural modification - all aquatic
      plants are characterized by certain
      specific morphological features relative
      to adaptation for the aquatic habitat.

      a  Many heterophyllous - submerged
        leaves may be narrow or incised.
        Surface leaves have simple com-
        pact blades.

      b  Root system only an anchor,  with
.        adsorption of dissolved salts taking
        place over entire plant surface,
        lacking root hairs.
 4-2

-------
                                                                Aquatic Macrophytes
   c  Stomata present only on upper side
      of leaves in floating plants.

   d  Chloroplasts located in the epidermis.

   e  Flower clusters may be above water
      and pollinated by wind  or insects or
      pollen suspended in the water and
      pistils pollinated under water.

   f  Vegetative reproduction predominates.
      Small fragments  (turions or winter
      buds) or root stocks (tubers) may be
      sufficient for propagation.

   g  A variety of plants are associated
      with the aquatic environment making
      a clear distinction between terrestrial
      and true hydrophytes difficult.
      Aquatic plants have been defined by
      Reid as "those whose seeds germinate
      in either the water phase or the
      substrate.. .and must  spend part of
      their life  cycle in water. "  This,
      therefore, includes submersed as
      well as emersed.

2  Classification  - Around fifty families
   of Angiosperms are primarily aquatic,
   including thirty estuarine species.

3  Dicotyledons

   a  Family Nymphaceae -  the water
      lilies, Nuphar and Nymphaea
      Watershield, Brasenia; and
      Cabomba.

   b  Family Ceratophyllaceae - includes
      one genera Ceratophyllum (Coontail
      or HornwortTI  The stems which are
      entirely under water may sometimes
      be stfff with a coat of lime.

   c  Family Trapaceae - the water
      chestnut or caltrop, Trapa. The
      sharp spine d fruits are a staple
      crop in parts of Asia.  Colonies of
      connected rosettes of this plant
      quickly form surface floating mats
      which may impede navigation in the
      littoral region of lakes and in slow-
      moving rivers.  Examples  - Africa,
      Rumania,  and Massachusetts.
d  Family Haloragidaceae - includes
   two genera Proserpinica and
   Myriophyllum.  The latter is found
   up to 15 parts per 1000 salinity and
   has been a serious nuisance in
   Chesapeake Bay and the Tennessee
   Valley.  In the former area, a virus
   has reduced populations as much as
   95 percent.

e  Podostemaceae - primarily a
   tropical family which is highly
   adapted to life'in rushing water,
   even in torrential areas over rocks
   worn smooth by the water and
   impenetrable by roots.  This is
   made possible by haptera
   (attachment organs) which cement
   the plant to the substrate.
   Morphologically and ecologically
   they bear resemblances to certain
   attached algae. This group also
   shares the characteristics of other
   aquatic plants,  but in addition
   possesses quantities of silica in the
   cell.  Where the current in the
   stream is  less vigorous the
   Podostemum will be replaced by
   mosses and algae. Podostemum
   communities are a challenge in
   quantitative sampling of the
   associated macroinvertebrates.

f  Family  Lentibulariaceae -
   Bladderworts, Utricularia, have
   small bladders which keep the stems
   afloat and  also serve as traps  for
   the capture of small organisms.

g  Family Rhizophoraceae -
   Rhizophora mangle.  The red man-
   grove.
h  Family Combretaceae -
   Combretaceae - Laguncularia
   racemosa.  The white mangrove.
i  Family Verbenaceae - Avincennia
   nitida. The black mangrove
   The three mangrove families listed
   above are widespread on both the
   East and West Coasts.   They support
   a unique algal vegetation,  mainly of
   certain red algal genera.
                                                                                 4-3

-------
Aquatic Macrophytes
   4  Monocotyledons

      a  Family Butomaceae - Butomus
        umbellatus is Eurasian in origin,
        and has spread rapidly in the
        St. Lawrence River Basin and
        around the Great Lakes.

      b  Family Hydrocharitaceae - includes
        the well known Elodea  (= Anacharis)
        Hydrilla.  Egej
and Vallisneria
        plus two marine genera Halophila
        and Thalassia (T. testudinum,
        Turtle Grass.) The former fresh
        water genera also extend into
        brackish water.

      c  The water plantain family
        (Alismaceae) is a large group of
        emerged marsh plants and sub-
        mersed aquatics.  Sagittaria
        subulata is found in both fresh and
        estuarine areas.  In the latter it
        matures without much change in
        shape or size  of leaves (ribbon  leaf
        form) and the  plant  and flowers may
        be under water at high tide.

      d  Family Zosteraceae

        1) Zostera marina or Eel Grass is
           found on both coasts from Alaska
           to California and Hudson Bay to
           North Carolina.  In the early
           thirties, there were great
           mortalities of Eel Grass over
           extensive areas,  particularly the
           East Coast. Since that time  there
           has been considerable recovery
           in the east.

        2) Phyllospadix scouleri or Surf
           Grass is found from British
           Columbia to California.  The
           "sea grasses" include the above
           four genera and two others
           (discussed in the families
           Hydrocharitaceae and
           Zannichelliaceae.  They are
           stenohaline and probably do not
           occur where salinities are below
           25 7oo for considerable periods.
           The remaining genera of this
       family are primarily fresh
       water although.many have  species
       extending into brackish water.

e  Family Potamogetonaceae

   Potamogeton includes over forty
   species and is recognized generally
   as a difficult group to key out.

f  Family Ruppiaceae

   Ruppia maritima or Widgeon Grass
   is found from alkali to fresh water
   and salt to fresh coastal water.

g  Family Zannichelliaceae

   1)  Zannichellia palustris is found
      from fresh water and fresh  to
      brackish coastal water.

   2)  Cymodoceae  - Syringodium
      filiforme (= Cymodocea
      manatorum) or Manatee Grass
      is found from Texas to Florida.
      The leaves are round in cross-
      section and flowers are common.

   3)  Halodule wrightii (=  Diplanthera)
      or Shoal Grass is found in North
      Carolina and from Texas to
      Florida.  Leaves are flat in
      cross-section and have a three
      pointed tip.

h  Family Najadaceae - includes the
   one genus Najas, approximately
   35 species.  Southern Naiad has
   long been one of the most trouble-
   some submersed aquatic weeds in
   Florida.  It infests irrigation and
   drainage canals.

i  Family Pontederiaceae - includes
   Eichornia crassipes, waterhyacinth.
   It is a native of tropical America
   and was probably introduced in the
   United States  as an ornamental.  As
   an escapee it  has become an
   exceedingly troublesome species
   by clogging waterways of the
   Southern States.  Its attractive
 4-4

-------
                                                               Aquatic Macrophytes
   blue-purple flowers and charac-
   teristic bulbous leaf stem with
   rounded leaf blade make it easy to
   identify.  The plant is usually found
   floating on the surface of ponds and
   quiet streams and growing on.mud-
   banks. This plant spreads
   vegetatively by horizontal stem
   growth and rooting at the nodes to
   produce new plants that develop into
   mats covering large areas.  The
   capsulelike fruits contain many
   seeds that provide for extensive
   spread of the species in suitable
   climates.

j  Family Acanthaceae - Dianthera
   (= Justicia) or Water Willow forms
   large beds at the margins of streams.

k  Marsh and shore zones are inhabited
   by Bulrushes or Sedges (Family
   Cyperaceae), Rushes (Faniily
   Juncaceae), and Grasses
   (Gramineae).  The latter includes
   wild rice (Zizania)and Cord Grass
   (Spartina).

1  Faniily Amaranthaceae - includes
   Alternanthera philoxeroides or
   Alligator Weed.

m Family Lemnaceae - The Duck weed
   family includes the smallest known
   flowering plants,  all of which are
   free floating.  Wolffia and Wolffiella
   are without roots  and Lemna and
   Spirodela both possess them.

n  Family Typhaceae - one genus
   Typha.  Cattail or tule.

o  Family Iridaceae  - Iris pseudacoris
   is another European plant becoming
   widely established in North America.

p  Family Araceae - Acorus calamus,
   sweet flag,  is an Eurasian plant
   which has become widely established
   in North America.
Ill  TYPICAL AQUA TIC PLANT
    COMMUNITIES

 A Ponds and lakes not only have a charac-
    teristic plant zonation, but over a period
    of years exhibit a distinct succession of
    aquatic  plant communities.

 B Intertidal salt marshes are so distinctive
    that in one state, regulations  preventing
    the disruption of the ecology of salt
    marshes, are defined on the basis of the
    specific plants involved.  A typical
    estuarine shore (from seaward in) might
    have successive zones dominated by:

    1  Suaeda (alkali seepweed)

    2  Spartina (cord grass)

    3  Halimione  (sea purslane)

    4  Puccinellia (alkaligrass) and others

    5  Juncus (rush)

 C Mangrove vegetation replaces salt marshes
    in tropical and subtropical regions.  Two
    most  widespread genera  are:

    1  Rhizophora, the red mangrove
       occupies  the outer pioneer zone.
       Roots are borne on downward curving
       branches or rhizophores.  The
       resulting tangle  reduces tidal currents
       and promotes deposition of solids.

    2  Avicennia, the black mangrove,
       usually forms a  shoreward zone.
       It depends on aerial roots, which
       emerge from the ground a short
       distance from the tree, rather than
       prop roots.

    3  Examples have been given of open
       shoal areas being transformed into
       thick swamp forest in some 30 years
       through this process.
                                                                               4-5

-------
 A quatic Ma crophytes
    Sea grass communities, whether composed
    of Zostera (eel grass) in Northern waters
    or Thalassia (turtle grass) or Cymodocea
    (Manatee grass) in the tropics,  are
    recognizable as an entity wherever found.
    A soft substratum near low water is
    required,  and each has a similar distinct
    assemblage of molluscs, crustacenas,
    and other  invertebrates.

    1  The destruction of this community by
       bulkheading and filling has far-reaching
       effects on the stability of such bottom
       areas.

    2  Destruction of these plants by disease,
       such as the epidemics which decimated
       the Zostera eel grass community in the
       thirties created both erosion problems
       and also brought about far-reaching
       biotic community changes which only
       became reestablished with the return
       of the eel grass.
IV  In comparison to other living organisms
 the aquatic plants or macrophytes have been
 seriously neglected. Man's increased
 activities have favored some plants (which
 we call "weeds") through eutrophication and
 diminished others (which we call a valuable
 resource loss) through dredging and filling
 operations.  These events demand
 reassessment of knowledge about the ecology
 of these plants and increased contributions
 toward increasing that information.
 ECOLOGICAL REFERENCES

 1  Bay ley, Suzanne; Rubin,  Harvey, and
       Southwick,  Charles H.   Recent Decline
       in the Distribution and Abundance of
       Eurasian Milfoil in Chesapeake Bay.
       Chesapeake Science 9 (3):173-181.
       1968.

 2  Bickel,  David.   The Role of Aquatic
       Plants and Submerged Structures in the
       Ecology of a Freshwater Pulmonate
       Snail.  Physa integra Hald.
       Sterkiana 18:17-20.   1965.
 3  Blackburn,  Robert D.,  White,  P.E. and
      Weldon,  L. W.   Ecology of  Submersed
      Weeds in'South Florida Canals.
      Weed Science 16 (2):261-266.   1968.

 4  Dawson, Elmer Y.  Marine Botany.
      Holt-Rhinehart & Winston, New York.
      pp. 371.   1966.

 5  Holm, L.G.,  Weldon, L.W. and
      Blackburn, R.D.  Aquatic Weeds.
      Science 166:699-709.   1969.
      (An excellent summary and  review of
      "the rampart growth of.weeds has
      become one of the symptoms of our
      failure to manage our resources".)

 6  Kormandy,  Edward J.  Comparative
      Ecology of Sandspit Ponds.  Am.  Mid.
      Nat.  82:28-61.   1969.

 7  Lawrence, J.M.  Aquatic Herbicide
      Data.  USDA Handbook No.  231,
      pp. 133.   1962.

 8  Mackenthun, Kenneth M.   A Review of
      Algae, Lake  Weeds,  and Nutrients.
      J.WPC Fed.  34:1077-1085.   1962.

 9  Mackenthun, Kenneth M.   Nitrogen and
      Phosphorus in Water.   An Annotated
      Selected Bibliography of Their
      Biological  Effects, USPHS Pub. No.
      1305, pp. 111.  1965.

10  Mackenthun, Kenneth M.  and Ingram,
      William M.  Biological Associated
      Problems in  Freshwater Environ-
      ments, FWPCA, pp. 287.   1967.

11  Neel, Joe Kendall.  Seasonal Succession
      of Benthic Algae and their Macro-
      invertebrate  Residents in a  Headwater
      Limestone Stream, Jour. Water Poll.
      Cont. Fed.,  40  (2) Part 2: R10-30.
      1968.

12  Nelson, Daniel J. and Scott, Donald C.
      Role of Detritus in the Productivity
      of a Rock-Outcrop Community in a
      Piedmont Stream,  Limn,  and Ocean.
      7(3):396-413.   1962.
   4-6

-------
                                                                     Aquatic Macrophytes
13  Peltier, W.H.  and Welch,  E.B.
      Factors Affecting Growth Rooted
      Aquatic Plants, TVA, Chattanooga,
      Tennessee,.pp. 45.   1968.

14  Rawls, Charles K.,  Jr.   Reefoot Lake
      Waterfowl Research,  Tenn.  Game
      & Fish Comm., pp. 80.   1954.

15  Smith,  Gordon E. and Isom,  Billy G.
      Investigation of Effects of Large-
      Scale Applications on 2, 4-D on
      Aquatic Fauna and Water Quality,
      Pest. Monit. Journal 1 (3):16-21.  1967.

16  Westlake, D. F.   The Biology of A quatic
      Weeds in  Relation to their Management.
      Proc. 9th Brit. Weed Conf.  pp. 372-
      381.  1968.

17  Zeiger,  C. F.   Biological Control of
      Alligatorweed with A ga sides n. sp.
      in Florida, Hyacinth Cont. Jour.,
      6:31-34.  1967.
 IDENTIFICATION REFERENCES

 1  Arber, Agnes.  Water Plants, Wheldon
      and Wesley, Lt. and Hafner Pub. Co.,
      New York, pp.  436.  1963.

 2  Blackburn,  Rotiert D.  and Weldon,  Lyle
      W.  Eurasian Watermilfoil-Flprida's
      new underwater menace.. Hyacinth
      Cont. Jour. 6:15-18.  1967.

 3  Conard, Henry S.   How to Know the
      Mosses, Wm. C. Brown,  Dubuque,
      Iowa, pp. 166.   1944.

 4  Dawes, Clinton J.  Marine Algae in the
      vicinity of Tampa Bay, University S.
      Florida.  1967.  (includes Angiosperms)

 5  Eyles,  C. E. and Robertson,  J. L.
      A  Guide and Key to the Aquatic Plants
      of the Southeastern United States,
      USPHS Bull. No.  286, 151 pp.   1944.
      (Reprinted as Circular 158,  U.S. Bur.
      Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, 1963).
 6  Fassett, N. C.   A Manual of Aquatic
      Plants (with Revision Appendix by
      Eugene G. Ogden).   University of
      Wisconsin Press, Madison,  405 pp.
      1960.               '

 7  Fernald,  M. L.   Gray's Manual of
      Botany.  8th ed.  Amer. Book Co.
      1632 pp.  1950.

 8  Hotchkiss, N.   Pondweeds and Pondweed-
      like Plants of Eastern North America,
      U. S. Fish and Wildlife Service,
      Circular 187,  pp. 1-30.   1964.

 9  Hotchkiss, N.   Bulrushes and Bulrush-
      like Plants of Eastern North America,
      U. S. Fish and Wildlife Service.
      Circular 221,  pp. 1-19.   1965.

10  Hotchkiss, N.  Underwater and Floating-
      Leaved Plants of the U. S. and Canada,
      U. S. Fish and Wildlife Service,
      Resource Publ.  No.  44, pp. 124.  1967.

11  Humm, H. J.   Seagrasses of the Northern
      Gulf Coast,  BuU. Mar. Sc. Gulf &
      Caribbean 6 (3): 305-308.

12  Muenscher, W. C.  Aquatic Plants of the
      United States, Comstock Publishing
      Company, Ithaca, New York, 374 pp.
      1944.

13  Otto, N. E. and Bartley, T.R.   Aquatic
      Pests on Irrigation Systems,
      Identification Guide,  U.S. Bur. of
      Reclamation Water Resources.Tech.
      Publ., pp. 72.  1965.

14  Stewart, Albert W., Dennis, LaRue J.,
      and Gilkey,  Helen M.  Aquatic Plants
      of the Pacific Northwest.   Oregon
      State Monographs, Corvallis,
      Second Edition,  261pp.   1963.

15  Weldon, L.W., Blackburn,  R.D.,and
      Harrison, D. S.   Common Aquatic
      Weeds, USDA Agriculture Handbook
      No. 352, 43 pp.  1969.
                                                                                     4-7

-------
 Aquatic Macrophytes
16  Winterringer, Glen S.  and Lopinot, Alvin       	;	'  '.	
       C.  Aquatic Plants, of Illinois, Illinois       This outline was prepared by R.M. Sinclair,
       State Museum Popular  Science Series,        Aquatic Biologist. National Training Center,
       Vol.  VI, pp. 142.   1966.                    Water Programs Operations,  EPA, Cincinnati,
                                                   OH 45268.
17  Correll, Donovan S. and Correll, Helen B.
       Aquatic and Wetland Plants of Southwestern                     '
       United States.  Water Pollution Control
       Research  Series.  16030 DNL 01/72.
       Environmental Protection Agency.
       Research  and Monitoring, Wash., D. C.                                         •
       1777pp. 1972.
   4-8

-------
                 AN ARTIFICIAL KEY TO SOME COMMON AQUATIC PLANTS

                         (Freshwater,  Estuarine, and Marine)
I  Specific identification of aquatic plants
often requires microscopic examination of
parts which may not always be available to
the investigator (for example, fruiting bodies
and/or seeds which are seasonal or produced
only rarely).

Because of this, some groups are more
difficult to identify.  Potamogeton is a varied
and difficult genus, although  Ogden's Key
gives help where only vegetative parts are
available.  Najas and Myriophyllum are often
difficult.

In the Hydrocharitaceae, Hydrilla, Egeria.
and Elodea (Ana char is is an obsolete name
for the latter two) are sometimes confused,
and the serious student may need to turn to
the specialist in this group (see Blackburn
et al for a discussion of this  problem.

For a detailed list of references on classification
see Sculthorpe  (p. 16-20) where these are
listed by family. The following key will aid
the common plant groups.  It is divided as
follows:

A)    Plants floating on water surface.

B)    Plants submersed beneath water surface.
C)
D)
Plants erect and emersed; rooted to the
substratum and extending upward out
of water.
Submersed "sea grasses".
Manuals with descriptive comments and
figures for specific identification are listed
in part under references.

To use the key,  select the proper group
(A, B, C, D) and read the description in the
first couplet.  The description that best fits
the unknown specimen will indicate either the
plant group or genus to which the specimen
may belong or an additional couplet, in which
case the process is repeated until the descrip-
tion for a particular plant or genus best fits
the unidentified specimen.  An asterisk *
indicates that distribution may include
brackish or salt water.  Common names
used here (with few exceptions) are those
of:  Subcommittee on Standardization of
Common and Botanical Names of Weeds,
reprinted from Weeds  14 (4):347-386 (1966).

A  PLANTS FLOATING ON WATER  SURFACE

1. Plants very small; seldom  2
   over a centimeter along
   any dimension.

1. Plants large; usually        8
   measuring at least 0.5
   decimeter along some
   dimension.

   2.  Plant body dichotomously 3
      2-lobed, or  repeatedly
      dichotomously branched.

   2.  Plant body not dichoto-   4
      mously branched and if
      2-lobed not equally so.

3. Divisions of plant body fine  Riccia
   and many; plant body usuallyfluitans L.
   floating below surface.

3. Divisions of plant body      Ricciocarpus
   coarse, 2-lobed; floating    natans L.
   on surface.

   4.  Plants floating on        5
      surface.

   4.  Plants floating just      WolffieUa
      below water surface;     floridana Sm.
      plant body made  up of
      a clump of short
      filaments.

5. Plant body of small over-   Azolla
   lapping scales.

5. Plant body simple or        6
   compound, made up of
   rounded floating
   leaves.
BI.PL.2b.2.70
                                                                                      5-1

-------
 An Artificial Key to Some Common Aquatic Plants
    6. Plants simple,  extremely
       minute, appearing as
       grains on surface of
       water.

    6. Plants compound, made
       up of several rounded-
       oblong disk-like bodies,
       floating on surface of
       water.
watermeal      13.  Plant body repeatedly     Riccia
Wolffia             dichotomously branched,  fluitans

                13.  Leaves not dichoto-       14
                    mously branched.
7
                   14. Leaves entire not      Elodea
                      dissected or bearing •
                      bladders, and
                      whorled.
 7. Plant body inconspicuously
    nerved, rootlets 1 per disk.

 7. Plant body conspicuously
    nerved, rootlets 2 to
    several per  disk.

    8.  Leaves broad and blade-
       like, sometimes inflated
       near base.

    8.  Leaves (plant body in
       Riccia) narrow  or finely
       divided.

 9. Leaves large and dilated
    with inflated petioles.

 9. Leaves normally expanded.

   10.   Leaves bearing plantlets
        around the margin.

   10.   Leaves not bearing
        plantlets.

11. Floating-leafed plants with
    leaves  attached to  the
    bottom by a bare unbranched
    stem of varying length.

11. Roots usually suspended
    free in the water,  with no
    connection to lake  bottom;
    capable of drifting.

   12.  Leaves wide to  the base,
       without petioles.

   12.  Leaves mostly differ-
       entiated into blades
       and  petioles.
star duckweed
Lemna

giant duckweed
Spirodela
polyrhiza L.

9
12
waterhyacinth
Eichhornia
crassipes Mart.
11

floating fern
Ceratopteris

11
15
12
water lettuce
Pistia
stratiotes L.
frogbit
Limnobium
spongia Base.
   14.  Leaves dissected and
       bearing bladders..

15. Stem attached to middle
    of leaf.

15. Stem attached at the
    summit of a deep notch
    in the leaf.

   16.  Leaves oval,  not
       more than 3 inches
       wide, with supple
       stem attached to the
       middle of the  leaf.

   16.  Circular leaf  with a
       long, fairly rigid
       stem attached to the
       middle of the  leaf,  .
       leaves 6 inches or
       more wide some-
       times supported by
       the stem above the
       water level.

17. Circular or heart-
    shaped leaf with  the
    veins radiating from
    the mid-rib nearly to
    the margin without
    forking; floating  yellow
    flowers.

17. Circular leaf with much-
    forked veins radiating to
    the margin, white,  or
    pink floating flowers.
bladderwort
Utricularia

16
17
watershield,
Brasenla schreberi
Gmelin
american lotus
Nelumbo
yellow pond lily
Nuphar
                                             *white water lily
                                             Nymphaea
   5-2

-------
                                          An Artificial Key to Some Common Aquatic Plants
                             * green alga,
                             muskgrass,
                             Chara
B  PLANTS SUBMERSED BENEATH WATER
   SURFACE

1.  Plant body made up of
   stems bearing whorled,
   smooth, brittle branches,
   easily snapped with a
   slight pressure; plants
   with a musky odor, no
   roots, often with a limy
   encrustation.

1.  Plant body not as
   described.

   2.  Plant attached to sub-
      strate by holdfasts or
      haptera, not rooted.

   2.  Plant not so attached.

3.  Plant attached to stones
  •by haptera (roots not
   attached) and tough
   stems forming a dull-
   green tangle. .

3.  Plants single shoots
   attached to substrate
   by holdfasts.

   4.  Without true roots,
      flowers or vascular
      bundles.
                             riverweed,
                             Podostemum
                             c eratophyllum
                             red alga
                             Lemanea
   4.  Usually with true
      roots and with
      vascular bundles.
5. Leaves without midrib,
   arranged in two opposite
   rows, usually with a
   part folded under.

5. Leaves most often with
   midrib,  usually arranged
   equally around the stem,
   not curved under.
Division Bryophyta,
Mosses and
Liverworts
5

Division
Angiospermae.
True flowering
plants
6

Order Junger-
manniales,
Porella
                             Order Musci,
                             Leptodictyum,
                             Fontinalis, and
                             Fissidens
                                                                           11
                                                                           *w»ter milfoil
                                                                           Myriophyllum
   6.  Submerged leaves    bladderwort
      bearing small   .     Utricularia
      bladders, leaves
      irregularly forked.

   6.  Submerged leaves    7
      not bladder bearing.

7. Submerged leaves com- 8
   pound,  made up of
   narrow segments or
   leaflets.

7. Submerged leaves
   simple, made up of
   a single narrow blade.

  , 8.  Submerged leaves
      with one central
      axis, leaves feather-
      like, branches in
      whorls about the
      stem, stems
   ,   usually very lax.

   8.  Submerged leaves
      irregularly forking.

9. Submerged leaves
   singly and alternately
   or  irregularly borne;
   leaves  many branches,
   irregularly forked and
   appearing as tufts of
   numerous thread-like
   projections attached
   to the center stem.

9. Submerged leaves
   borne opposite each
   other on stem or
   whorled.

  10.  Leaves stalked, fan-
      like, extending from
      opposite sides of the
      stem; leaflets not
      toothed.

  10.  Stems with whorls of
      stiff, forked leaves;
      leaflets with toothed
      or serrated margins
      (small barbs) on one
      side; plant without
      true roots.
                                              *water buttercup
                                              Ranunculus
                                                                           10
                                                                          fanwort
                                                                          Cabomba
                                                                          caraliniana Gr.
                                              coontail
                                              Ceratophyllum
                                                                                  5-3

-------
 An Artificial Key to Some Common Aquatic Plants
                             12
                             22
11.  Submerged leaves long
    and ribbon-like,  at
    least 1/10 inch wide.

11.  Submerged leaves not
    ribbon-like; often
    thread-like but if wider
    than I/10 inch, less
    than 1 inch long.
   12.  Leaves scattered along 13:
       the stem.
17".  Upper submerged leaves
    with long stalks.
   12.  Leaves all borne from
       one point.

13. Leaves with mid-ribs   *
    evident when held against
    bright light, many
    species with great
    diversity in leaf forms.

13. Leaves without mid-ribs
    evident when held against
    bright light.

   14.  Plants with both
       floating and submerged
       leaves, the floating
       leaves with expanded
       blades and differing
       from those  submerged.

   14.  Plants with all leaves
       alike and submerged.

15. Floating leaves, heart-
    shaped at the base,  1 to
    4 inches long,  waxy in
    appearance.

15. Floating leaves rounded
    at the base.
                             21
                             pondweed
                             Potamogeton
                             14
                             water star grass
                             Heteranthera
                             15
                             18
                             floating pondweed
                             Potamogeton
                             natans  L.
                             16
   16. Floating leaves with
      30 to 50 nerves;
      submerged leaves
      about three times
      as long as broad.

   16. Floating leaves with
      less than 30 nerves.
                             large leaf pondweed
                             Potamogeton
                             amplifolius
                             Tuckerman
                             17
17.  Submerged leaves not
    as above but with an
    abrupt awl-shaped
    tip.

   18. Margins of the thin
      leaves crimped and
      toothed, the marginal
      serrations visible to
      the naked eye.

   18. Margins of leaves
      not visibly toothed.

19.  Leaves minutely toothed
    on the margins, visible
    when magnified; leaves
    extending stiffly in
    opposite directions so
    that whole plant appears
    flat; only midvein
    prominent.

19.  Not as above

   20. Stems much flattened
      and winged, about as
      wide as the leaves;
      leaves 1/12 to 1/5
      inch wide.

   20. Leaves threadlike,    *
      long, rounded, and
      slender, rarely
      exceeding 1/10 inch
      wide, oriented into
      a lax,  diffuse,
      branched spray.  The
      "bunched" appearance
      of the threadlike
      rounded leaves as they
      float in the water
      readily distinguished
      sago pondweed from
      others of group.
 American
 pbndweed-
 Potamogeton
 nodosus
 Poiret

 pondweed
 Potamogeton
 angustifolius
 Berchtold

* curlyleaf
 pondweed
 Potamogeton
 crispus L.
  19
 Robbins
 pondweed
 Potamogeton
 robbinsii
 Oakes
  20

  flatstem
  pondweed
  Potamogeton
  zosteriformls
  Fernald

  sago pondweed
  Potamogeton
  pectinatus L.
  5-4

-------
                                           An Artificial Key to Some Common Aquatic Plants
21. Leaves very long and    * Vallisneria
    ribbonlike; when
    examined with hand
    lens, showing a central
    dense zone and a
    peripheral less dense
    zone; flowers borne on
    a long stem that forms
    a spiral after fertili-
    zation.
21. Leaf,  when examined
    with hand lens not
    showing zones as above.

   22.  Leaves whorled,  3-8
       in upper whorls.

   22.  Leaves alternate or
       opposite.

23. Leaves alternate, leaf-  *
    base apparently
    inflated.

23. Leaves opposite.

   24.  All leaves long
       and narrow.

   24.  Upper leaves shorter
       and broader.

25. Leaves dilated at base.  *

25. Leaves with narrow
    bases.
waterplantains,
Alismataceae
Elodea, Egeria,
Hydrilla

23
widgeongrass,
Ruppia maritima L.
24

25
waterstarwort,
CaUitriche
horned pondweed,
Zannichiellia
palustris L.
   2. Base of stem tri-
     angular in cross
     section,  the three
     angles in some cases
     so rounded as to make
     the stem appear al-
     most round.

   2. Base of stem not
     triangular.  •

3.  Three cornered seeds,
   usually straw colored,
   enclosed within a loose
   elongated sac; a low-
   growing grasslike plant.

3.  Seeds not enclosed in a
   loose elongated sac.

   4. A single flower or
     seed-bearing struture
     on the tip of the stem.
sedge, Carex
spikerush,
Eleocharis
      Stem with one or more  *bulrush,
      leaves extending beyond Scirpus
      the spike or seed-
      bearing structure.
      (The hardstem bulrush
      has  long, hard, slender,
      dark olive-green stems,
      1/8 to 3/8 inch at the
      base, extending 3 to 5
      feet above the water
      surface; the softstream
      bulrush has soft stems
      of light green color,
      3/10 to 1 inch thick
      at the base.)
 C  PLANTS ERECT AND EMERSED; ROOTED
    TO THE SUBSTRATUM AND EXTENDING
    UPWARD OUT OF THE WATER.

 1.  Leaves more than 10     2
    times as long as broad.
 1.  Leaves less than 10
    times as long as broad.
12
5. Leaf with a collar like
   appendage, membranous
   or composed of hairs at
   the junction of the leaf
   blade and that part of the
   leaf that is wrapped
   around the stem.

5. Leaf without collarlike
   appendage mentioned
   above.
                                                 6
                                                                                   5-5

-------
An Artificial Key to Some Common Aquatic Plants
                               common reed,
                               Phragmites
   6. Seed or flower-bear ing    Cutgrass,
      structure composed of    Leersia
      scales with fringed
      margins and over-
      lapping in a single row.

   6. Flower-bearing struc-    7
      ture not as above.

7. Flowering heads composed
   of small seeds with long
   silky hairs,  appearing as a
   silky mass.  The root-
   stocks are stout, making
   it a difficult plant to pull
   up. Plants are 6 to 12 feet
   tall.

7. Flowering heads not         8
   appearing as a silky
   mass.

   8. Flowering part of         wildrice,
      plant much branched,      Zizania
      but not as closely         aquatica L.
      packed as in Phragmites.
      Seeds much larger,
      about  3/4 inch long.
      Plants with short
      roots and easily pulled
      up.

   8. Spikelets, 6 mm long      *cordgrass,
      or more appressed        Spartina
      along one side of
      rachis, grass growing
      in clumps or solid
      stands.

9. None of the veins more       10
   prominent than others.

9. Midvein more prom-         11
   inent than others.

  10. Flowers borne in closely  Cattail, Typha
      packed cylindrical spikes,
      seeds very small. (The
      common cattail has flat
      leaves about 1 inch
      wide; the narrow-leaved
      cattail has leaves some-
      what rounded on the back
      that are 1/8 to 7/8 inch
      wide.)
                                                  10. Flowers in spherical  burreed,
                                                      heads, seeds larger,  Sparganium
                                                      up to size of corn
                                                      kernel; leaves
                                                      shallowly  and
                                                      broadly triangular
                                                      in cross-section.

                                                11. Plants aromatic when    sweetflag
    crushed.

11.  Plants not aromatic
    when crushed,
    flowers large and
    showy.

   12.  Leaves arising at
       intervals along the
       stem.

   12.  Leaves arising at
       base of the plant.

13.  Plants with jointed
    stems,  swollen at the
    joints, or with creeping
    rootstocks; stems with
    alternate, simple
    leaves.

13.  Stems prostrate or
    creeping, branched,
    and often jointed and
    rooted at the joints;
    leaves opposite;
    spreading plant,
    often forming floating
    mats over extensive
    water areas crowding
    out other plants;
    broken off branch frag-
    ments root readily,  and
    stems may elongate as
    much as 200 inches  in
    one season.
A corus
calamus L.
yellow iris
Iris
pseudacorus L.
                                                                           13
                                                                           14
                                                                           smartweed,
                                                                           Polygonum
                                                                           alligatorweed,
                                                                           Alternanthera
                                                                           philoxeroides
                                                                           Mart.
                                                                           15
   14. Fleshy or tuber-
      bearing rootstocks
      and rosettes of sheathing
      basal leaves.

   14. Not as above, floating 16
      plants.
  5-6

-------
                                           An Artificial Key to Some Common Aquatic Plants
15.  None of the veins more    *arrowhead
    prominent than others.    Sagittaria

15.  Midvein and those         arrow arum
    descending into the        Peltandra
    lobes more prominent     Virginia L.
    than others.

   16. Plants floating with     waterhyacinth
      fibrous, branched roots Eichhornia
      and rosettes of stalked  crassipes
      leaves, the leaf stalks  Mart.
      often inflated and
      bladder-like.
   16. Plants with floating
      rosettes of stalked
      leaves, commonly
      several rosettes
      produced on branches
      of the same plant at
      the end of flexible,
      cardlike, sparsely-
      branched submerged
      stems; plant thrives
      at depths of 2 to 5
      feet and favors muddy
      bottoms with high
      organic content; leaf
      stalks  inflated, but
      not as  conspicuously
      as in waterhyacinth.
 D  SUBMERSED "SEA GRASSES"
water-
chestnut,
Trapa natans L.
 1.  Leaves round in cross
    section.

    2. Leaves flat.

 3.  Leaves widest at or
    above the middle.

 3.  Leaves uniform width.

    4. Leaf tip blunt.


    4. Leaf tip pointed.

 5.  Leaf tip single.
manateegrass,
Cymodocea
manatorum
Halophila
turtlegrass,
Thalassia
testudinum
eelgrass,
Zostera marina
                     5. Leaf tip 3-pointed.
                    ACKNOW LEDGMENT:
                         shoalgrass,
                         Diplanthera
                         wrightii
                     This outline was adapted from Keys of
                     Mackenthun and Ingram (1967); Robertson
                     and Eyles (1963); and Humm (1956).  The
                     figures are from Eyles and Robertson and
                     Hotchkiss (1967).
REFERENCES

1  Blackburn, R.D., Weldon,  L.W.,  Yeo,
      R.R., and Taylor, T.M.
      Identification and Distribution of
      Certain Similar-Appearing Submersed
      Aquatic Weeds in Florida. Hyacinth
      ControlJour.8:17-21.   1969.

2  Eyles,  Don E. and Robertson, J. L.
      Guide and Key to the Aquatic Plants
      of the Southeastern United States.
      USFWS Circular 158,  151pp.  1963.

3  Hotchkiss, Neil.  Underwater and
      Floating-Leaved Plants of the United
      States and Canada.  USDI.  Fish and
      Wildlife Service Resource Publication
      Number 44.   124 pp.   1967.

4  Humm,  H.J.   Sea Grasses of the
      Northern Gulf Coast, Bull. Mar. Sci.
      Gulf and Carlb. 6 (4):305-308.    1956.

5  Mackenthun, Kenneth M.  and Ingram,
      William M.  Biological Associated
      Problems in Freshwater Environments.
      FWPCA.   287 pp.  1967.

6  Ogden, E.G.   Key to the North American
      Species of Potamogeton.   Circ. N.Y.
      State Museum.   31:1-11.   1953.

7  Prescott,  G.W.   How to Know the Aquatic
      Plants.  Wm. C. Brown.  1969.

8  Sculthorpe, C. D.  The Biology of Aquatic
      Vascular Plants.  St.  Martin's Press.
      New York.   610pp.   1967.
                                                                                       5-7

-------
An Artificial Key to Some Common Aquatic Plants
   Ward, H.B. and Whipple,  G.C.              10   Weldon, Lyle W.   Common Aquatic
      (Edited by W.T. Edmondson) 1959,               Weeds.   USDA.   Agricultural
      Fresh Water Biology, John Wiley and             Handbook 352,  43pp.   1969.
      Sons,  New York, 1248 pp.  (includes
      chapters Aquatic Bryophyta by Conrad       This outline was prepared by R.M. Sinclair,
      and Vascular Plants by Muensher.           Aquatic Biologist, National Training Center,
                                                Water Programs Operations, EPA, Cincinnati,
                    '                             OH 45268.
  5-8

-------
                                 An Artificial Key to Some Common Aquatic Plants
          Riccia
        Azolla
                               Group A
                          FLOATING PLANTS
Ricciocarpus
                                   of
                                 Salvinia
                                                      Ceratopteris
Lemna minor    Wolffiella
  Limnobium
                              Eichornia
                                                           Pistia
                Elodea
                                                 Ultricularia

-------
An Artificial Key to Some Common Aquatic Plants
                                         Group A
                                FLOATING PLANTS (Cont.)
                          Nelumbo
Nymphaea
                                     seedling,  life-size
                                            Nuphar

-------
                            An Artificial Key to-Some Common Aquatic Plants
                          Group B
                        SUBMERSED
Egeria
Sagittaria

-------
An Artificial Key to Some Common Aquatic Plants
                                          Group B
                                     SUBMERSED (Cent.)
            Ceratophyllum

-------
                   An Artificial Key to Some Common Aquatic Plants
                  Group B
            SUBMERSED (Cont.)
 P.  pectinatus
POTAMOGETON
                                                               stem
                                                               detail
                                N. guadalupensis

-------
An Artificial Key to Some Common Aquatic Plants
                                           Group C
                                         EMERSED
                     Scirpus

-------
                           An Artificial Key to Some Common Aquatic Plants
Diplanthera
   Group D
SEA GRASSES
                                                        Phyllospadix
                                     Cymodocea

-------
An Artificial Key to Some Common Aquatic Plants
                  AQUATIC MACROPHYTES - ALGAE AND BRYOPHYTES
                   Chara
                   Division ALGAE
                                                            Nitella
                                  "Liverworts"
                                 Class Hepaticae
                                                          Riccia
                Porella
   w
 W
4
                                        "Mosses"
                                       Class Musci
                       Leptodictyum.

                               Sphagnum
                        Division BRYOPHYTA

-------
                                   An Artificial Key to Some Common Aquatic Plants
             AQUATIC VASCULAR PLANTS - TRACHEOPHYTA
Class
    Equisetinae
                                                     Equisetum
                                                                  Azolla
   Isoetes
Ceratopteris
Marsilea
                               Class Angiospermae
 Nymphoides
            Myrlophyllum

           DICOTYLEDONS

     Thalassia
             Potamogeton

           MONOCOTYLEDONS
                                                                 Lemna

-------
                 KEY TO SELECTED GROUPS OF FRESHWATER ANIMALS
The following key is intended to provide            animal as a member of the group. Phylum
an introduction to some of the more                PROTOZOA.  If you selected "Ib , proceed
common freshwater animals.  Technical           to the couplet indicated.  Continue this
language is kept to a minimum.                    process until the selected statement is .
                                                 terminated with the name of  a group.
In using this key, start with the first
couplet (la, Ib), and select the alternative          If you wish more information about the
that seems most reasonable. If you               group, consult references.   (See reference
selected "la" you have identified the               list.)
 BI.AQ.21b.5.71

-------
 Key to Selected Groups of Freshwater Animals
 la    The body of the organism comprising
       a single microscopic independent
       cell, or many similar and indepen-
       dently functioning cells associated
       in a colony with little or no differ-
       ence between the cells, i. e. ,  with-
       out forming tissues; or body com-
       prised of masses of multinucleate
       protoplasm.  Mostly microscopic,
       single celled animals.

           Phylum PROTOZOA

. Ib    The body of the organism com-
       prised of many cells of different
       kinds, i.e.,  forming tissues.
       May be microscopic or macro-
       scopic.

 2a    Body or colony usually forming
       irregular masses or layers some-
       times cylindrical, goblet shaped,
       vase shaped, or tree like. Size
       range from barely visible to
       large.

 2b    Body or colony shows some type
       of definite symmetry.

 3a    Colony  surface rough or bristly
       in appearance under microscope
       or hand lens.  Grey, green, or
       br own.   Sponge s.
           Phylum PORIFERA (Fig.   1)

 3b    Colony surface relatively smooth.
       General texture of mass gelatinous,
       transparent.  Clumps of minute
       individual organisms variously
       distributed.  Moss animals,
       bryozoans.
           Phylum BRYOZOA (Fig. 2)

 4a    Microscopic.  Action of two
       ciliated (fringed) lobes  at an-
       terior (front) end in life often
       gives appearance of wheels.
       Body often segmented,  accordian-
       like. Free swimming or attached.
       Rotifers or wheel animalcules.
           Phylum TROCHELMINTHES
           (Rotifera) (Fig.  3)

 4b    Larger,  wormlike, or having
       strong skeleton or shell.
5a  Skeleton or shell present.  Skel-      15
    eton may be external or internal.

5b  Body soft and/or wormlike.            6
    Skin may range from soft to
    parchment -like.

6a  Three or more pairs of well          19
    formed  jointed legs present.
         Phylum ARTHROPODA (Fig. 4)

6b  Legs or appendages,  if present,        7
    limited  to pairs  of bumps or hooks.
    Lobes or tenacles,  if present,
    soft and fleshy,  not jointed.

7a  Body strongly depressed or            8
    flattened in cross section.

7b  Body oval, round, or shaped like      10
    an inverted "U"  in cross section.

8a  Parasitic inside bodies of higher
    animals.  Extremely long and flat,
    divided  into sections like a Roman
    girdle.   Life history may involve
    an intermediate  host.  Tape worms.
         Class  CESTODA (Fig.  5)

8b  Body a  single unit.  Mouth and         9
    digestive system present, but no
    anus.

9a  External or internal parasite of
    higher animals.   Sucking  discs
    present for attachment.  Life his-
    tory may involve two or more in-
    termediate hosts or stages.  Flukes.
         Class  TREMATODA

9b  Free living.  Entire body covered
    with locomotive  cilia. Eye areas
    in head  often appear "crossed".
    Free living flatworms.
         Class  TURBELLARIA (Fig.  6)

lOa Long, slender, with snake-^like
    motion  in life.  Covered with glis-
    tening cuticle.  Parasitic or free-
    living.  Microscopic to six feet in
    length.   Round worms.
         Phylum NEMATHELMINTHES
         (Fig. 7)

lOb Divided into sections or segments     11
   6-2

-------
                                              Key to Selected Groups of Freshwater Animals
lOc  Unsegmented, head blunt, one
     or two retractile tentacles.
     Flat pointed, tail.

lla  Head a more or less well-formed,
     hard, capsule with jaws, eyes,
     and antennae.
          Class INSECTA order DIPTERA
          (Figs. 8A,  8C)

lib  Head structure soft, except
     jaws (if present).  Fig. 8E.)
18          sucking parasites on higher animals,
            often found unattached to host.
            Leaches.
                Class HIRUDINEA (Fig. 9B)

        15a Skeleton internal, of true bone.       40
            (Vertebrates)
12
12a  Head conical or rounded, lateral
     appendages not conspicuous or
     numerous.

12b  Head somewhat broad and blunt.
     Retractile jaws usually present.
     Soft fleshy lobes or tentacles,
     often somewhat flattened,  may be
     present in the head region.  Tail
     usually narrow. Lateral lobes
     or fleshy appendages on each
     segment unless there is a large
     sucker disc at rear end.
          Phylum  ANNELIDA (Fig. 9)

13a  Minute dark colored retractile
     jaws present, body tapering
     somewhat at both ends, pairs or
     rings of bumps or "legs" often
     present, even near tail.
          Class INSECTA Order DIPTERA
          (Fig. 8)

13b  No jaws,  sides of body generally
     parallel except at ends.  Thicken-
     ed area or ring usually present
     if not all the way back on body.
     Clumps of minute bristles on most
     segments. Earthworms, sludge-
     worms.
          Order OLIGOCHAETA

14a  Segments with bristles and/or fleshy
     lobes or other extensions.  Tube
     builders,  borers,  or burrowers.
     Often reddish or greenish in
     color. Brackish or fresh water.
     Nereid worms.
          Order POLYCHAETA (Fig.  9A)

14b  Sucker disc at each end, the large
     one posterior. External blood-
13
14
15b Body covered with an external        16
    skeleton or shell.
        (Figs.  10,  13, 17, 18,  24,
        25, 28)

16a External skeleton jointed,  shell       19
    covers legs and other appendages,
    often leathery in nature.
        Phylum ARTHROPODA

16b External shell entire, not jointed,     17
    unless composed of two clam-
    like halves.
        (Figs.  10,  11, 12)

17a Half inch or less in length.   Two
    leathery, clam-like shells.  Soft
    parts  inside include delicate,
    jointed appendages.  Phyllopods
    or branchiopods.
        Class CRUSTACEA, Subclasses
       BRANCHIOPODA (Fig.  12)
        and OSTRACODA (Fig.  11)

17b     Soft parts covered with thin       18
    skin, mucous produced, no jointed legs.
        Phylum MOLLUSCA
14      18a Shell single, may be a spiral cone.
            Snails.
                Class GASTROPODA (Fig.  13)

        18b Shell double, two halves, hinged
            at one point.  Mussels, clams.
                Class BIVALVIA (Fig.  10)

        19a Three pairs of regular walking        29
            legs, or their rudiments.  Wings
            present in all adults and rudiments
            in some larvae.
                Class INSECTA (Figs. 22,  24D,
                25, 26, 28,  29)
        19b More than three pairs of legs
            apparently present.

        20a Body elongated, head broad and flat
                                        20
                                                                                     6-3

-------
Key to Selected Groups of Freshwater Animals
      with strong jaws.  Appendages follow-
      ing first three pairs of legs are round-
      ded tapering filaments.  Up to  3
      inches long. Dobson fly and fish fly
      larvae.
          Class INSECTA Order
          MEGALOPTERA (Fig.  14)
        25a Appendages leaflike, flattened,
            more than ten pairs.
                Subclass BRANCHIOPODA
                (See 22 a)
20b   Four or more pairs of legs.

21a   Four pairs of legs.  Body rounded,
      bulbous, head minute.  Often
      brown or red.  Water mites.

          Phylum ARTHROPODA, Class
          ARACHNIDA,  Order ACARI
          (Fig. 15)

21b   Five or more pairs of walking
      or swimming legs; gills, two
      pairs of antennae.  Crustaceans.
          Phylum ARTHROPODA,  ,
          Class CRUSTACEA

22a   Ten or more pairs of flattened,
      leaflike swimming and respiratory
      appendages.  Many species swim
      constantly in life; some swim
      upside  down.  Fairy shrimps,
      phyllopods,  or branchipods.
          Subclass BRANCHIOPODA
          (Fig. 16)

22b   Less than ten pairs of swimming     23
      or respiratory appendages.

23a   Body and legs inclosed in bi-         24
      valved  (2 halves) shell which may
      or may not completely hide them.

23b   Body and legs not enclosed in         26
      bivalve shell.  May be large or
      minute.
          (Figs.  17, 18, 19)
24a  One pair of branched antennae
     enlarged for locomotion, extend
     outside of shell (carapace).
     Single eye usually visible.
     "Water fleas"
          Subclass CLADOCERA (Fig. 12)

24b  Locomotion accomplished by
     body legs,  not by antennae.
        25b Animal less than 3 mm, in length.
            Appendages more or less slender
            and jointed; often used for walking.'
21          Shells opaque.  Ostracods.
                '(Fig.  11)  Subclass OSTRACODA

        26a Body a series  of six or more         27
            similar segments, differing
            mainly in size.

        26b Front part of body enlarged into      28
            a somewhat separate body unit
            (cephalothorax) often covered
22          with a single piece of shell (cara-
            pace).  Back part (abdomen) may be
            relatively small,  even folded
            underneath front part. (Fig-  19b)

        27a Body compressed laterally,  i.e.,
            organism is tall and thin.  Scuds.
            amphipods.  ..  •                    .
                Subclass AMPHIPODA (Fig. 17)

        27b Body compressed dorsoventrally,
            i. e., organism low and broad.
            Flat gills contained in chamber
            beneath tail.  Sowbugs.
                Subclass ISOPODA (Fig.  18)
        28a Abdomen extending straight out
            behind,  ending in two small pro-
            jections. One or two  large masses of
            eggs are often attached to female.
            Locomotion by means of two enlarged,
            unbranched antennae, the only large
            appendages on the body.  Copepods.
                Subclass COPEPODA (Fig. 19)

        28b Abdomen extending out behind ending
            in an expanded "flipper" or swim-
            ming paddle.  Crayfish or craw fish.
            Eyes on movable stalks.  Size range
            usually from one to six inches.
                Subclass DECAPODA
        29a Two pairs of functional wings,        39
            one pair may be more or less har-
25          dened as protection for the other
            pair.  Adult insects which normally
            live on or  in the water. (Figs. 25, 28)
  6-4

-------
                                              Key to Selected Groups of Freshwater Animals
29b  No functional wings, though          30
     pads in which wings are develop-
     ing may be visible.  Some may
     resemble adult insects very
     closely, others may differ ex-
     tremely from adults.

30a  External pads or cases in which      35
     wings develop clearly visible.(Figs.
     24,16,27)
30b  More or less wormlike, or at .       31
     least no external evidence of
     wing development.

31a  No jointed legs present.   Other
     structures such as  hooks, sucker
     discs,  breathing tubes may be
     present.  Larvae of flies,
     midges, etc.
         Order DIPTERA (Fig. 8)

31b  Three pairs of jointed thoracic       32
     legs,  head capsule  well formed.

32a  Minute  (2-4mm) living on the
     water surface film. Tail a
     strong organ that can be hooked
     into a "catch" beneath the
     thorax.  When released animal
     jumps into the air.   No wings
     are ever grown.  Adult spring-
     tails.
         Order COLLEMBOLA (Fig. 20)

32b  Larger (usually over 5 mm)          33
     wormlike, living beneath  the
     surface.

33a  Live in cases or webs in water.
     Cases or webs have a silk
     foundation to which tiny sticks,
     stones, and/or bits of debris
     are attached.  Abdominal segments
     often with minute gill filaments.
     Generally cylindric in shape.
     Caddisfly larvae.
         Order TRICHOPTERA (Pig. 21)

33b  Free living, build no cases.          34

34a  Somewhat flattened in cross
     section and massive in appear-
     ance.  Each abdominal segment
     with rather stout,  tapering, lateral
     filaments about as long as body
    is wide.  Alderflies, fishflies,  and
    dobsonflies.
        Order MEGALOPTERA (Fig.  22,  14)

34b Generally rounded in cross section.
    Lateral filaments if present tend
    to be long and thin. A few forms
    extremely flattened,  like a suction
    cup.  Beetle larvae.
        Order COLEOPTERA (Fig. 23)

35a Two or. three filaments or other       37
    structures extending out from
    end of abdomen.

35b Abdomen ending abruptly, unless      36
    terminal segment itself is extended
    as single structure.(Figs. 24A,  24C)

36a     Mouth parts adopted for chewing.
    Front of face covered by extensible
    folded mouthparts  often called a
    "mask".   Head broad,  eyes widely
    spaced.  Nymphs of dragonflies
    or darning needles.
        Order ODONATA (Figs.24A. 24C, 24E)

36b Mouthparts for piercing and sucking.
    Legs often adapted for water lo-
    comotion.  Body forms various.
    Water bugs, water scorpions, water
    boatmen,  backswimmers, electric
    light bugs, water striders, water
    measurers,  etc.
        Order HEMIPTERA (Fig. 25)

37a Tail extensions (caudal filaments)
    two.  Stonefly larvae.
        Order PLECOPTERA (Fig. 26)
37b Tail extensions three,  at times
    greatly reduced in size.

38a Tail extensions long and slender.
    Rows of hairs may give extensions
    a feather-like appearance.
    Mayfly larvae.
        Order EPHEMEROPTERA
        (Fig. 27)

38b Tail extensions flat, elongated
    plates. Head broad with widely
    spaced eyes, abdomen relatively
    long and slender.  Damselfly
    nymths.
        Order ODONATA (Fig.
38
                                                                                     6-5

-------
 Key to Selected Groups of Freshwater Animals
39a  External wings or wing covers
     form a hard protective dome
     over the inner wings folded
     beneath, and over the abdomen.
     Beetles.
          Order COLEOPTERA
          (Fig. 28)

39b  External wings leathery at base,
     Membranaceous at tip.  Wings
     sometimes very short.  Mouth-
     parts for piercing and sucking.
     Body form various.  True bugs.
          Order HEMIPTERA (Fig.  25)

40a  Appendage present in pairs.
     (fins, legs,  wings).

40b  No paired appendages.  Mouth
     a round suction disc.
41a  Body long and slender.  Several
     holes along side of head.
     Lampreys.
          Sub Phylum VERTEBRATA,
          Class CYCLOSTOMATA

41b  Body plump,  oval.  Tail extending
     out abruptly.   Larvae of frogs and
     toads.  Legs  appear one at a time
     during metamorphosis to adult
     form.  Tadpoles.
          Class AMPHIBIA
        42a   Paired appendages are legs         43

        42b   Paired appendages are fins,  '
              gills covered by a flap
              (operculum).  True fishes.
                 Class PISCES
        43a  Digits with claws, nails, or hoofs    44

        43b  Skin naked.  No claws or digits.
             Frogs, toads, and salamanders.
                  Class AMPHIBIA
42      44a   Warm blooded
41      44b   Cold blooded.  Body covered
              with horny scales or plates.
                 Class REPTILIA

        45a   Body covered with feathers.
              Birds.
                 Class AVES

        45b   Body covered with hair.
              Mammals.
                 Class MAMMALIA
45
 6-6

-------
                                             Key to Selected Groups of Freshwater Animals
REFERENCES - Invertebrates .

1  Eddy. Samuel and Hodson, A*C.
      Taxonomic Keys to the Common
      Animals of the North Central States.
      Burgess Pub. Company,  Minneapolis.
      162 p.  1961.

2  Edmondson,  W. T. (ed.) and Ward and
      Whipple's Freshwater Biology.  John
      Wiley & Sons, New York. pp. 1-1248.
      1959.

3  Jahn, T. L. and Jahn,  F. F.  How to Know
      the Protozoa.  Wm. C. Brown Company,
      Dubuque,  Iowa. pp.  1-234.   1949.

4  Klots, Elsie B.  The New Field Book of
      Freshwater Life.  G.P. -Putnam's Sons.
      398pp.   1966.

5  Kudo, R.  Protozoology.  Charles C.
      Thomas, Publisher, Springfield, Illinois.
      pp. 1-778.   1950.

6  Palmer, E.  Lawrence. ,. Fieldbook of
      Natural History.. Whittlesey House,
      McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc.
      New York.  1949.

7  Pennak, R.W.  Freshwater Invertebrates
      of the United States. The Ronald Press
      Company,  New York.  pp. 1-769.  1953.

8  Pimentel,  Richard A.   Invertebrate
      Identification Manual.  Reinhold
      Publishing Corp.  rl51 pp.   1967.

9  Pratt, H.W.  A'Manual of the  Common
      Invertebrate Animals Exclusive of
      Insects. The Blaikston Company,
      Philadelphia,  Pa. pp. 1-854.  1951.
REFERENCES - Fishes

 1  American Fisheries Society.  A List of
      Common and Scientific Names of Fishes
      from the United States and Canada.
      Special Publication No. 2,  Am.  Fish
      Soc. Executive Secretary AFS.
      Washington Bid.  Suite 1040,  15th &
      New York Avenue,  N.W. Washington,
      DC 20005.  (Price $4.00 paper,
      $7. 00 cloth).  1970.

 2  Bailey, Reeve M.  A Revised List  of
      the Fishes of Iowa with Keys for
      Identification,  IN:.  Iowa Fish and
      Fishing.  State of Iowa,  Super,  of
      Printing.  1956.  (Excellent  color
      pictures).

 3  Eddy,  Samuel.  How to Know the
      Freshwater  Fishes.  Wm. C.  Brown
      Company, Dubuque, Iowa.   1957.

 4  Hubbs,  C.L. and Lagler,  K. F.  Fishes
      of the Great Lakes Region.  Bull.
      Cranbrook Inst.  Science, Bloomfield
      Hills, Michigan.   1949.

 5  Lagler, K.F.   Freshwater Fishery
      Biology.   Wm. C. Brown Company,
      Dubuque, Iowa.  1952.

 6  Trautman, M.B.   The Fishes of Ohio.
      Ohio State University Press, Columbus.
      1957.  (An outstanding example  of a
      State study).
Descriptors:  Aquatic Life, Systematics.
                                                                                      6-7

-------
Key to Selected Groups of Freshwater Animals
         1. Spongilla spicules
            Up to .2 mm. long.
 3A  Rotifer. Polyarthra         17   3C. Rotifer, Philpdina
   ' Up to. 3 mm.              "       Up to.4 mm.
                    3B. Rotifer, Keratella
                        Up to . 3 mm.
  4A. Jointed leg
       Caddisfly
4B. Jointed leg
    Crayfish
                                2B. Bryozoal mass.  Up to
                                    several feet diam.
                                       2A. Bryozoa, Plumatella.  Individuals up
                                           to 2 mm.  Intertwined  masses maybe
                                           very extensive.
4C. Jointed leg
     Ostracod
                                                                   5. Tapeworm head,
                                                                     Taenia.   Up to
                                                                      25 yds. long
       6A. Turbellaria. Mesostoma
           Up to 1 cm.
                                     6B. Turbellaria, Dugesia
                                          Up to 1.6 cm.
                              7. Nematodes.  Free living
                                 forms commonly up to
                                 1 mm.,  occasionally
                                 more.

-------
                                      Key to Selected Groups of Freshwater Animals
                  8B. Diptera/Mosquito
                      pupa. Up to 5mm.
8A.  Diptt-ra, Mosquito larvae
    Up to 15 mm. long.
                       8C. Diptera,  chironomid  8E"
                            larvae.  Up to 2 cm.
                                   9D. Diptera,  Rattailed maggot
                                      Up to-25 mm. without tube,
 9A. Annelid.
    segmented.
    worm, up to
    1/2 meter
                                                    10B. Alasmidonta. end view.
                      JOA,  Pelecyopod, Alasmidonta
                           Side view,  up to 18 cm. long.
9B. Annelid, leech up to 20 cm.
/
 11A. Ostracod, Cypericus
      Side view, up to 7 mm.
                         12A. Branchiopod,;
                               Daphnia .  Up
                               to 4mm.
                        11B. Cypericus,  end view.
                                                         12B.  Branchiopod,
                                                                Bosmina.  Up
                                                                to 2mm.
                                                \

-------
Key to Selected Groups of Freshwater Animals
     13.  Gastropod, Viviparus
         Up to 3 Inches.
                                   14. Megaloptera,  •
                                       Alderfly larvae
                                       Up to 25 mm.
        16. Fairy Shrimp, Eubranchipus
           Up to 5 cm.
                                                                  15. Water mite.
                                                                     Up to' 3 mm.
                     17. Amphjpod, Pontoporeia
                        Up to 25 mm.
                                                               18.  Isopod, Asellus
                                                                   Up to 25 mm.
           20.  Collembpla, Podura
               Up to 2 mm. long
19A. Calanoid copeppd,.  19B- Copepoitf copepod.
      Female    :  .  ,; i       Female
     Up to 3 mm.             Up to 25

-------
                                     Key' to Selected Groups of Freshwater Animals
    21A.
                     2 IB.
       21C.
       2 ID.
                              2 IE.
21.  Tricoptera, Larvae cases, mostly 1-2 cm.
                        22.  Megaloptera, alderfly
                            Up to 2 cm.
 23A. Beetle larvae,
      Dytisidae,
      Usually about 1 cm.
23B. Beetle larvae,
     Hydrophilidae,
     Usually about 1 cm.
24A. Odonata, dragonfly
     nymph up to 3 or 4
     cm.
                          24B. Odonata,  tail of
                               damselfly nymph
                               (side view)
                                24E. Odonata, front view
                                    of dragonfly nymph
                                    showing "mask"
                                    partially extended
              24D.  Odonata, damselfly
                   nymph (top view).
                                                             24C. Odonata, tail of
                                                                  dragonfly nymph
                                                                  (top view)

-------
Key to Selected Groups of Freshwater Animals
             25A. Hemiptera,
                  Water Boatman
                  About 1 cm.
             27 .Epheme ropte ra.
               Mayfly nymph
                Up to | cm.
                                             25B.  Hemiptera,
                                                   Water'Scorpion
                                                   About 4 cm.
28A. Coleoptera.
     Water scavenger
     beetle.  Up to 4 cm.
                                26.  Plecoptera,
                                    Stone fly nymph
                                    Up to i cm.
                                                                    28B. Coleoptera,
                                                                         Dytiscid beetle
                                                                        Usually up to 2 5 cm.
                29A. Diptera, .Crane
                     fly.  Up to 2| cm.
                                                      29B. Diptera,  Mosquito
                                                           Up to 20 mm.

-------
                      BIOTA OF WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANTS
                          ,   (MICROSCOPIC INVERTEBRATES)
 I  GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

 A Community rather than individual as a
   unit for study of the process; quantitative
   relationship among different populations -
   "population dynamics".

 B Sequential transformation of organic
   matter through the microbial life - a
   transference of materials and energy
   between microbial populations led to the
   development of functional synecology or
   productive ecology.

 C Microbes considered here include bacteria,
   protozoa, and microscopic metazoa; algae
   arid fungi  are important groups included
   elsewhere in more detail.

 D All microbial groups originate  from
   a) the waste itself,  b) washing waters,
   c) soil,  d) dust from air, and  e) incidental
   sources; only those members that can
   survive and establish themselves in the
   community are important; some 'are
   transient.              '   .

 E Some variations in composition of the
   microbial community in domestic sewage
   treatment due to climatic and other
   ecological factors;  industrial wastes with
   specific waste matter may call for develop-
   ment of more restricted micrbbial com-
   munity for degradation.

 F Most active microbial groups are:  True
   bacteria,  filamentous bacteria, fungi,
   protozoa, nematodes, rotifers, oligochaetes,
   and water-mites.
 B Pseudomonads are probably the most
    versatile in their ability to attack a great
 :   variety of.organic compounds,  including
    petroleum products^ phenolics,  cyanides.
    Others; such as Achromobacter, Alca-
    ligenes, Chrd'mobacterium, Flavobacteriurn,
    Aerobacter, and Micrococcus,  are also
    important genera. Actinomyces are
    prominent in wastes rich in cellulose and
    Bacillus organisms are starch  attackers.
    Sulfur and iron bacteria are predominant
    in wastes rich in respective compounds.

 C Actinomyces,  Bacillus spp., Aerobacter
    spp., and nitrogen-fixation bacteria are
 •   primarily soil dwellers and-are almost
  •  always'present in any type of wastes in
    small numbers.

 D Parasitic and pathogenic bacteria, if
  .  present,  are transient.

 E-. In extended aeration process with high
    dissolved oxygen, predominant species
    are limited to pseudomonads, Zoogloea
    ramigera, and Sphaerotilus.
Ill  PROTOZOA

 A Classification   . .   •

    1  Single-cell animals in the phylum
       Protozoa in the animal kingdom.

                     or
    2  A separate kingdom. Protista,  to
       include protozoa, algae,  fungi, and
       bacteria.
II   BACTERIA

 A  No.ideal method for studying distribution
    and ecology ..of bacteria in waste-treatment.
    Total bacterial counts made on nutrient
    agar or-gelatine reflect only, a portion of
    the bacterial flora present.
          Mastigophora (flagellates) - only
          the subclass Zoomastigina (non-
          pigmented) included; four orders:
SE. BI. 4e.ll.72
                                      7-1

-------
Biota of Wastewater Treatment Plants
        1) Rhizomastigina - amoeba-
           flagellates with 1 or more
           flagella;  examples; Mastigamoeba
           Actinomonas,  Rhizomastix

        2) Protomonadina -  with 1 or 2
           flagella;  comprising most of the
           free-living forms; examples:
           Peranema, Bo do,  Monas.
           Pleuromonas

        3) Polymastigina --with 3-8 flagella;
           mostly parasitic in gut of-man
           and animals   -         ,

        4) Hypermastigina - with numerous
           flagella;  all parasitic in insect
           intestine

        Ciliophora or Infusoria (ciliates)  -
        largest class of protozoa; no pig-
        mented members; most important
        group of protozoa in waste treatment;
        2 subclasses:

        1) Ciliata *  cilia  present during the
           the  entire trophic life;  comprising
           most of the common ciliates;
           examples:  Paramecium, Colpi-
           dium,  Colpoda, Euplotes,
           Stylonychia, Vorticella, Oper-
           cularia, Epistylis, Carchesium
        2)  Suctoria - cilia present while
           young and tentacles'during   •
           trophic life

        Sarcodina (amoebae) - pseudopodia
        (false feet) for locomotion and food-
        capturing; cell without cell-wall;
        some  with test or shell; 2 subclasses:

        1)  Rhizopoda - pseudopodia without
           axial filaments; 5 orders:

           a)  Proteomyxa  - with radiating
              pseudopodia; no test or shell

          b)  Mycetazoa (slime-molds)
              forming plasmpdium; re-
              sembling fungi in sporangium
              formation.
           c) Amoebina - true amoeba;
              pseudopodia in the form of
              lobopodia; no test or shell;
              cyst formation frequent;  a few
          .   • capable.of flagellate trans-
              formation;  examples:  Naegleria,
  .   .   .      Amoeba, Hartmannella.
              Endampeba

           d) Testacea - amoeba with single
              test or shell; examples:
              Arcella, Difflugia

           e) Foraminifera  - large amoeba
             , with calcareous shell;  all
              marine forms

         2) Actinopoda - with spinous
           pseudopodia; 2 orders:,

           a) Heliozoa -  without central
              capsule; usually spherical in
              form with many radiating
              axopodia; examples: Actino-
         ;.  .   sphaerium,  Actinophrys

           b) Radiolaria  - pelagic in various
              oceans

      d  Sporozoa - no organ of locomotion;
         all parasitic (Plasmodium. Coccidia)

B  General Morphology

   1  Zoomastigina:

      With the exception of Rhizomastigina
      which is amoeboid, the body has defi-
      nite shape (oval,  leaf-like,  pear-like,
      etc.); most free-living forms with 1-2
      flagella, some with 3 or more flagella;
      few forming colonies; cytostome present
      in many for feeding on bacteria; rela-
      tively small size (15-40 p.)

   2  Ciliophora:

      Most highly developed protozoa; with
      few exceptions, a macro- arid a micro-
      nucleus; adoral zone, mouth, oral
      groove, usually present in swimming
      and crawling forms; stalked form with
 7-2

-------
                                                     Biota of. Wastewater Treatment Plants
      conspicuous ciliation of a disc-like
      anterior region and little or no body
      cilia; cyst formed in most species

   3  Sarcodina:

      Cytoplasmic membrane but not cell-
      wall; cytoplasm with distinct ectoplasm
      and endoplasm in many common spp.;
      nucleus with large  nucleolus in most
      of the free-living forms;  some with
      the body enclosed in a test or shell
      and moving by protruding pseudopodia
      outside of the enclosure through an
      opening; few capable of temporary
      transformation into flagellate; fresh-
      water, actinopods usually spherical
      with many radiating axopodia; some
      Testacea spp.  containing symbiotic
      algae - mistaken for pigmented amoebae;
      cysts with single or double wall and
      1-2 nuclei,  parasitic amoebae forming
      cysts,with 4 or more nuclei

C  General Physiology

   1  Zoomastigina          :

      Free-living forms  normally holozoic;
      food supply mostly bacteria; relatively
      aerobic, therefore, among the first to
      disappear in anaerobic conditions; re-
      production by simple fission and
      occasionally by budding.

   2  Ciliophora:

      Holozoic; true ciliates  concentrating
      food particles,  i.e., bacteria, by
      ciliary  movement around the mouth-
      part; suctoria  sucking through tentacles;
      bacteria, small algae and protozoa
      constituting main food under normal
      conditions; not as aerobic as flagellates -
      a few surviving under highly anaerobic
      conditions,  such as Metopus; repro-
      ducing by simple fission, conjugation,
      or encystation.

   3  Sarcodina:

      Mostly  holozoic; feeding through engulf-
      ing by pseudopodia; food supply of small
       amoebae mostly bacteria; large
       amoebae engulfing larger organisms;
       shelled amoebae,  i.e., Arcella. feeding
       on a variety of organisms or saprozoic;
       reproduction by  simple fission and
       encystation.
IV  NEMATODA

 A Classification

    1  All in the phylum Nemata (nonsegmented
       round worms);  2 subphyla:

       Secernentea (phasmids) 6 orders:
       Tylenchida (spear in mouth), Rhabditida
       (rhabditoid eosophagus), Strongylida
       (parasitic), Ascaridida (parasitic),
       Spirurida (parasitic), and Camallanida
       (parasitic); with the exception of
       tylenchids, -all  with papillae on male
       tail

       Adenophora (aphasmids) 5 orders:
       Dorylaimida (spear in mouth),  Chromo-
       dorida,  Mo'nhysterida,  Enoplida, and
       Diocytophymatida; no papillae on male
       tail; no excretary  canal

    2  Nematodes encountered in polluted
       water and in sewage treatment mostly
       belonging to order Rhabditida and few
       in orders Dorylaimida and Tylenchida;
       those in Rhabditida being bacteria-
       feeders and those  in the latter two,
       feeding on algae and other zoomicrobes;
       examples of rhabditids:  Rhabditis,
       Diplogaster,  Diplogasteroides,  Mono-
       choides,  Cephalobus, Cylindrocorpus,
       Turbatrix;  examples of the other two:
       Dorylaimus,  Aphelenchoides
                       >
 B General Morphology

    Round,  slender, nonsegmented (some with
    markings on outside); most of the free- •
    living forms microscopic in size although
    dorylaimids up to  several mm in length;
    sex separated but  some parthenogenetic,
    complete aliinentray  tract with elaborate
    mouth parts with or without spear (or
    stylet); no circulatory or respiratory
    system
                                                                                        7-3

-------
 Biota of Waste-water Treatment Plants
 C  General Physiology

    Most sewage treatment plant dwellers
    feeding on bacteria; others preying on
    protozoa,  small nematodes, rotifers,
    etc.; clean water species vegetarians;
    DO diffused through cuticle; rhabditids
    tolerating lower DO than clean water spp;
    reproduction - eggs - larvae 4 molts) -
    adults
V   ROTIFERS

 A  Classification:

    1  Classified either as a class of the
      phylum Aschelminthes (various forms
      of worms) or as a separate phylum
      (Rotifera); commonly  called wheel
      animalcules, on account of circular appearing
     . movement of cilia around head (corona);
      corona contracted when crawling or
      swimming and  expanded when attached
      to catch food.

    2  Of the 3 classes, 2 (Seisonidea and
      Bdelloidea) grouped by some authors
      under Digononta (2 ovaries) and the
      other being Monogononta (1 ovary);
      Seisonidea containing mostly marine
      forms.

    3  Class Bdelloidea containing 1 order
      (Bdelloida) with 4 families, Philodinedae
      being the  most  important.

    4  Class Monogononta comprising 3 orders:
      Ploima with 14 families,  Flosculariaceae
     . with 4 families, and Collothecaceae
      with 1 family; most important genera
      included in the  order Ploima (i. e.,
      Brachionus,  Keratella. Monostyla,
      Trichocerca. Asplanchna, Polyarthra,
      Synchaeta, Microcodon); common genera
      under the order,Flosculariaceae:  Floscu-
      laria, Limnias, Conochilus, and Atrochus.

    5  Unfortunately orders and families of
      rotifers based on character of corona
      and trophi (chewing organ), which are
      difficult to study, esp. the latter; the
      foot and cuticle much easier to study.
  B General Morphology and Physiology

    1  Body weakly differentiated into head,
       neck, trunk, and foot, separated by
       folds; in some, these regions are
       merely gradual changes in diameter
       of body and without a separate neck;
       segmentation external only.

    2  Head with corona, dosal antenna,  and
       ventral mouth; mastax, a chewing
       organ, located in head and neck, con-
       nected to mouth anteriorly by a  ciliated
       gullet and posteriorly to a large stomach
       occupying much of the trunk.

    3  Common rotifers reproducing partheno-
       genetically by diploid eggs;  eggs laid
       in water, cemented to plants, or carried
       on femals until hatching.

    4  Foot, a prolongation of body, usually
       with 2 toes; some with one toe; some
       with one toe and an extra toe-like
       structure (dorsal spur).

    5  Some, like Philodina,  concentrating
       bacteria and other microbes and minute
       particulate organic matter by corona;
       larger microbes chewed by  mastax;
       some such as Monostyla feeding on
       clumped matter,  such as bacterial
       growth, fungal masses,  etc. at bottom;
       virus generally not ingested - apparently
       undetected by cilia.

    6  DO requirement somewhat similar to
       protozoa; some disappearing under
       reduced DO, others,  like Philodina,
       surviving at as little as 2 ppm .DO.
VI  SANITARY SIGNIFICANCE

 A Pollution tolerant and pollution nontolerant
    species - hard to differentiate -  requiring
    specialist training in protozoa, nematodes,
    and rotifers.

 B Significant quantitative difference in clean
    and polluted waters  - clean waters contain-
    ing large variety of  genera and species
    but quite low in densities.
 7-4

-------
                                                         Biota of Wastewater Treatment Plants
  C Aerobic sewage treatment processes
     (trickling filters and activated sludge
     processes, even primary settling) ideal
     breeding grounds for those that feed on
     bacteria,  fungi, and minute protozoa and
     present in very large numbers; effluents
     from such processes carrying large
     numbers of these zoomicrobes; natural
     waters receiving such effluents showing
     significant increase in all 3 categories.

  D Possible Pathogen Carriers

     1  Amoebae and nematodes grown on
        pathogenic enteric bacteria in lab;
        none alive in amoebic cysts; very few
        alive in nematodes after  2 days after
        ingestion; virus  demonstrated in
        nematodes only when very high virus
        concentrations present;  some free-
        living amoebae parasitizing humans.

     2  Swimming ciliates and some rotifers
        (concentrating food by corona) ingesting
        large numbers of pathogenic enertic
        bacteria, but digestion rapid; no evidence
        of concentrating  virus; crawling ciliates
        and flagellates feeding on clumped
        organisms.

     3  Nematodes concentrated from sewage
        effluent in Cincinnati area showing
        live E_. coli and  streptococci,  but no
        human enteric pathogens.
VII  EXAMINATION OF SEWAGE TREATMENT
     EFFLUENT, AND SLUDGE FOR MICROBES
  A  Bacteria - Not  Included

  B  Zoomicrobes -

     The 12th edition of the Standard Methods
     (1965) has a part on Biologic Examination
     of Water, Wastewater, Sludge, and Bottom
     Materials, in which the sludge of sewage
     treatment is discussed, but very briefly.
     Much of the materials are concerned with
     sediment at bottom of natural bodies of
     water.   Chang described a method for
     examination of  water for nematodes; but
VIII
      the method is not applicable to sewage
      treatment,  sludge, or effluent.

      1  Waste'treatment - the method bound
        to be qualitative; material scraped
        from stones in trickling filters or the
        floe masses in activated sludge examined
        in slide-coverslip preparations for
        poor, moderate, 'or rich zoobiota;
        material relatively rich in zoobiota
        indicating satisfactory treatment
        process; protozoa, rotifers,  and
        nematodes predominant, especially
        protozoa; bristle worms and watermites
        in smaller numbers;  springtails and
        insect larvae  present as grazing fauna
        on top of trickling filters.

      2  Sludge - representative  samples sus-
        pended in known quantities of dilution
        water and thoroughly shaken; filtered
        through bolting cloth or metal screen
        of comparable pore size to remove
        extraneous  dead clumped matter;filtrate
        examined in Sedgewick Rafter (SR) counting
        cell for  various zoomicrobes; fresh
        sludge desired or samples refrigerated.

      3  Sewage effluent - samples "fixed" with
        formalin, merthiolate,  or similar
        chemical not desirable for examination
        for zoomicrobes; 50-200 ml  filtered
        through  a 7- or 14-micron membrane
        and  strained material washed with a
        few  mis  of dilution and examined in
        an SR cell for zoo-microbes quantita-
        tively or qualitatively.
USE OF ZOOMICROBES AS POLLUTION
INDEX

Idea not new, protozoa suggested long ago;
many considered impractical because of
the need of identifying pollution-intolerant
and pollution-tolerant species - proto-
zoologist required.

Can use them on a quantitative basis  -
nematodes,  rotifers, and nonpigmented
protozoa present in small numbers in
clean water. Numbers greatly increased
                                                                                          7-5

-------
  Biota of Wastewater Treatment Plants
     when polluted with effluent from aerobic
     treatment plant or recovering from sewage
     pollution; no significant error introduced
     when clean-water members included in the
     enumeration if a suitable method of com-
     puting the pollution index developed.

  C  Most practical method involves the
     equation: (A + B)/A = Z.P.I., where
     A = number of pigmented protozoa,
     B = other zoomicrobes, in a unit volume
     of sample, and Z.P.I. =  zoological pollu-
     tion index.  For relatively clean water,
     the value of Z. P. I. close to 1; the larger
     the value above 1, the greater the pollution
     by aerobic effluent, or sewage during
     recovery.  This is based on the fact that
     pigmented protozoa are members of clean
     water micro-fauna (stabilization pond
     excluded).
IX  CONTROL

 A Chlorination of Effluent and Settling

 B Prolongation of Detention Time of Effluent

 , C Modification of Waste Treatment

 D Elimination of Slow Sand Filters in
    Nematode Control


 X  LIST OF COMMON ZOOLOGICAL ORGAN-
    ISMS FOUND IN SEWAGE TREATMENT
    PROCESS - TRICKLING FILTERS AND
    ACTIVATED SLUDGE PROCESS

    PROTOZOA

       Sarcodina - Amoebae

         Amoeba proteus; A radiosa

         Hartmanella spp.
         Arcella vulgaris

          Naegleria gruberi

         Actinophrys sol
FLAGELLATA

   Bodo caudatus
   Pleuromonas jaculans
   Oikomonas termo
   Cercomonas longicauda

   Peranema trichophorum

   Swimming type
      Ciliophora:
        Colpidium colpoda
        Colpoda cucullus

        Glaucoma
        Paramecium caudatum; P.  bursaria

   Stalked type

      Opercularia spp.  (short stalk
                       dichotomous)

      Vorticella spp.  (stalk single and
                      contractile)

      Epistylis plicatilis (like Opercularia
                         more  colonial)
      Carchesium spp.  (like Vorticella but
                      colonial, both have
                      spiral coiled stalk
   Crawling type      when'contracted)
      Euplotes spp.
      Stylonychia mylitus
      Urostyla spp.
      Oxytricha spp.

NEMATODA

   Diplogaster spp.
   Monochoides spp.
   Diplogasteroides spp.
   Rhabditis spp.

   Pelodera spp.
   Aphelenchoides sp.

   Dorylaimus sp.
    7-6

-------
                                                     Biota of Wastewater Treatment Plants
       Cylindrocorpus sp.
       Cephalobus sp.
       Rhabdolaimus sp.
       Monhystera sp.
       Trilobus sp.
    ROTATORIA

       Diglena
       Monstyla
       Polyarthra
       Philodina
       Keratella
       Brachionus
    OLIGOCHAETA  (bristle worms)

       A elosoma hemprichi (Aelosomatidae)
       Aulophorus vagus (Naididae)
       Tubifex tub if ex (Tubificidae)
       Pachydrilus lineatus (Enchytraeidae)

    INSECT LARVAE
       Metriocnemus sap.  (midge)
       Orthocladius ssp.   (midge)
       Psychoda spp. (filter fly)

      OTHER ARTHROPODA
       Hydrochna sp. (Acarina, mite)
       Platysieus tenuipes (Acarina, mite)
       Hypogastrura (» Achorutes sub-viatica)
          viaticus (Collembola, Springtail)
       Folsomia sp.  (Collembola, Springtail)
       Tomocerus sp. (Collembola,  Springtail)
    MOLLUSCA
       Lymnaea ssp.
              sp.
(pulmonate snail)
(pulmonate snail)
XI  POPULATION DYNAMICS AND THE FOOD
    CHAIN IN AEROBIC SEWAGE TREATMENT
    PROCESSES (Figure 1 and 2)

 A Aerobic bio-oxidation of waste materials
    comparable to a food chain through which
    the dead organic matter  is converted to
    inorganic matter during  the stabilization
    process, e.g.. waste organic matter—*•
    bacterial phase —*•  zoological phase —*-
    inorganic matter.
B  Systematics,  physiology and biochemistry
   involved in explaining the "chain reaction";
   knowledge inadequate and fragmental;
   ecological study limited to principles
   governing the relationship of different
   groups of flora and fauna with  each other
   and with the environment.

C  With adequate DO supply, bacterial popu-
   lation increases rapidly in the presence
   of rich organic food; flagellates and
   amoebae,  which feed on bacteria and
   other small particulate matter in clumped
   material (such as growth film  and floe
   masses), first show increase in population
   size; as suspended bacterial population
   increases to a high level, swimming
   ciliates, which feed actively on the
   suspended bacteria;  also increase; in-
   creased consumption of bacteria and
   reduced supply of dead organic matter
   results in decline in bacterial  population,
   which, in turn, results in a decline in
   the swimming ciliate population; the
   presence of large populations of small
   protozoa (ciliates, flagellates, and
   amoebae) results  in an increase in
   populations of rotifers, nematodes,
   stalked ciliates, and crawling  ciliates,
   which feed on the  small protozoa and
   bacteria that are lodged in clumped
   masses; eventually,  scavengers,  such
   as mites,  shelled amoebae,  certain
   nematodes, and bristle worms become
   predominant,  and bacteria and small
   protozoa populations drop to the pre-
   cycle level; rotifers that can concentrate
   bacteria in suspension, (such as Rotifer
   and Philodina. and nematodes), which
   have long surviving time, may remain
   for a long time; these zoomicrobes
   appear in the  effluent in proportion to
   their respective population during treat-
   ment - nematodes, rotifers, ciliates
   predominant with  small numbers of
   flagellates and amoebae; bristle worms
   unpredictable; mites few.
                                                                                         7-7

-------
Biota of Wastewater Treatment Plants
                          Insects
                      Oligochaetes &
                      insect larvae
                       Nematodes
                       & rotifers

                     f   f       t
                   Nonpigmented
                     protozoa        *
                     I   I   tfft
                  Heterotrophic
                    bacteria
                       Fungi
                       Algae
                 Autotrophic bacteria
               Pathogenic organisms"
Suspended organic matter

         (by hydrolysis)
 Dissolved organic matter
   (respiration,
   deamination,
   decarboxylation, etc.)
    Inorganic C,  P.  N,
              S comp.

(NH3, NO".  C0°, P)

  (Nitrification, sulfur
   & iron bacteria)
                                                                       • Raw Sewage
               Food Chain in Aerobic Sewage Treatment Processes

                                 Figure 1.
 7-8

-------
                                                       Biota of Wastewater Treatment Plants
     Organic Matter (dead)
                               Total Bacteria Population
                                                              Special Characteristics:

                                                              1.  More "binding" organisms
                                                                  (stalked ciliates)  in
                                                                  activated sludge process
Stalked Ciliates
Crawling Ciliates
Rotifers and
Worms (nematodes and
      oligochaetes)
Mites  (Platysieus)
                                     Mites
                                     Oligochaetes
                                     Shelled Amoebae  \   ^\
                                     Crawling dilates (      \
                                       (Scavengers)
                                                                  Oligochaetes, mites,
                                                                  and spring tails -
                                                                  grazing fauna on
                                                                  trickling filters
                                         TIME
                    Population dynamics in Aerobic Sewage Treatment Process
                                         Figure 2.
Since sewage effluent from aerobic treat-
ment processes are rich in nonpigmented
zoomicrobes,  discharge of effluent into
natural causes great increase in their
members; unpolluted  waters usually have
a much higher  algae-to-nonpigmented-
zoomicrobes ratio.  The great increase
                                         in the latter in water resulted from effluent
                                         pollution is likely to change this ratio,
                                         thus giving the basis for the  Z. P.I.   This
                                         analysis is not applicable to  stabilization
                                         ponds due  to the large algal population
                                         present in their effluents.
                                                                                             7-9

-------
 I
h-»
O
Microbial Agents
Utilization : Elimination
Treatment Process . Pollution Indicator

Stabilization of Organic Matter
Aerobic
Anaerobic
Breakdown of Specific Industrial
Wastes
Stabilization Ponds
Aerobic and Anaerobic
Combined
Nitrification - Aerobic
Dentrification when
Anaerobic
Elimination of Nitrogen Through
N2 Formation - Special
Dentrification

Sludge Digestion
Aerobic
Anaerobic

Phosphorus Removal
Essential in Preventing
Algae Growth

(Composting) - Solid Wastes







Total Bacteria Count Removal Destruction
Coliform Density
MF Counts
MPN Tube Tests
E. Coli Density1
~~ Tube Test
MF Counts" •

Streptococci
Tube Test
MF Counts

Infrared Spectrophotometer
Specificity- •
Time Requirement
Enteric Pathogens
Salmonella Spp.
Quantitation in
Mixed Population

Enteroviruses
Large Volumes
Required ,

Coli Phage
Type Specificity To Be
Considered
Detention or
0^4+1 ,•„„ Disinfection
Settling
Limited to Large Organisms
Flocculation
Alum
Iron
Lime.
"Coagulant Aid"
Filtration
Adsorption
Straining
Medium
Reverse 'Osmosis
Metal Strainer
Mesh Size Limit

Antagonistic Agent
Pseudomonads

Chemical
Clorine
Bromine
Iodine
Ozone
Silver
Copper
Physical
Heat
UV
Gamma
Radiation
Wave
Motion
Electro-
Hydraulic

Treatment
Bacterial Feeders
Protozoa
Nematodes
Rotifers
Flotation
Fluorescent Antibody Aeration Cationic
Against E. Coh Anionic Detergent Detergent
Against Enteric Pathogens Neutral Detergent
Gas Chromatography
on Metabolic Products
Zoological Pollution Index
Figure 3 .....
W
»-*•
1
o
0)
t-t-
3

CD
H
reatme
3
tJ
P
3
S-





















-------
                                                   Biota of Wastewater Treatment Plants
REFERENCES

1  American Public Health Association,
       American Water Works Association .
       and Water Pollution Control
       Federation.   Standard Methods for
       the Examination of Water and Waste-
       water,  12th ed.  New York.    1965.

2  Chang, S. L., et al.  Survey of Free -
       Living Nematodes and Amoebas in
       Municipal Supplies.  J.A.W.W.A.
       52:613-618.

3  Change, S. L. and Kabler,  P.W.
       Free-Living Nematodes in Aerobic
       Treatment Plant Effluents.
       J.W.P.C.F.   34:1256-1261.   1963.

4  Edmondson,  W.T., et al.   Ward Whipple's
       Fresh Water Biology,  2nd ed.
       John Wiley & Sons, New York,
       pp.  368-401.   1959.

5  Hawkes,  H.A.  Ecology of Activated
       Sludge and Bacteria Beds, (in Waste
       Treatment) Pergamon Press,
       pp.52-98.  1960.

6  Hawkes,  H.A.  The Ecology of Waste -
       water Treatment, Pergamon Press.
       1963.

7  Hawkes,  H.A.  The Ecology of Sewage
       Bacteria Beds, (in Ecology and the
       Industrial Society) John Wiley & Sons,
       New York,  pp.  119-148.   1965.

8  McKinney, Ross E. and Gram, Andrew.
       Protozoa in Activated Sludge.
       Sew. Ind. Wastes.   28:1219-1231.
       1956. (reprinted in Biology of Water
       Pollution by L.E. Keup, W.M.
       Ingram and Kenneth M. Mackenthun.
       FWPCA Pub. No. CWA-3, pp. 252-
       262.  1967.)

9  Cooke, William Bridge,   Trickling Filter
       Ecology.   40:273-291, pp. 269-287.
       1959. (reprinted in Biology of Water
       Pollution)
10  Calaway, W.'T.  and Lackey,  J.B.
        Waste Treatment Protozoa,
        •Flagellata.   University  of Florida,
        College of Engineering,  Florida
        Engineering Series No. 3,  pp.  1-140.
        1962.

11  Calaway, W.T.   The Metazoa  of Waste
        Treatment Processes-Rotifers.
        Journal Water Poll. Cont.  Fed.
        4(11) part 2: pp.412-422.

12  Bick, Hartmut.   An Illustrated Guide to
        Ciliated Protozoa used as  Biological
        Indicators in Freshwater Ecology.
        World Health Organization.  Geneva.
        1969.  (includes an .illustrated  key)

13  Curds,  C. R.  An Illustrated Key to the
        Freshwater Ciliate Protozoa
        commonly found in Activated Sludge.
        Water Research Tech. Paper 12.
        Water Poll. Res.  Lab.  Stevenage
        1969.

14  .Curds,  C. R.  and Cockburn,  A.
        Protozoa in Biological Sewage
        Treatment  Processes -  I.   A
        Survey of the Protozoan Fauna of
        British Percolating Filters and
        Activated Sludge Plants. II. Protozoa
        as  Indicators in the Activated Sludge
        Process.  Water Research
        4:225-244.   1970.
This outline was prepared by S.  L.  Chang,
M.D., Chief,  Etiology, Division of Water
Supply Programs Division, WPO, EPA
Revised by R.  M. Sinclair, Aquatic
Biologist, National Training Center, DTTB,
MDS,  WPO, EPA, Cincinnati, OH 45268.
                                                                                 7-11

-------
Biota of Wastewater Treatment Plants
       a. Peranema
          trichoporum,  25u
        d. N. gruberi, cyst
             nuclei)  12u
b. Naegleria gruberi
  amoeba stage, 18u
e. N. gruberi,  cyst
    (1 nucleus)
         g. Arcella vulgaris
                40u
                                           h. Actinosphaerium sp.
                                              200-300u
                                           (with a navicula inside)
       Fig.  1
c. N. gruberi
   flagellate stage
                                                                     f. Endamoeba histolytice
                                                                       cyst (4 nuclei) 16u

                                   i. Bodo caudatu
                                      10-20u
     S.L.Chang, 196J
7-12

-------
                                             Biota of Wastewater Treatment Plants

a.  Paramecium caudatum
       200 - 260u
                                                b.  P.  caudatum
                                                    cyst
  c. Cplpoda sp.  20-120u
        Sid* ri«w
    e. Euplotes carcinatus
            70u  "
                                                d.  Colpoda cyst
                                 Fig. 2
f. Vorticella 35-157u

                S.L.Chang,  1963

                                                                               7-13

-------


Biota of Wastewater Treatment Plants
                  a. Diaptomus sp. 2 mm.
                        (2 egg sacs
                   c. Philodina sp. 45u


b. Cyclops sp.  2 mm.

                                                       larva

                                                         male
         female

                                                    e.  Diplogaster  nudicapltatus
                                                             about  1 mm.
                  d. Anurea cochlearis 125u
                                                 Fig. 3
     S.L.Chang, 1963
  7-14

-------



                                             Biota of Wastewater Treatment Plants
                                            Dorsal view
  a. Hydrochna sp. (water mite)
      (SOX)
                                           b. Folsomia fimetaria (50X)
c.  F.  fimetaria (side view)



d.  Typical zoological organisms
    found in growth mass in
    Trickling filters (SOX)
e.  Typical zoological organisms
    found in floe masses in activated
    sludge process (SOX)
                                   Fig.  4
                 S.L.Chang.  1963
                                                                             7-15

-------
 I
h-»

en
                              RHABIOITIS (Mob)
                                                                                                                      (Aftw CMhnod}4
                              "iCLGGASTER (Molt)
IS
!-«•



I

o
                                                                                                                                                                                       (b



                                                                                                                                                                                       1,
                                                                                                                                                                                       3
                                                                                                                                                                                       m
                                                                                                                                                                                       3
                               MONHYSTEH* (FtmoU)
                                                                                                   GENITAL PORE
                               RHABIDITIS (F«mol«)



                                AHPHIO
                           '   PHARYTIX
                                   OESOPHA6EAL

                                     CORPUS
                                                                                                                (ATIW CWIwiod)
                                                                    Free  Living Nematodes


                                                                        ^Npmathelminthes)

-------
                       BIOLOGY OF ZOOPLANKTON COMMUNITIES
I  CLASSIFICATION

A  The planktonic community is composed of
   organisms that are relatively independent
   of the bottom to complete their life history.
   They inhabit the  open water of lakes
   (pelagic zone).  Some species have inactive
   or resting stages that lie on the bottom
   and carry the species through periods  of
   stress; e. g., winter.  A few burrow in
   the mud and enter the pelagic zone at night,
   but most live in the open water all the
   time that the species is present in an'active
   form..

B  Compared to the bottom fauna and flora,
   the plankton consists of relatively few
   kinds  of organisms that are consistently
   and abundantly present.  Two major cat-
   egories are often called phytoplankton
   (plants) and zooplankton (animals), but
   this is based on an outmoded classification
   of living things.   The modern tendency is
   to identify groupings according to their
   function in the ecosystem:  Primary pro-
   ducers (photosynthetic organisms), consumers
   (zooplankton),  and decomposers (hetero-
   trophic bacteria  and fungi).

C  The primary difference then is nutritional;
   phytoplankton use inorganic nutrient
   elements and solar radiation. Zooplankton
   feed on particles, much of which can be
   phytoplankton cells,  but can be bacteria or
   particles of dead organisms (detritus)
   originating in the plankton, the shore
   region,  or the land surrounding the lake.

D  The swimming powers of planktonic
   organisms is so  limited that their hori-
   zontal distribution is determined mostly
   by movements of-water.  Some of the
   animals are able to swim fast enough that
   they can migrate vertically tens of meters
   each day,  but they are capable of little
   horizontal navigation.  At most,  some
   species of crustaceans show a general
   avoidance of the  shore areas during calm
   weather when the water is moving more
   slowly than the animals can swim.  By
   definition, animals that are able to control
   their horizontal location are nekton, not
   plankton.
    In this presentation, a minimum of clas-
    sification and taxonomy is used, but it >
    should be realized that each group is
    typified by adaptations of structure on
    physiology that are related .to the plank-
    tonic mode of existence.  These adapta-
    tions are reflected in the classification.
II"  FRESHWATER ZOOPLANKTON

 A  The freshwater zooplankton is dominated
    by representatives of three groups of
    animals,  two of them crustaceans:
    Copepoda, Cladocera, Rotifera. All have
    feeding mechanisms that permit a high
    degree  of selectivity of food,  and two can
    produce resting eggs that can withstand
    severe  environmental conditions.  In
    general the food of usual zooplankton pop-
    ulations ranges from bacteria and small
    algae to small animals.
 B  The Copepoda reproduce by a normal
    biparental process, and the females lay
    fertilized eggs in groups which are carried
    around in sacs until they hatch.  The
    immature  animals go through an elaborate
    development with many stages.  The later
    stages have mouthparts  that permit them
    to collect particles.  In  many cases, these
    are in the  form of cqmbs which remove
    small particles by a  sort of filtration
    process.   In others,  they are modified to
    form grasping organs by which small
    animals or large algae are captured
    individually.

 C  The Cladocera (represented by Daphnia)
    reproduce much of the time .by partheno-
    genesis, so that only females are present.
    Eggs are held by the mother in a brood
    chamber until the young are developed far
    enough to fend for themselves.  The newborn
    animals look  like  miniature adults, and do
    not go through an  elaborate series of
    developmental stages in the water as do
    the copepods.  Daphnia  has comb-formed
    filtering structures on some of its legs
    that act as filters.
BI. AQ. 29.5.71
                                        8-1

-------
  Biology of Zooplankton Communities
     Under some environmental conditions the
     development of eggs is affected and males
     are produced.  Fertilized eggs  are produced
     that can resist freezing and drying, and
     these carry the population through
     unsatisfactory conditions.

     The Rotifera are small animals with a
     ciliated area on the head  which  creates
     currents used both for locomotion and for
     bringing food particles to the mouth.  They
     too reproduce by parthenogenesis during
     much of the year, but production of males
     results in fertilized,  resistant resting eggs.
     Most rotifers lay eggs one at a  time and
     carry them until they hatch.
Ill  ZOOPLANKTON POPULATION DYNAMICS

 A In general,  zooplankton populations are at
    a minimum in the  cold seasons, although
    some species flourish in cold water. Species
    with  similar food requirements seem to
    reproduce at different times of the year or
    are segregated in  different layers of lakes.

 B There is no single, simple measurement
    of activity for the  zooplankton as a whole
    that can be used as an index of production
    as can the uptake of radioactive carbon for
    the phytoplankton.  However, it  is possible
    to find the rate of  reproduction  of the species
    that carry their eggs.  The basis of the
    method is that the number of eggs in a
    sample taken at a  given time represents
    the number of animals that will be  added
    to the population during an interval that
    is equal to the length of time it  takes the
    eggs to develop.  Thus the potential growth
    rate of the populations can be determined.
    The actual growth rate, determined by
    successive samplings and counting, is less
    than the potential,  and the difference is a
    measure of the death rate.

 C Such measurements of birth and death rates
    permits a more penetrating analysis to be
    made of the causes of population change
    than if data were available for population
    size alone.

 D Following is an indication of the major
    environmental factors in the control of
    zooplankton.

    1  Temperature has an obvious effect in
       its general control of rates.  In addition,
       the production and hatching of resting
       eggs may be affected.
2  Inorganic materials

   Freshwater lakes vary in the content
   of dissolved solids according to the
   geological situation.   The total salinity
   and proportion of different dissolved
   materials in water can affect the pop-
   ulation.  Some species are limited to
   soft water, others to saline waters;  as
   the brine shrimp.  The maximum pop-
   ulation size developed may be related
   to salinity, but this is probably  an
   indirect effect working through the
   abundance of nutrients and production
   of food.

3  Food supply

   Very strong correlations have been
   found between reproduction and  food
   supply as measured by abundance of
   phytoplankton.  The rate of food supply
   can affect almost all aspects of  pop-
   ulation biology including rate of indi-
   vidual growth, time of maturity, rate
   of reproduction and length of life.

4  Apparently in freshwater, dissolved
   organic materials are of little' nutri-
   tional significance,  although some
   species can be kept if the concentration
   of dissolved material is high enough.
   Some species require definite vitamins
   in the food.

5  Effect of predation on populations

   The kind, quantity and relative pro-
   portions  of species strongly affected
   by grazing by vertebrate and. inverte-
   brate predators.  The death rate of
   Daphnia is correlated with the abun-
   dance of  a predator.   Planktivorous
   fish (alewives) selectively feed on
   larger  species, so. a lake with alewives
   is dominated by the smaller species of
   crustaceans and  large ones are  scarce
   or absent.

6  Other aspects of zooplankton

   Many species migrate vertically con-
   siderable distances each day.  Typically,
   migrating species spend the daylight
   hours deep in the lake and riae toward
   the surface in late afternoon and early
   evening.

   Some species go through a seasonal
   change of form (cyclomorphosis) which
   is not fully understood.  It may  have an
   effect in reducing predation.
    8-2

-------
                                                       Biology of Zooplankton Communities
REFERENCES
1  Baker, A. L.  An Inexpensive Micro-
      sampler.   Limnol.  and Oceanogr.
      15(5):  158-160.  1970.

2  Brooks, J.  L. and Dodson,  S. I.
      Predation, Body, Size, and Com-
      position of Plankton.  Science 150:
      28-35.  1965.

3  Dodson, Stanley I.  Complementary
      Feeding Niches Sustained by Size-
      Selective Predation, Limnology
      and Oceanography 15(1):  131-137.

4  Hutchinson, G.  E.  1967.  A Treatise
      on  Limnology.  Vol. II.  Introduction
      to Lake Biology and the Limnoplankton.
      xi + 1115.  John Wiley & Sons, Inc.,
      New York.

5  Jossi, JackW.  Annotated Bibliography
      of Zooplankton Sampling Devices.
      USFWS.  Spec. Sci.:  Rep. -Fisheries.
      609.  90 pp.  1970.

6  Likens,  Gene E. and Gilbert,  John J.  •
      Notes on Quantitative Sampling of
      Natural Populations of Planktonic
      Rotifers.   Limnol.  and Oceanogr.
      15(5):  816-820.
7  Lund, J. W- G.  1965.  The Ecology of
      the Freshwater Plankton.  Biological
      Reviews. 40:231-293.

8  UNESCO.  Zoolplankton Sampling.
      UNESCO Monogr. Oceanogr. Methodol.
      2.  174 pp.   1968.  (UNESCO.  Place
      de Fortenoy,  75, Paris 7e France).
This outline was prepared by W. T.  Edmondson,
Professor of Zoology,  University of
Washington,  Seattle, Washington.
                                                                                     8-3

-------
Biology of Zooplankton Communities
       FIGURE  1  SEASONAL CHANGES OF ZOOPLANKTON IN LAKE ERKEN,  SWEDEN
                  Keratella cochlearis
                  Keratella hiemali
                  Kellicottia longispina
                  •*  i        '  '"•*
                  Polyarthra vulgaris
                  Diaptomus gracij.oides
                  Daphnia longispina
                  Ceriodapnnia quadrangula
                  Bosmina coregoni
                 J   P
               Each panel shows the abundance of  a  species of animal.  Each
               mark on the vertical axis  represents 10  individuals/liter.
               Nauwerck, A. 1963.   Die Beziehungen  zwischen  Zooplankton und
               Phytoplankton im See Erken.   Symbolae Botanicae Upsaliensis, 17:1-163.

-------
     FIGURE  2   REPRODUCTIVE RATE OF ZOOPLANKTON AS A FUNCTION OF ABUNDANCE OF FOOD
CO
•a
ra
ao
00
01

-------
Biology of Zooplankton Communities
                                         PROTOZOA
                                         Difflugia
                                         Amoebae
                                         Codonella
                Stentor
Epistylis
                                          Ciliates

-------
                                      Biology of Zooplankton Communities
   Synchaeta
Cladocera
                         ROTIFERA
Polygarthra










ARTHROPODA





 Crustacea
                   Nauplius larva of copepod
Brachionus
                        Copepoda
                     Insecta - Chaoborus

-------
Biology of Zooplankton Communitie s
                           PLANKTON1C BIVALVE LARVAE
                         380(0,
                  spined  (fin attached)
 simple  (gill attached)
                     Glochidia  (Unionidae) Fish Parasites
                                    (1-3)
             veliger
pediveliger
                Veliger Larvae  (Corbiculidae) Free Living Planktonic
                                    (4-5)
                      Pediveliger attaches byssus lines)

-------
                                 MACRO INVERTEBRATES
I  INTRODUCTION

Groups included are in general those which
may be seen and recognized without the use
of a microscope.   For a more restricted
definition in reference to bottom sampling,
they are defined as those invertebrates re-
tained on a No. 30 sieve (approx. 0. 5 mm
aperture).

H  PHYLUM PORIFERA - Sponges

A Often encountered in the "pipe-moss"
   complex.  Being true animals, they will
   grow in the dark and hence require only
   a water possessing adequate food materials.

B Freshwater sponges usually appear as
   brownish or greenish masses,  (where
   containing zoochlorellae), irregular in
   shape, growing on twigs or solid surfaces.
   Erect or branching shapes sometimes
   found.  Surface non-shiny, texture  delicate.
   May form overgrowths on irrigation
   canal walls.
   Microscopic structure characterized by
   silica "spicules" and reproductive
   structures known as "gemmules".

   1 Spicules are in general long slender
     crystals.  In some,  the ends are simple
     or pointed,  in others expanded into
     various shapes.

   2 Spicules of various types are interwoven
     like the twigs of a bird nest to form the
     skeleton of the sponge. The nature of
     the soft living tissue cells indicate  a
     probable evolutionary origin of the
     sponge from flagellated and amoeboid
     protozoa.

   3 Gemmules are little bundles of tissue
     cells, protected by spicules, which can
     resist unfavorable conditions.  They are
     often  found scattered throughout the
     mass of a sponge.  These are analagous
     to turions in some aquatic plants and
     statoblasts in bryozoans.  ,
in  PHYLUM COELENTERATA - The Jellyfishes,
    Corals, and Hydras

 A This group is of relatively little importance
    in fresh water, although quite prominent
    in the ocean.

  B The freshwater hydra is a typical and
    simple coelenterate.  Its structure is
    essentially a long slender sac, two'layers
    thick,  with tentacles  extending out from
    around the open end or  mouth.

    1  Fully  extended individuals may measure
       a half inch or more.

    2  Generally an indicator of clean water.
       Rarely a nuisance.

  C Craspedacusta, a freshwater jellyfish
    occasionally appears in great numbers
    in lakes  and reservoirs in late summer.
    No particular nuisance  conditions are
    known to result,  although tastes and odors
    might  be expected if sufficient numbers
    were taken into a water treatment plant.
    No reasons are known for their sporadic
    appearances, no public health significance
    is known, and no control measures can be
    recommended.

  D. Cordylophora,  a colonial hydroid is
    a typical attached organism in large
    rivers, lakes, and reservoirs.
IV   PHYLUM PLATYHELMINTHES -
     Tapeworms, Flukes, and Planarias

  A  Tapeworms and flukes are serious human
     parasites in many parts of the world,  but
     generally under good control in North
     America.  Most of them have relatively
     complicated life histories involving one
     or more "intermediate" hosts and a "final"
     host.
BI;AQ. 16d.5.71
                                                                                        9-1

-------
 Macro Invertebrates
 B  The human tapeworm Diphyllobothrium
    latum is a form of modest significance,
    endemic to our northern states.

    1 It is the largest of the human tapeworms.

    2 It is obtained by eating underdone fish
      of the pike family.

 C  Human fluke parasites have certain species
    of snails as intermediate hosts.  Larval
    forms, cercariae  released  from
    snails penetrate human skin directly
    while the person is wading or bathing in
    infested waters.

    1 Although one or two species of snail in
      southern United States are thought to  be
      capable of transmitting the human blood
      fluke, none are known to do so at the
      present time.

    2 Flukes also parasitize other animals
      than man.  Occasionally the cercaria
      larvae of non-human parasites will be
      attracted to humans bathing in infested
      waters.  They are able to enter the skin
      but cannot complete penetration, and  so
      are trapped.  The result is a rash,  often
      quite painful, known as "swimmer's
      itch".  This now occurs widely across
      the northern states and in many coastal
      waters.  Control measures are directed
      at the elimination of species of snails.

 D  The Planarians (Class Turbellaria) are
    large enough to spot with the naked eye.
    They are useful field indicators of pollution,
    but shrivel up on preservation, and are
    seldom recognized in the laboratory.
V  PHYLUM BRYOZOA - Moss Animals

A These are small,  colonial,  sessile animals,
   common in both marine and fresh waters.
   Their main significance is as contributors
   to the pipe-moss complex, and as indicators
   of the degree of pollution.

B Freshwater forms are usually either
   creeping brown moss-like forms that
   grow over the undersides of rocks or
   in pipes,  or larger gelatinous masses
   growing on sticks and rocks in lakes and
   reservoirs.
    1  The closely adhering threads on rocks
       or pipes may range up to I/16th of an
       inch in width.  Microscopic examination
       reveals numerous raised openings from
       which when undisturbed, tiny fans of
       tentacles (the lophophore) are extended.
       Closely packed colonies may reach an
       inch in depth, and if adjacent colonies
       have come into contact,  an indefinite
       area may be covered.

    2  Another type produces clear jelly-like
       masses of transparent or faintly tinted
       material, with minute,  often colored,
       individuals (zooids) scattered over the
       surface.  The animals are extremely
       timid and only with great care and
       patience can they be observed with the
       tentacles expanded.   Colonies of some
       species are reported to  approach six
       feet in length, but smaller forms are
       more common.   Certain types of
       colonies can slowly change their position.

    3  Reproduction is by means of unique
       structure known  as a "statoblast".
       This is a discoid or eleptical structure,
       often with anchor-shaped hooks, which
       can resist winter conditions and even
       drying.  Statoblasts usually germinate
       in spring,  colonies reach full develop-
       ment by late summer.
VI  PHYLUM MOLLUSCA - Snails,  Clams,
    also Oysters,  Squids,  Octopi

 A Freshwater molluscs, are in general
    animals with a soft body,  encased in a
    calcareous shell which may be single
    (snails) or double (clams and mussels).
    Marine forms such as the squid, nautilus,
    octopus,  slugs,  and others, would require
    additional qualification.

 B In the snail group (Class Gastropoda) the
    shell may be coiled in various ways,  or a
    simple tent-shaped secretion on the
    animal's back.  These animals possess a
    distinct head,  with a pair of contractile
    tentacles, at the base of which are placed
    the eyes.  .

    1  The mouth is provided with a unique
       flexible rasp-like structure,  the radula.
       Chitinous jaws too are usually present.
    9-2

-------
                                                                  Macro -Invertebrates
 2  The two main groups in freshwater
   are the air breathers (Order Pulmonata)
   and the water breathers (Order
   Streptoneura).  Since all Streptoneura
   have a peculiar chitinous or calcareous
   "trap door" called an operculum (used
   for closing the shell) they are also called
   the "operculate" snails (vs  the
   "nonoperculate" Pulmonata).

3 Many snails are classed as  "nuisance
  organisms".

  a  Snails are quick to take advantage of
     organic enrichment.  As  pollution
     eliminates predators, pulmonate
     snails (such as Physa,  Lymnea) thrive.
     Trickling filters, polluted streams,
     and similar locations are often nearly
     choked with these organisms.

  b  Certain snails are also the inter-
     mediate host for certain fluke
     parasites as mentioned elsewhere,
     and hence may constitute an important
     link in the control of these parasites.

 The Bivalved Molluscs (Class Bivalvia)
 have the body protected by two symmetrical,
 opposing valves or shells,  which are united
 above by a flexible elastic tissue called
 the "ligament, " which is also  secreted by
 the mantle.

 1  They have no head. The foot is  an
   axe-shaped mass of muscular tissue
   which may be extended and used to
   drag the animal ahead.  The shell is
   secreted by two sheets of tissue called
   the mantle.

 2  They feed by straining particles out of
   the water by means of two  sets  of lace-
   like  gills (ctenidia). They  are thus
   animated filters and when present in
   significant numbers may contribute to
   the reduction of turbidity with resulting
   solids accumulation.

 3  Certain thick shelled forms such as the
   Unionidae formerly commercially
   harvested for use in making pearl
   buttons, are exported to Japan for
   production of nuclei for the cultured
   pearl industry.
     4  Certain small types (family Sphaeriidae)
       such as Sphaerium the fingernail clam,
       have been shown to tolerate considerable
       organic pollution.

     5  The Asian Clam,  Corbicula.  An exotic,
       intermediate insize between the above
       two families,  is a serious pipe clogging
       organism.  Unlike the endemic families
       it has planktonic larvae; hence,- it's
       nuisance potential.

VII  PHYLUM ANNELIDA - The segmented
     Worm:  Earthworms, Sludgeworms,  and
     Leeches  (Sometimes regarded as separate
     phyla)

  A  Class Oligochaeta, the earthworm-
     sludgeworm group.  Body clearly divided
     into segments.  Bristle like "setae"  or
     hairs present on most  segments, are used
     in locomotion; in some species may be
     withdrawn beneath body surface.

     1  Accurate identification requires simple
       clearing procedures with the specimen.
       Although these worms  are herma-
       phroditic (having both  sexes in the same
       individual), many  of the smaller forms
       commonly reproduce by a type of a
       sexual budding which produces chains
       of two or more individuals.

     2 Aquatic earthworms and sludgeworms,
       like their terrestrial counterparts, feed
       on the soil or mud in which they live,
       and contribute very significantly to its
       stabilization.  Having  hemoglobin in
       their blood, some of them can tolerate
       very low oxygen tensions.   Like the
       snails mentioned above, they thus thrive
       in polluted conditions in the absence of
       predators (ex: Tub if ex. Limnodrilus.)
       Smaller types (ex: Aelosoma,
       Chaetogaster) may abound in activated
       sludge.

   B Class Hirudinea -  leeches

     1 These organisms  are  essentially
       ectoparasites of vertebrates,  though
       they may also feed on  smaller annelids,
       snails, insect larvae,  and organic ooze.
       They are characterized by the possession
       of an anterior and posterior sucker
                                                                                    9-3

-------
   Macro Invertebrates
         disc, and the absence of setae.  Eyes
         if present, are located on the (smaller)
         anterior or oral sucker, although
         sensory cells are widely scattered over
         the general body surface.

         They are not known to be the vectors of
         any human disease, although when
         present in numbers, their blood sucking
         habits give them a considerable
         nuisance value.

         Their tolerance for sewage pollution is
         considerable and they are hence often
         present in great numbers in polluted
         streams.
VIII   PHYLUM ARTHROPODA  - The Jointed
      Animals

   A  Characterized in general  by paired jointed
      legs on a body nearly always segmented,
      and a chitinous exoskeleton.  Three of the
      major groups have freshwater represent-
      atives: The Crustacea, Arachnida, and
      Insecta.  The Insecta will be treated in a
      separate section.

   B  Class  Crustacea

      1  Characterized by two pair of antennae,
        respiration by means of blood gills
        (or  general body surface).  The vast
        majority of Crustacea are aquatic.
        Crabs and lobsters are well known
        marine examples, water fleas and
        copepods well known freshwater
        examples. No freshwater species
        approach the giant marine species for
        size where the king crab,  for example,
        may have a leg spread  of several feet.

      2  A few specialized terms used frequently
        in connection with the Crustacea are
        defined below.
        Head:
The anterior part of the
body containing the mouth.
Usually consists of two
or more fused segments,
each represented by a
pair of specialized mouth-
parts .
  Thorax:        The major section of the
                 body behind the head.
                 Contains most of the body
                 organs and usually the
                 walking (or swimming)
                 legs.

  Abdomen:      The most posterior section
                 of the  body.  Contains the
                 anus and often gills.  Is
                 seldom involved in loco-
                 motion except in  swimming
                 forms.

  Caphalothorax:  The fused head and thorax.

  Carapace:     A fold  of the body wall
                or shell which usually
                extends down over each
                side of the thorax.  May
                cover the whole side or
                only the bases of  the legs.

  Antenna:      Sensory appendages or
                "feelers".  Typically two
                in number in the
                Crustacea.

  Biramous:    Two branched.

3 Subclass Branchipoda - phyllopods

  These organisms have many pairs of
  flattened appendages serving for both
  locomotion and respiration.

  The first three orders as listed  below
  tend to inhabit temporary pools, and so
  are often good indicators of such water.
  Life histories may often be completed
  in 2-3 weeks.  Occurrence is quite
  sporadic.  Many of them are  tolerant
  of highly saline or alkaline waters.

  The Cladocera, the last order, is more
  of an  inhabitant of permanent bodies of
  water.  All are in general, plankton and
  detritus feeders,  often tolerant of high
  organic content as long as aerobic
  conditions are maintained.

  a  Order Anostraca -  fairy shrimps.
     Eleven to 17  pairs  of thoracic
     appendages,  elongate, cylindrical
     body without a  carapace, eyes stalked.
   9-4.

-------
                                                                 Macro Invertebrates
   Ex: Artemia (the brine shrimp).
   General size range 15-30 mm.
   extreme:  5-100 mm.  Swim grace-
   fully on their backs.

b  Order Nbtostraca - tadpole shrimps.
   Forty - 60 pairs of thoracic
   appendages,  body depressed and
   partly covered by a dorsal shield
   like carapace.  Eyes sessile.  Size
   up to 100 mm.

c  Order Conchostraca - clam shrimps.
   Ten - 28 thoracic appendages.  Body
   laterally compressed and completely
   enclosed in a bivalved carapace which
   is often relatively thin and marked by
   successive lines of growth.   Generally
   favored by warmer water.  Size: 4-
   16 mm.

d  Order Cladocera - water fleas.  Four -
   6 pairs of thoracic appendages.  Body
   laterally compressed, all except the
   the distinct head usually enclosed in
   a bivalved carapace.  Second antenna
   is branched,  and used for locomotion.
   Single compound eye. Size:  0.2-3.0 mm
   or more.   Common genera include
   Daphnia and Bosmina.

   1)  This is a large and widely dispersed
      group,  a common component of our
      plankton in nearly all types of water.

   2)  Generally parthenogenetic, until
      unfavorable conditions stimulate
      the production of males.  Sexual
      eggs result which can withstand
      freezing and drying.           '

   3)  Species in general are very widely
      distributed.

Subclass Ostracoda - seed shrimps.
Two or three pairs of thoracic appendages.
Body laterally compressed,  and entirely
enclosed in a bivalve carapace.  Fresh-
water and marine.  Size:  0.35-21 mm.
No growth lines on valves (cf.
Conchostraca).   Over 1700 species
known, about 1/3 freshwater.
"Microscopic clams with legs".
  a  Widely distributed, clean to polluted
     water.  Generally free living except
     for a few rare commensals.

  b  Pollution significance is not known.

5 Subclass Copepoda - copepods.
  Five - 6 pairs of thoracic appendages,
  the 1st 4 biramous.  Body cylindrical,
  divided into two sections (Cephalothorax
  or metasome, and abdomen or urosome).
  Some parasitic forms are greatly
  modified.  Locomotion by means of
  2nd antenna, which is unbranched
  (cf:  Cladocera).  Many virtually
  transparent. Up to 3 mm.

  a  Distribution world wide, freshwater
     and marine.  One of most abundant
     of animal plankton.

  b  Development includes a complex
     series  of growth stages.  Eggs
     carried over from year to year
     in mud.  Resist drying and freezing.

6 Subclass Branchiura - fish lice.
  With suction cups on head appendages,
  body strongly depressed, ectoparasitic
  on fish.  Sometimes considered to be an
  order of the copepoda.  Of primary
  importance as fish parasites.

7 Subclass Malacostraca  - (no collective
  common name).  Body usually consisting
  of 20 segments (approximately 5 in head,
  8 in thorax, 7 in abdomen) and 19 pairs
  of appendages exclusive of eyes.
  Approximately 30, 000 species known
  nearly 800 in N.  America.  Of the
  12 orders recognized, only 4 have
  freshwater  representatives.

  a  Order Mysidacea  - oppossum shrimps.
     Essentially a marine group, but
     three species  inhabit our fresh
     waters.  Superficially resemble
     marine shrimps of commerce.
     Carapace thin and does not com-
     pletely cover  thorax. Stalked
     compound eyes extremely large.
     Nektonic  in nature,  with thoracic
     appendages adapted for swimming.
                                                                               9-5

-------
Macro Invertebrates
         1)  Mysis relicta inhabits deep cold
            oligotropic lakes in northern
            states east of Great Plains.  Up
            to 30 mm. Circumboreal.

         2)  Acanthomysis awatchensis occurs
            in lakes,  rivers, and brackish
            estuaries of Pacific N.W.

         3)  Taphromysis louisianae
            Gulf coast region, also brackish
            water.  Up to 8 mm.
     b  .Order Isopoda - aquatic sow bugs or
        pill bugs.  Some fifty freshwater
        species represent approximately 5%
        of all known species, many of which
        are terrestrial as well as marine.
        Size:  5-20 mm.

        1) Ovoid, flattened dorsoventrally.
           Most of the thoracic and abdominal
           segments are unfused, giving the
           animals a many-jointed appearance.
           Lateral extensions of each segment
           and the absence of any large pro-
           truding structures combine to  give
           an overall impression of an army
           tank in life.

        2) Generally inhabit springs, brooks
           and subterranean waters.  In the
           north  central states they are often
           abundant in small polluted streams
           that go dry in summer,  of which
           they are frequently almost the only
           inhabitants.

     c  Order Amphipoda - scuds or
        sideswimmers.  Chiefly a marine
        group with about 50 American fresh-
        water species. Size: 5-20 mm.

        1) Body is laterally compressed, few
           fused  segments as in isopods.
           Eyes generally well developed
           except in subterranean species.

        2) Occur in a wide variety of
           relatively unpolluted waters where
           ample oxygen is present.  Generally
           nocturnal.  Soft waters generally
           favored,  but Gammarus limnaeus
           is common in hard waters and
           Hyalella azteca is sometimes
           found  in alkaline and brackish
           waters.
  3) Subterranean species are common
     in cavernous areas,  and hence
     frequently appear in well waters.

  4) Scuds serve as intermediate hosts
     for a variety of parasites of
     waterfowl, amphibians, and fishes,
     but not so far as  known for man.

d Order Decapoda - freshwater
  shrimps,  crayfish; also marine
  lobsters,  and crabs.

  Only about 160 species of this huge,
  essentially marine group,  are  found
  in the fresh waters of N. America,
  of which about 130 are crayfishes.
  True freshwater crabs occur in
  Mexico and in the West Indies and
  one species has been reported  in
  Florida.  Other marine crabs
  occasionally invade fresh waters
  for extended periods and some  have
  become essentially terrestrial.
  Decapods  are in general from the
  Rocky Mountain region.
   1) Decapod shrimps (prawns) can be
     distinguished by the laterally
     compressed rostrum. Commercial
     freshwater prawn culture techniques
     have been developed.  Size 3-23 cm.
  2) The crayfishes (crawdads, crabs)
     are the predominant group of
     freshwater decapods.  Their
     shell is heavier and the pincers
     usually strongly developed.
     There are many burrowing forms
     and many species have rather
     specialized habitat preferences.
     Unfortunately,  however, their
     pollution significance has not
     been worked out.  In general it
     can be said that they can tolerate
     a considerable amount of pollution.
     Size, (exclusive of antennae):
     15-130 mm.
   9-6

-------
                                                                     Macro Invertebrates
   Class Arachnida - spiders, scorpions,
   ticks, and mites. The water mites
   (Parasitegona) have become extensively
   adapted to fresh waters, and these are
   almost exclusively restricted to fresh-
   water, there being very few marine and
   no terrestrial forms.  They are readily
   recognized by their bright colors,
   globular to ovoid shape,  and clambering
   and swimming habits.  Other types of
   Acari or mites found in marine and fresh-
   water are  in the  Halacaridae and Oribatei.
   These crawling types are sometimes
   found in large numbers in activated sludge.
   Size 0.4 - 3.0 mm.

   1  Superficially resemble minute spiders,
      but have no division into cephalothorax
      and abdomen. All evident segmentation
      has been lost.  Four pairs of legs are
      present in the adult stage.

   2  Mites are carnivorous or parasitic,
      feeding on aquatic invertebrates.  Some
      are commensal on mussels, and host
      specific.
REFERENCES

1  Eddy, S. and Hodson,  A. C.  Taxonomic
      Keys to the  Common Animals of the
      North Central States.  Burgess
      Publishing Company,  Minneapolis.
      162pp.  3rd Edition.   1961.
2  Palmer, E.  Lawrence.  Fieldbook of
      Natural History.  Whittlesey House.
      McGraw-Hill Book Company,  Inc.
      New York.  1949.

3  Pennak, R.W.  Freshwater Invertebrates
      of the United States.  The Ronald Press
      Company. New York.  1953.

4  Pratt, H.W.  A Manual of the Common
      Invertebrate Animals Exclusive of
      Insects.  The Blakiston Company.
      Philadelphia.  1951.

5  Pimentel,  Richard A.  Invertebrate
      Identification Manual.  Reinhold.
      151 pp.  1967.

6  Stewart, R.  Keith, Ingram, W.M. and
      Mackenthun, K.M.  Water Pollution
      Control.  Waste Treatment and Water '
      Treatment: Selected Biological
      References on Fresh and Marine Waters.
      FWPCA.  WP-23.  pp.  126.   1966.

7  Ward, H.B.  and Whipple,  G. C.
      W. T. Edmondson,  ed.  Freshwater
      Biology.  John Wiley & Sons.  New York.
      1959.
This outline was prepared by H. W.  Jackson,
Chief Biologist,  National Training Center,
WPO, EPA, Cincinnati, OH 45268 and
revised by R.M. Sinclair, Aquatic Biologist,
National Training Center.
                                                                                     9-7

-------
                                                                 Macro Invertebrates
       3A
                                   Platworms

                             Phylum PLflTYHELMlNTHES
                               Planar!a.  a free living
                               flatworm,  class
                               Turbellarla
                  Man eats under-
                   ocoked flsn
Adult in
human liver
  Piece of fish
enoysted
oeroarla
                                    — egg oontain-
                                     ing ffliraoldiuffl
                                                          young  redia
                                                          in sporooyst'
      Life history of human liver fluke,
   Clonorohls sinensis. Class Treme boda
                                                        young oeroarlae  in  redla
                         Aspects in the life oyole  of the  human tapeworm
                  Dlphvllobothrium latum.  olass  Cestoda. A,  adult as  in  human  intes-
                  tine; B.prooerooid larva in oopepod; C,  plerooerooid larva in
                  flesh of pickerel (X-ray view).
                                                                  H.W.Jaokson
                                                                                  9-9

-------
                                                                      Macro Invertebrates
                                    MINOR PHYLA
     Phylum Coelenterata
       Hydra, with bud;
   extended, and contracted
                                         Medusa of
                                      Craapedacuflta
                                                             C ordylophora caspia colony
                Phylum Bryozoa
                           Massive colony on
                                stick
                                                         Creeping colony
                                                           on rock
                                 Single zooid, young statoblasts in tube
9-10

-------
                                                          Macro Invertebrates
     FRESH WATER ANNELID WORMS

                Phylum Annelida
anus
                  • mouth

Clase Oligochaeta,  earthworms

Ex; Tut) if ex   ,  the eludgeworm

        (After Liebman)
                                              mouth
                                                  posterior sucker   disc
                                       Class Hirudinea, leeches
                                           (After Hegner)
                                                               anterior end
   , H.W.Jackson
               Class Polychaeta ,  polychaet worms

               Ex: Manayunkia, a minute, rare,  tube
   •   •        .-   building worm-.
PLATE XII c  '    ',     ,        (Af ter .Leidy)
                                                                           9-11

-------
Macro Invertebrates
                               SOME MOLLUSCAN TYPES
        Claac: Cephalopoda*

        Squids, octopus,

        cuttlaflth.
                                                   marine.

                                    The giant squid «hown

                                    was captured in the

                                    Atlantic  in the oarI/

                                    ninteenth century.

                                    (After Hegner)
                      Lima*.

                    a slug
                     Lyanaea
Campeloma
              an air breathing mail  a water breathing
                                           •nail.
ClaiBs QaBtffopodai •nails and alugB.  (After Buchsbana)
                      Class: Pelecypodaj clams, mussels, oysters.

             Locomotion of a freshwater clam, showing how foot is  extended,  the  tip
             expanded, and the animal pulled along to it« own anchor.  (After Bucho-
             baum)                    PLATE XII d                 H.W.Jack8on
9-12

-------
                                                                 Macro Invertebrates
          3/4
                                  Class CRUSTACEA
Crayfish, or orawdad;
Cambarua. Order Oeoapoda
         10-20  em
         Water Plea;
          Daphnia
                                 Fairy  Shrimp;
                              Eubranohipus. Order
                                 Phyllopoda
                                  20-25 mm
         Bond; Hvalella
        Order Jbnphipoda
             10-15 mm
       Sow Bugj AaelluB.
        Order^sopoda
                  10-20 mm
   Order
Cladooera
                                                         Fish Louse, Argulus;
                                                         a parasitic Copepod
                                                                 H.W.Jaokson
                         Copepod; Cyclops. ttrder Copepoda
                                      2-5 mm

                            PLATE  X
                                                                                 9-13

-------
                                            FISHES
  I  INTRODUCTION:  What is a fish?


  A A fish is a gill-breathing aquatic vertebrate
    with fins (exceptions noted).

  B Other Aquatic Vertebrates

    1  Amphibia - frogs, toads, salamanders

       a   Modern amphibia do not have scales.

       b   Tadpole stages easily recognized.

       c   Pollutional significance not studied
           to date.  Frogs often observed in
           polluted waters but not aquatic
           salamanders.


    2  Reptilia - snakes and turtles

       a   Relatively independent of water
           quality as long as it is not irritating.

       b   Carnivorous types would be starved
           out of polluted areas for lack of food.


    3  Mammalia -  muskrats, beavers

       a  Generally inhabit wilderness areas
           where heavy pollution is not a
           problem.


 II  STRUCTURE AND PHYSIOLOGY

o
  A Fins

    1  A  typical fish has two sets of paired
       fins, the pectoral and pelvic,  compar-
       able (homologous) to our arms and legs
       respectively.  Certain ancient fish
       could walk on their lobe-like fins, and
       some specialized modern forms like-
       wise.
     Unpaired dorsal, anal, and caudal or
     tail fins,  complete the fin structures.

     Any or all of these may be missing,
     and fleshy extra fins such as  the
     "adipose" fins of trout and salmon,
     catfishes, etc., may appear.  Extra
     paired fins too are known.  The dorsal
     fin is often divided into two or more
     sections known as 1st, 2nd,  3rd,  etc.,
     dorsal fins.

     Fins may be supported by soft-rays or
     stiff spines or both.
B  The body of a typical fish is covered with
   scales.

   1  Four types of scales are recognized.

      a  The most primitive are bony plates
        bearing tooth-like projections  as
        found in sharks and rays.

      b  Smooth bony plates such as those
        of the  gar and dogfish are some -
        what higher in specialization.

      c  Thin smooth roundish "cycloid"
        scales are characteristic of the
        more primitive of the modern
        "bony" fishes like herring or trout.

      d  Roundish scales with tiny spines
        or cteni are  characteristic of the
        highest fishes like the black basses.
        These are called ctenoid scales.
      Cycloid and ctenoid scales are non-
      living material like hair or fingernails,
      covered with a thin layer of living
      tissue cells.  This tissue  is easily
      injured as by handling a fish with dry
      hands.
   BI.AQ.18c. 10.68
                                     10-1

-------
 Fishes
  C Respiration of a typical fish is by means
    of blood gills (Cf: tracheal gills of insects).

    1  Gills, like lungs, are a device for
       bringing the blood into close proximity
       to the environment.

    2  Certain ancient fishes and their modern
       descendents, the lungfishes, breathed
       air.  Some of the modern bonyfishes
       like certain catfishes also have a
       limited  air breathing capacity.
 D The maintenance of a constant internal
    osmotic pressure of their body fluids in
    competition with their environment is a
    problem which fishes have that terrestrial
    animals with their waterproof skins do not
    have.

    1  The slime covering body and gills is
       an important  part of  the regulatory
       mechanism.

    2  Marine fishes live in an environment
       that tends to dehydrate the body.  Con-
       sequently water appears to be swallowed
       from time to  time in order to replace
       that lost  through the  gills and general
       body surface.  This may make marine
       fishes more susceptible to some toxic
       substances which would then be taken
       internally instead of  simply contacting
       the skin externally.

    3  Freshwater fishes live in an environ-
       ment with an  osmotic pressure far
       lower than that of body fluids. Toxic
       substances would then be less likely
       to be taken internally except with food.
Ill  REPRODUCTION AND DEVELOPMENT
    Although almost infinite variety exists,
    most fishes lay their eggs externally in
    the water,  at which time the male showers
    them with milt.  Such species are said to
    be oviparous.  In some species such as
    the familiar guppy however, fertilization
    is .internal and the eggs develop and hatch
    in the mother's body.  No nourishment
is known to be transmitted from mother
to developing young.  Such species are
said to be ovoviviparious.  The young
are thus "born alive. "

1  Most fish eggs hatch before all the
   food material stored in the egg as
   yolk is used up.   Embryonic develop-
   ment is still going on and they are
   truly in a larval or pre-adult condition.
   During their first hours or days of
   free life, they are thus still indepen-
   dent of their environment for food.
   This early stage is known as yolk sac
   fry or simply sac fry.

2  The young continue to be called fry,
   or advanced fry until they approach an
   inch in length, when they are referred
   to as fingerlings.

3  Fry which differ greatly from the form
   of the adult may be referred to as larvae.
Some fish lay their eggs in the same
general location in which they live as
adults.  Others travel to some distant
place, such as from lakes or rivers up
into small streams, from deep water to
shoal, from the ocean to fresh water,
from  fresh water to the ocean, etc.  These
are called breeding migrations.

1  Fish that normally live in freshwater
   and travel to the ocean to reproduce
   are called catadromous.  The fresh-
   water eel is the best known example.

2  Those that live in the sea and lay their
   eggs in freshwater are called anadro-
   mous.  Striped bass,  shad and certain
   other herrings, and the salmons are
   well known examples.  Occasionally,
   a group of anadromous fish will get
   lost in the inland waters and not be
   able to find its  way back to the sea.
   These are called landlocked varieties
   and are usually somewhat smaller than
   their non-Ian-locked relatives.

3  Pollution or other factors which either
   block a breeding migration or destroy
   a spawning bed may completely destroy
   10-2

-------
                                                                                   Fishes
      a species,  even though the adults in
      their natural habitat are untouched.
IV  CLASSIFICATION OF FISHES

 Fishes may be classified or grouped in many
 different ways.
    Food,  Feeding Habits and Ecological
    Interrelationships

    Fish,  like many other animal groups, in-
    clude carnivores, herbivores, and
    detritus feeders or scavengers.

    1  Scavengers may specialize on bottom
      feeding like certain suckers, carps,
      and catfishes.  Others may take any
      organic matter they can find,  where-
      ever they can find it.   Scavengers are
      often provided with barbels or feeders
      which help in locating food, especially
      in turbid water.

    2  Herbivores may feed  on the larger,
      vascular plants as some carps or
      they may  specialize on the microscopic
      phytoplankton, in which case they are
      called plankton feeders.  Plankton
      feeders usually have  weak mouths and
      fine gill rakers for straining the  plank-
      ton out of the water.

    3  The carnivorous or predatory species
      feed essentially on living animals.
      They may specialize  on invertebrates
      or other fish,  in which case they may
      be called  piscivorous.

      a  Piscivorous fish usually depend
         essentially on eyesight for locating
         their food,  and hence turbid water
         is a handicap.

      b  The carnivorous fish in general
         include most of the game fish.

      c  Small species  of fish which are not
         used directly by man but are used
         extensively as food by piscivorous
         species are often referred to as
         forage  fish.
B  Classification with reference to their
   desirability or to mode of use by man
   has been widely used.  An example of
   such a system is as follows:

   1  Commercial - those that occur  in
      sufficient quantities to support a
      fishery.
        Food fishes:
        cod
                                                                       white-fish, salmon,
        Product fishes:
        herrings
sharks, blue back
      Game or sport - those captured
      essentially for sport.   Many species
      fall into both this and  the commercial
      categories  such as the trouts,  black-
      basses, striped bass, etc.

      a  Gamefish are sometimes considered
         to be those which are of interest to
         man only for the catching,  as the
         tarpon.

      b  Fish which are taken,  even though
         in sport, but which are also eaten
         are then called panfish.  Sometimes
         panfish refers only to the smaller
         of the edible gamefish.
      Rough fishes are those such as the
      gars,  and the bowfins, which are of
      little or no use to man.  Some, such
      as the carp, are classed in different
      groups in different regions according
      to local custom.
   A classification developed with reference
   to standard methods of reporting fish
   population data for reservoirs is as
   follows: (Surber '59):

   Group 1. Predatory Game Fish - bass,
           crappies, trout, etc.

   Group 2. Non-predatory Game Fish -
           sunfish,  rock bass,  perch, etc.
                                                                                      10-3

-------
Fishes
   Group 3. Non-predatory Food Fish - carp,
           drum,  buffalo, suckers,  bullheads,
           etc.

   Group 4. Predatory Food Fish - catfish,
           gar, bowfin,  etc.

   Group 5. Forage Fish (Non-predatory) -
           gizzard shad,  threadfin shad,
           Gambusia,  minnows, etc.
D  The scientific classification system for
   fishes lists many thousands of species.
   Three great groups of living fishes occur
   in this country:  the Agnatha or jawless
   fishes, the Chbndrichthyes or cartilaginous
   fishes and the Osteichthyes or (modern)
   boney fishes.  Some additional groups
   occur in other parts of the world.

   1  The jawless fishes are represented in
     fresh water by the lampreys,  which
     have in recent years invaded the Great
     Lakes from the  sea and wrecked havoc
     on the native  species.

   2  The cartilaginous fishes are the sharks,
     skates, and rays, primarily a marine
     group.

   3  The vast majority of fishes with which
     most of us are familiar belong to the
     Osteichthyes  or  bony fishes,  a few
     typical families  are listed below:

     a  The family Acipenseridae or
        sturgeons  are a primitive group,
        famed for  their roe which is sold
        as caviar.  More or less covered
        with large, bony plates.  Formerly
        extremely abundant and large in size.

     b  Family Lepisosteidae - the gars.
        These Voracious fish are covered
        with hard,  enamel-like, rhomboid
        scales.  Some species may grow
        to great  size.  Widely regarded as
        "trash" fish.

     c  The family Salmonidae includes the
        trouts, salmons, whitings,  and
        graylings.   Scales are cycloid and
        always small, an extra or adipose
   fin on the back,  eggs are very large,
   favored by cold  water.  In the Pacific
   Salmon,  but one set of reproductive
   cells is formed in the life of the
   individual, which therefore dies
   after spawning once.

 d The family Catostomidae is the
   suckers.  The head is naked of
   scales,  jaws toothless,  mouth
   usually protractile, lips generally
   thick and fleshy.  Feed  on plants
   and small animals.

 e The family Cyprinidae is the carp-
   dace-minnow group.  Here too the
   head is naked, and the body usually
   scaled.   Ventral fins usually well
   back. Teeth are lacking in the jaws.
   Certain bones in the back of the
   throat known as  the pharyngeals are
   strongly  developed however,  and
   bear from 1 to 3 series  of teeth
   which are often of importance in
   identification. Upwards of 1800
   species,  abundant where present
   at all, both in numbers  and variety.
   Generally small  in size  although
   Leucosomus corporalis  the chub,
   roach, or fallfish may reach a
   length of 18 inches in the east, and
   related species 5 to 6 feet on the
   west coast.  Because of the many
   similar  species, this is one of the
   most difficult groups in  zoology
   to identify to  species.

   Two genera,  Cyprinus which includes
   the common carp,  and Carassius
   including the  goldfish have been
   introduced and become widely
   established.   Both are native to
   China. Other introduced Cyprinids
   have so far not become  widely
   established.

f  Family Ictaluridae, the  freshwater
   catfishes. Body more or less
   elongate, naked.   Eight  barbels or
   feelers in head region.  Dorsal fin
   short, an adipose fin behind.  First
   ray of dorsal and pectorals developed
   as stout  spines.  Many excellent food
   fish.  Very tenacious of life.
     10-4

-------
                                                                                 Fishes
         Family Centrarchidae - sunfishes
         and freshwater basses. Scales  •
         ctenoid.  Dorsal fin continuous
         but may be in two sections,  the
         anterior spined, the posterior rayed.
         Generally carnivorous. Typical of
         eastern North America but have
         been widely introduced in  other
         areas.  Nest builders.
      Additional well known families of bony
      fishes are listed below:
      Polyodontidae
      Amiidae
      Gasterosteidae
      Cyprinodontidae
      Serranidae
      Ictaluridae

      Percidae
      Cottidae
      Atherinidae
      Clupeidae
      Osmeridae
      Salmonidae

      Anguiledae
      Poeciliidae

      Gadidae
      Esocidae
      Sciaenidae
-  paddlefishes
-  bowfins
-  stickelbacks
-  killifishes
-  sea basses
-  freshwater
   catfishes
-  perches  and darters
-  sculpins
-  silversides
-  herrings
-  smelts
-  whitefishes, trouts,
   etc.
-  eel
-  guppies, mosquito -
   fishes
-  cods,  hakes,burbots
-  pikes and pickerels
-  drums
3  Eddy, Samuel.  How to Know the Fresh-
      water Fishes.  Wm. C. Brown Co.
      Dubuque, Iowa.   1957.

4  Hubbs, C.L.,  and Lagler, K.F.   Fishes
      of the Great Lakes Region, Bull.
      Cranbrook Inst.  Sci.  Bloomfield Hills,
      Michigan.   1949.

5  Lagler,  K.F.  Freshwater Fishery
      Biology.  Wm. C. Brown Co.   Dubuque,
      Iowa.  1952.

6  Surber,  E.S.  Suggested Standard Methods
      of Reporting Fish Population Data for
      Reservoirs. Proc.  13th Ann. Conf.
      S. E.  Assoc.  Game  & Fish Comm.
      pp. 313-325.  Baltimore, Md.
      October 25-27, 1959.

7  Trautman,  M. B.  The Fishes of Ohio.
      Ohio  State Univ.  Press.   (An out-
      standing example of a state study.)
      Columbus, Ohio.  1957.
REFERENCES

1  American Fisheries Society.  A List of
      Common and Scientific Names of Fishes
    .  From the United States and Canada.
      Special Publication No. 2.  Am. Fish
      Soc.  Dr. E.A.  Seaman, Sec.-Treas.
      Box 483,  McLean, Va.  (Price $1.00
      paper, $2.00 cloth.)  1960.

2  Bailey,  Reeve M.  A Revised List of the
      Fishes of Iowa with Keys for Identifica-
      tion. IN:  Iowa Fish and Fishing.  State
      of Iowa.   Super, of Printing.  (Excel-
      lent color pictures.) 1956.
                          This outline was prepared by H.W. Jackson,
                          Chief Biologist, National Training Center,
                          Water Programs Operations.  EPA,  Cincinnati,
                           OH 45268.
                                                                                   10-5

-------
                                                                             Fishes
                      SOME PRIMITIVE FISHES
Class Agnatha, jawless fishes (lampreys and hagfishes) - Family
PETROMYZONTIDAE,  the lampreys.  Lampetra aepyptera, the
Brook Lamprey     A: adult,   B:  larva (enlarged)
Class Chondrichthyes - cartilagenous fishes (sharks, skates, rays)
Family DASYATIDAE - stingrays.  Dasyatis centroura, the Roughtail Stingray
                           HBa/-Tv>~> •
             s^^^^^y^

           "*~"'*~:j^f">
                         1^
 Class Osteichthyes - bony fishes - Family ACIPENSER1DAE,  sturgeon.
 Acipenser fulvescens, the Lake Sturgeon
  Class Osteichthyes - bony fishes - Family POLYODONTIDAE, the
  paddlefishes.  Polyodon spathula, the Paddlefish.  A:side view B:top view
   Class Osteichthyes - bony fishes - Family LEPISOSTEIDAE - gars
    Lepisosteus osseus, the Longnose Gar
   Class Osteichthyes - bony fishes - Family AMIIDAE,  bowfins
   Aniia calva, the Bowfin
  Reproduced with permission; Trautman,  1957.
                                            BI.AQ.pl. 91. 6. 60

-------
                                             Family SALMONIDAE
CO

               : Salmo trutta - brown trout
      Salmo gairdneri - rainbow (or steelhead) trout
                                                                     Salvelinus namaychush - the lake trout
                                                        Coregonus clupeaformis - lake whitefish
Salvelinus fontinalis - brook trout                   Oncorhynchus tshawytscha - the chinook salmon
                         Reproduced with permission;  Trautman, 1947 (except Chinook salmon
                         after Jordan '05).
                                                            BI.AQ. pi. 9f. 6.60

-------
                                                                            Fishes
                 Family CATOSTOMIDAE - the suckers
              Ictiobus cyprinellus - bigmouth buffalofish
           Cat os torn us catostomus - eastern longnose sucker
          Hypentelium nigricans - hog sucker
         Moxostoma aureolum - northern short he ad redhorse
Reproduced with permission; Trautman,  1957.
                                                   BI.AQ.pl.9g.6.60

-------
  jKishes
          Family CYPRINIDAE - the minnows, carps, and goldfishes
                    Pimephales promelas - fathead minnow
                   Notemigonus crysoleucas - golden shiner
              Chrosomus erythrogaster - southern redbelly dace
                   Semotilus atromaculatus - creek chub
Reproduced with permission; Hart,  Doudoroff, and Greenbank, 1945.
                                                     BI.AQ. pi. 9h. 6.60

-------
                                                                     Fishes
         Family ICTALURIDAE - the freshwater catfishes
                  Ictalurus nebulosus - brown bullhead
                  Noturus insignis - margined madtom
Reproduced with permission; Hart, Doudoroff, and Greenbank, 1945.
                                              BI.AQ.pl.9i. 6.60

-------
Fishes
                                Family CENTRARCHIDAE - the sunfishes
                                     Lepomis macrochirus - bluegill
                                Micropterus salmoides - largemouth bass
                                Pomoxis nigromaculatus - black crappie






                 Reproduced with permission; Hart,  Doudoroff, and.Greenbank. 1945.




                                                              BI.AQ.pl. 9k. 6.60

-------
                                                                      Fishes
                           TYPES OF BONY FISHES I
         JLLLLA
   Family GASTEROSTEIDAE, the
   Sticklebacks.  Eucalia inconstans,
   the brook stickleback
   Family CYPRINODONTIDAE, the
   Killifishes. Fundulus notatus, the
   blackstripe topminnow
Family SERRANIDAE, the sea basses.
Roccus americanus, the white perch
 Family CATOSTOMIDAE, the
 suckers. Catostomus commersonii,
 the white sucker
    Family PERCIDAE - the perches.
    Perca havescens, the yellow perch
     Family PERCIDAE, the perches.
     Etheostoma nigrum, the johnny
     darter


                                           Family COTTIDAE,  the sculpins.
                                           Cottus bairdii, the mottled sculpin
Family ATHERINIDAE, the silversides.
Labidesthes sicculus, the brook silverside.
    Reproduced with permission; Hart, Doudoroff and Greenbank, 1945.
                                                     BI.AQ.pl. 9m. 6. 60

-------
                                                    TYPES OF BONY FISHES
en
0>
10
                                                                   male
                                                                             vm%?.
                       y^silpiiyifp

                                                                  ^^g
                                                                    X. ^~3jt-
                                                                                          w
                                                                                          &===s=L
                            Family CLUPEIDAE - herrings
                    Dorosoma cepedianum - the eastern gizzard shad

                                                                 female
                                                                       Family POECILIIDAE - livebea^ers
                                                                        Gambusia affinis - the mosquitofish
                        Family ANGUILLEDAE - freshwater eels
                          Anguilla rostrata - the American eel

                                                                 Family GADDIDAE - codfishes, hakes,  haddock, burbot
                                                                          Lota lota - the eastern burbot
                               Family ESOCIDAE -. pikes
                            Esox lucius - the northern pike

                    Reproduced with permission; Trautman,  1957.

                              BI.AQ.pl. 9m. 6.60

.35.  '•/,-^V:!-^Jr:-':^>::i'':^.:"-;'-inf\<^
                                                                          Family SCIAENIDAE - drums
                                                                    Aplodinotus grunniens - the freshwater drum

-------
                                                              Fishes
                      ADIPOSE FINS - in catfishes
      /_	Barbels
           The Adipose Fin does not extend to the Caudal Fin
                         (Ictalurus nebulosus)
               The .Adipose Fin extends to the Caudal Fin
                           (Noturus insignis)
Reproduced with permission; Hart, Doudoroff and Greenbank, 1945.
                                       BI.AQ.pl.9e.6.60

-------
                            STANDARD LEhlGTH
  «—LENGTH or HEAD

  SKlOUT
                                                     DORSAL FIN
                                       ORIGIN OFDOR5AL

                                                   LATERALL1NE
                               PECTORAL FIM
    n AXILLARY
          ILLARY
  LOWER JAW
  OPERCLE
 SUBOPEffCLE.
INTEROPERCLE
PREOPERCLE
ANAL F!M
           CAUDAL
               A SOFT-RAYED nsH. $erlQT/LUS ATXQrlACULATUS
Hart, Doudoroff, and
Greenbank, 1945
        BI.AQ.pl.9a.6.60

-------
              GlLL MEMBRANES
GIL.L. ric
                 tsrHrtus.
SEPARATE.
                                                              PHARYNGEALTEETH
                                                       LOWER PHARYNGEAL BONE.
                                                              OF" PHARYNGtAL T££.7~H tM THE
            ISTHMUS -
              SILL
               MEMBRANES
                                                                       PHARYNCCALTEETH

                                                                      LowfR
    GlLL
 Hart, Doudoroff, and
 Greenbank, 1945
This outline was prepared by H.W.Jackson.
            5ERARATE AND
             ISTHMUS-
                           TO
COMB-LIKE: TZ-ETHI^THC.

     CATOSTOMIOAE.       si.AQ.pi.9c. 6. GO

-------
                                FIN AND SCALE STRUCTURES
           SCALE.
                          ANTERIOR

                            PART
                          POSTERIOR-

                           PAI?T
                         ANTERIOR

                          PART
                         POSTERIOR'


                          PAf?T
                                        SPlHOUS DORSAL
                                                                                                        tn

                                                                                                        (T)
                                                                                                        co
                                      f?AYED DORSAL
                                                                                     Sorr PAY
   CYCLOID SCALE:
A OOR5AL FIH COMPOSED OF SPINOU5 AHO SOFT&AYS
Reproduced with permission; Hart, Doudoroff, and Greenbank, 1945.
                                   BI.AQ. pi. 9d.6.60

-------
                     FUNGI AND THE "SEWAGE FUNGUS" COMMUNITY
 I    INTRODUCTION

A    Description

     Fungi are heterotrophic achylorophyllous
     plant-like organisms which possess true
     nuclei  with nuclear membranes and nu-
     cleoli.  Dependent upon the species and
     in some  instances the environmental
     conditions, the body of the fungus, the
     thallus, varies from a  microscopic
     single  cell to an extensive plasmodium
     or mycelium.  Numerous forms produce
     macroscopic fruiting bodies.

 B   Life Cycle

     The life cycles of fungi vary from simple
     to complex and may include sexual and
     asexual stages  with  varying spore types
     as the  reproductive units.

 C   Classification

     Traditionally,  true fungi are classified
     within the Division Eumycotina of the
     Phylum Mycota of the plant kingdom.
     Some authorities consider the  fungi an
     essentially monophyletic group distinct
     from the  classical plant and animal
     kingdoms.
Ill  ECOLOGY


 A  Distribution


    Fungi are ubiquitous in nature and mem-
    bers of all classes may occur in large
    numbers in aquatic habitats.  Sparrow
    (1968)  has briefly reviewed the ecology
    of fungi in freshwaters with particular
    emphasis on the zoosporic phycomycetes.
    The occurrence and ecology of fungi in
    marine and estuarine waters has  been
    examined recently by a number of in-
    vestigators (Johnson and Sparrow,- 1961;
    Johnson, 1968; Myers, 1968; van Uden
    and Fell, 1968).
B   Relation to Pollution


    Wm.  Bridge Cooke,  in a series of in-
    vestigations (Cooke,  1965),  has estab-
    lished that fungi other than phycomycetes
    occur in high numbers in sewage  and
    polluted waters.   His reports on organic
    pollution of streams (Cooke,  1961; 1967)
    show that the variety of the Deuteromy-
    cete flora is decreased at the immediate
    sites of pollution,  but dramatically in-
    creased downstream from these regions.
II    ACTIVITY

 In general, fungi possess broad enzymatic
 capacities.  Various species are able to
 actively  degrade  such  compounds as
 complex polysaccharides (e.g., cellulose,
 chitin,  and glycogen), proteins (casein,
 albumin,  keratin), hydrocarbons (kerosene)
 and pesticides. . Most species  possess an
 oxidative or microaerophilic metabolism,
 but anaerobic catabolism is not uncommon.
 A few species  show  anaerobic metabolism
 and growth.
    Yeasts,  in particular,  have been  found
    in large numbers in organically enriched
    waters (Cooke. et al.,  1960;  Cooke and
    Matsuura,  1963;  Cooke. 1965b; Ahearn.
     et al..   1968).  Certain yeasts are of
    special interest due to their potential
    use as "indicator"  organisms and  their
    ability to degrade  or  utilize proteins,
    various hydrocarbons,  straight and
    branch chained alkyl-benzene sulfonates,
    fats, metaphosphates,. and wood sugars.
 BI.FU.6a.5.71
                                                                                    11-1

-------
 Fungi
C   "Sewage Fungus" Community  (Plate I)

    A few microorganisms have long been
    termed "sewage fungi. "   The most
    common microorganisms included in
    this  group are the iron bacterium
    Sphaerotilus natans and the phycomy-
    cete Leptomitus lacteus.

    1  Sphaerotilus natans is  not a fungus;
       rather  it is a sheath bacterium of
       the  order   chlamydobacteriales.
       This polymorphic bacterium occurs
       commonly in organically enriched
       streams where it may produce
       extensive slimes.

       a Morphology

         Characteristically,  S. natans
         forms chains of rod  shaped
         cells (1. 1 - 2. On  x 2.5-  l?n)
         within a clear sheath or  tri-
         chome composed ofaprotein-
         polysaccharidae-lipid complex.
         The  rod cells are frequently
         motile upon release  from the
        . sheath; the flagella are lopho-
         trichous.  Occasionally two
         rows of cells may be present
         in a  single sheath. Single tri-
         chomes may be several  mm
         in length and bent at various
         angles.   Empty sheaths,  ap-
         pearing like thin  cellophane
       - straws,  may be present.


      b  Attached growths

         The  trichomes are cemented
         at 'one end to solid substrata
         such as stone or  metal,  and
         their cross attachment  and
         bending  gives a  superficial
         similarity to true fungal hyphae.
         The  ability to attach firmly to
         solid substrates gives S. natans
         a  selective advantage in the
         population of flowing streams.
         For more thorough reviews of
         S.natans  see Prigsheim( 1949)
         and Stokes (1954).
Leptomitus  lacteus also produces
extensive slimes and fouling floes
in fresh waters.  This species forms
thalli typified by regular constrictions.

a  Morphology

   Cellulin plugs may be present
   near the constrictions and there
   may be numerous granules in
   the  cytoplasm. The basal cell
   of the thallus may possess
   rhizoids.

b  Reproduction

   The segments delimited by the
   partial constrictions are  con-
   verted basipetally to sporangia.
   The zoospores are diplanetic
   (i. e.,  dimorphic)  and each
   possesses one whiplash and one
   tinsel flagellum.  No sexual
   stage  has been demonstrated
   for this species.

c  Distribution

   For further information on the
   distribution and  systematics
   of_E. lacteus  see Sparrow (1960),
   Yerkes (1966) and Emerson and
   Weston (1967). Both S. natans
   and Ij. lacteus appear to thrive
   in organically enriched  cold
   waters (5°-22°C) andbothseem
   incapable of extensive growth at
   temperatures of about 30°C.

d  Gross morphology

   Their metabolism is oxidative
   and growth of both species may
   appear as reddish brown floes
   or stringy slimes of 30 cm or
   more  in length.  •

e  Nutritive requirements

   Sphaerotilus natans  is able to
   utilize a wide variety of organic
   compounds, whereas L. lacteus
   does not assimilate simple
  11-2

-------
                                                                        Fungi
                                 PLATE  I

            "SEWAGE FUNGUS" COMMUNITY OR "SLIME GROWTHS"
                 (Attached "filamentous" and slime growths)
  Zoogloea
Sphaerotilus natans
                             Beggiatoa alba
              BACTERIA
Fusarium aqueductum
                                                   Leptomitus lacteus
                             Geotrichum .candidum
                                                         FUNGI
          Epistylis  8
                                                     /£>&
                        10
                 Opercularia

                   PROTOZOA
                                                                            11-3

-------
Fungi
                                                            PLATE  II

                                                 REPRESENTATIVE  FUNGI
      Figure        •*•
      Fusarium aquaeductuum ..
      (Radlmacher and
      Rabenhorst) Saccardo
        Microconidia (A) produced
      from phialides as in Cephalo-
      sporium,  remaining  in  slime
      balls. Macroconidia (B), with
      one  to  several cross  walls,
      produced bom collared phial-
      ides. Drawn from culture.


            Figure  3
            Geotrichum candidum
            Link ex Persoon
               Mycelium with short  cells
             and arthrospores. Young hy-
             pha (A) ; and mature arthro-
             spores (B). Drawn from cul-
             ture.
  Figure

  Achlya americana Humphrey
    Ooogonium with three  oo-
  spores  (A);  young zoospor-
  angium  with delimited  zoo-
  spores (B); and zoosporangia
  (C)  with released zoospores
  that remain encysted in clus-
  ters at the mouth of the dis-
  charge tube.  Drawn from cul-
  ture.
Figure     2.
Leptomitiu lactcus (Roth)
Agardh

  Cells of the hyphae show-
ing constrictions with cellulin
plugs. In  one cell large  zoo-
spores have  been delimited.
Redrawn  from  Coker, 1923.

          Figure   '  *T~
          Zoophagus insidians
          Sommerstorff

            Mycelium with hyphal pegs
           (A)   on  which  rotifers will
          become impaled;  gemmae (B)
          produced as conidia on short
          hyphal branches; and rotifer
          impaled on hyphal peg (C)
          from  which   hyphae  have
          grown into the rotifer whose
          shell  will be  discarded after
          the  contents  are  consumed.
          Drawn from culture.
                           Vlnnnnnt
                                                                                         l>*
                                                                                 FIGURE  /    Ilaplosporidivm costale.   A—mature spore;
                                                                                   B—early  plnsmodiuih..
  Figures  1 through 5  from  Cooke;  Figures  6  and  7 from Galtsoff.
  11-4

-------
                                                                                    Fungi
      sugars and grows most luxuriantly in
      the presence of organic nitrogenous
      wastes.

   3  Ecological roles

      Although the "sewage fungi" on
      occasion attain visually noticeable
      concentrations, the less obvious
      populations of deuteromycetes may
      be more important in the ecology of
      the aquatic habitat.  Investigations of
      the past decade indicate that numerous
      fungi are  of primary importance in the
      mineralization of organic wastes; the
      overall significance and exact roles of
      fungi in this process are yet to be
      established.

D  Predacious Fungi

   1  Zoophagus insidians

      (Plate II,  Figure 4) has been observed
      to impair functioning of laboratory
      activated sludge units (see Cooke and
      Ludzack).

   2  Arthrobotrys is usually found along
      with Zoophagus in laboratory activated
      sludge units.  This fungus is predacious
      upon nematodes.  Loops rather  than
      "pegs" are used in snaring nematodes.
IV  CLASSIFICATION

 In recent classification schemes,  classes
 of fungi are distinguished primarily on the
 basis of the morphology of the sexual and
 zoosporic stages.  In practical schematics,
 however, numerous fungi do not demonstrate
 these stages.  Classification must therefore
 be based on the  sum total of the morphological
 and/or physiological characteristics.  The
 extensive review by Cooke (1963)  on methods
 of isolation and  classification of fungi from
 sewage and polluted waters precludes the
 need herein of extensive' keys and species
 illustrations.  A brief synopsis key of the
 fungi adapted  in part from Alexopholous
 (1962) is presented on the following pages.
  This outline was prepared by Dr. Donald G.
  Ahearn,  Professor of Biology, Georgia State
  College, Atlanta, Georgia  30303.
           PLATE II (Figure 4)
                                                                                      11-5

-------
   Fungi
         KEY TO THE MAJOR TAXA OF FUNGI

         1        Definite cell walls lacking, somatic phase a free living Plasmodium	
                 	Sub-phylum Myxomycotina  . . (true slime molds). .Class Myxomycetes
         1'       Cell walls usually well defined,  somatic phase not  a  free-living Plasmodium	
                 	(true  fungi)	Sub-phylum Eumycotina	2

         2        Hyphal filaments  usually coenoctytic, rarely septate, sex cells when present  forming
                 oospores or zygospores, aquatic species propagating asexually by zoospores,  terrestrial
                 species by zoospores,  sporangiospores conidia or  conidia-like sporangia .'.'Phycomycetes". ..  3

                     The phycomycetes are generally considered to include the most primitive of the true
                 fungi.   As a whole,  they encompass a wide diversity of forms with  some showing rela.tion-
                 ships to the flagellates, while others closely resemble colorless algae, and still others
               •  are true molds.   The vegetative body (thallus)  may be non-specialized and entirely con-
                 verted into  a reproductive organ (holocarpic),  or it may bear tapering rhizoids, or be
                 mycelial and very extensive.   The outstanding  characteristics of the thallus is a tendency
                 to be nonseptate and, in most  groups, multinucliate;  cross walls are  laid down in vigorously
                 growing material  only to delimit the reporductive organs.   The spore unit of nonsexual re-
                 production is borne in a sporangium, and, in aquatic and semiaquatic orders,  is provided
                 with a  single posterior or anterior  flagellum or two laterally attached ones. Sexual activity
                 in the phycomycetes characteristically results in the formation of resting spores.

         2' (I1)   Hyphal  filaments when present septate,  without zoospores, with or  without  sporangia,
                 usually with conida; sexual reproduction absent or  culminating in the  formation of asci
                 or basidia	-.	8

         3 (2)    Flagellated cells  characteristically produced	'.	4
         3'       Flagellated cells  lacking or rarely produced	7

         4 (3)    Motile cells uniflagellate	'	'.	5
         4'       Motile cells biflagellate	6

         5 (4)    Zoospores posteriorly uniflagellate, formed inside the sporangium. . . class. . .Chytridiomycetes

                     The Chytridiomycetes produce  asexual zoospores with a  single posterior whiplash
                 flagellum.  The thallus is highly variable; the most primitive forms are unicellular  and
                 holocarpic and in  their  early stages of development are plasmodial  (lack cell walls),  more
                 advanced forms develop rhizoids and with further evolutionary progress develop mycelium.
                 The principle chemical component of the cell wall is  chitin, but cellulose  is also present.
                 Chytrids are typically aquatic  organisms  but may be  found in other  habitats.  Some species
                 are chitinolytic and/or  keratinolytic.  Chytrids may be isolated from nature by baiting (e.g.
                 hemp seeds or pine  pollen) Chytrids occur both in marine and fresh water habitats and are
                 of some ec'onomic importance  due to their parasitism of algae and animals.  The genus
                 Dermocystidium may be provisionally grouped with the chytrids.  Species of this genus
                 cause serious epidemics  of oysters and marine and fresh water fish.

         5'       Zoospores anteriorly uniflagellate,  formed inside or outside the sporangium	class
                 	Hyphochytridiomycetes

                     These fungi are aquatic (fresh water  or marine)  chytrid-like fungi whose  motile  cells
                 possess a single anterior flagellum of the tinsel type (feather-like).   They are parasitic on
          •       algae and fungi or may  be saprobic.   Cell walls contain chitin with some species also demon-
                 strating cellulose  content.  Little information is available on the biology of this class and
                 at present it is limited  to less than  20 species.

         6 (41)    Flagella nearly equal, one whiplash the other tinsel	class	Oomycetes

                     A number of representatives of the Oomycetes have been shown to have cellulosic cell
                 walls.   The mycelium is  coenocytic,  branched and  well developed in most  cases.  The sexual
                 process results in the formation of  a resting spore of the oogamous type,  i. e.  , a type of
                 fertilization in which two heterogametangia come in contact and fuse their contents through
                 a pore  or tube.  The thalli in  this class range from unicellular  to profusely branched
                 filamentous types.  Most forms are eucarpic; zoospores are produced throughout the class
                 except in the more highly advanced  species.  Certain species are of economic  importance due
                 to their destruction of food crops (potatoes and grapes) while others cause serious diseases of
                 fish (e. g. Saprolegina parasitical.  Members of the family Saprolegniaceae are the common
11-6

-------
                                                                                                        Fungi
         "water molds1' and are among the most ubiquitous fungi in nature.  The order Lagenidiales
         includes only a  few  species which are parasitic on algae,  small animals, and other aquatic
         life.  The  somatic structures  of this taxon are holocarpic and endobiotic.  The sewage fungi
         are classified in the order Leptomitales.   Fungi  of this/order are characterized by the
         formation  of refractile constrictions; ''cellulin plugs" occur throughout the thalli or, at least,
         at the bases of hyphae or to cut off reproductive structures.  Leptomitus lacteus may
         produce rather  extensive fouling floes  or slimes  in organically enriched waters.

6'        Flagella of unequal  size, both whiplash	class. . .  Plasmodiophorornycetes

             Members of this class are obligate endoparasites  of vascular plants,  algae, and fungi.
         The thallus qonsists of a plasmodium which develops within the'host cells.  Nuclear division
         at some stages  of the life  cycle is of a type found in no other fungi but known to occur in
         protozoa.  Zoosporangia which arise directly from the plasmodium bear zobspores with two
         unequal anterior falgella.   The cell walls  of these fungi apparently lack cellulose.

7(3')    Mainly -saprobic,  sex cell when present a  zy go spore. •	class....   Zveomycetes

             This class  has  well developed mycelium with septa developed in portions of the
         older hyphae; actively growing hyphae  are  normally non-septate.  The  asexual spores are
         non-motile sporangiospores (aplanospores).  Such spores lack flagella  and are usually
         aerialy disseminated.  Sexual reproduction is initiated by the fusion of two gametangia
         with resultant formation of a  thick-walled, resting  spore, .the zygospore.  In  the more
         advanced species, the sporangia or the sporangiospores are conidia-like.  Many of the
         Zygomycetes are of economic importance due to  their  ability to synthesize commercially
         valuable organic acids and alcohols, to transform steroids such as cortisone,  and .to
         parasitize  and destroy food crops.  A few species are  capable of causing disease  in man
         and animals (zygomycosis).

7'        Obligate commensals of arthropods, zygospores  usually lacking	class.  . . . Trichomycetes

             The Trichomycetes are an ill-studied  group  of fungi which appear to be obligate
         commensals of  arthropods.  The trichomycetes are associated with a wide variety of insecta.
         diplopods,  and Crustacea of terrestrial and aquatic {fresh and marine) habitats.  None  of
         the members of this class have been cultured in vitro  for continued periods of times with any
         success.   Asexual reproduction is by means of sporangiospores.  Zygospores have been
         observed in species of several orders.

 8 (2l)    Sexual spores borne in  asci	class	Ascomycetes

             In the Ascomycetes the products of meiosis, the ascospores, are  borne in sac
         like structures termed  asci.   The ascus usually  contains eight ascospores,  but the number
         produced  may vary with the species or strain. Most species produce extensive septate
         mycelium.  This large  class is divided into two subclasses on the presence or absence
         of an ascocarp.  The Hemiascomycetidae lack an ascocarp and do not produce ascogenous
         hyphae; this subclass includes the true yeasts.  The Euascomycetidae  usually are divided
         into three series (Plectomycetes,  Pyrenomycetes, and Discomycetes)  on the basis of
         ascacarp  structure.

 8'       Sexual spores borne on basidia	class	Basidiomycetes

             The Basidiomycetes generally are considered  the most highly evolved of the fungi.
         Karyogamy and meiosis occur in the basidium which bears sexual exogenous  spores,
         basidiospores.   The mushrooms, toadstools, rusts, and smuts are included in this class.

 8"       Sexual stage  lacking	:	.Form class.(Fungi Imperfecti)..Deuteromycetes

             The Deuteromycetes  is a form class  for those fungi (with morphological  affinities
         to the Ascomycetes or Basidiomycetes) which have not demonstrated a sexual stage.
         The generally employed classification scheme for these fungi is based on the morphology
         and color  of the asexual reproductive stages. This scheme is briefly outlined below.
         Newer concepts of the classification based on conidium development after the  classical
         work of S. J. Hughes (1953) may eventually replace the gross morphology system (see
         Barron 1968).
                                                                                                             11-7

-------
      Fungi
             KEY TO THE FORM-ORDERS OF THE FUNGI IMPERFECT!    .

             1        Reproduction by means of conidia, oidia,  or by budding	2
             I1        No reproductive structures present	Mycelia Sterilia

             2 (1)     Reproduction by means of conidia borne in pycnidia	,	Sphaeropsidales
             2'        Conidia, when formed, not in cycnidia	3

             3 (2')    Conidia borne in acervuli	Melanconiales
             3'        Conidia borne otherwise, or  reproduction by oidia or by budding	Moniliales

             KEY TO THE FORM-FAMILIES OF THE MONILIALES

             1        Reproduction mainly by unicellular budding, yeast-like; mycelial phase, if present,
                      secondary, arthrospores occasionally produced,  manifest melanin pigmentation  lacking	2
             I1        Thallus mainly filamentous; dark melanin pigments sometimes produced	3

             2 (1)     Ballistospores produced	Sporobolomycetaceae
             2'        No ballistospores	Cryptococcaceae

             3        Conidiophores,  if present,  not united into sporodochia or synnemata	4
             3'        Sporodochia present	•	Tuberculariaceae •
             3"       Synnemata present   ..                     -                 .                    Stilbellaceae

             4 (3)     Conidia and conidiophores or oidia hyaline or brightly colored	Moniliaceae .
             4'        Conidia and/or  conidiophores, containing  dark melanin pigment	Dematiaceae
11-8

-------
                                                                                   Fungi
SELECTED REFERENCES

Ahearn, D. G., Roth, F.J.  Jr., Meyers, S. P.
    Ecology and Charact erization of Yeasts
    from Aquatic Regions of South Florida.  .
    Marine Biology 1:291-308.   1968

Alexopoulos,  J. C.  Introductory Mycology.
    2nd ed.  John Wileyand Sons, New York,
    613 pp.  1962

Barron, G. L. The Genera of Hyphomycetes
    from Soil.  Williams and Wilkins Co.,
    Baltimore.  364 pp.   1968

Cooke, W.B.  Population  Effects on the
    Fungus Population of a Stream.
    Ecology 42:1-18.   1961

	.  A Laboratory Guide to Fungi in
    Polluted  Waters,  Sewage,  and Sewage
    Treatment Systems.   U. S.  Dept. of
    Health, Education and Welfare. Cincinnati.
    132 pp.  1963

	.  Fungi in Sludge Digesters.
    Purdue Univ. Proc. 20th Industrial
    Waste Conference, pp 6-17.  1965a
             The Enumeration of Yeast
    Populations in a Sewage Treatment Plant.
    Mycologia 57:696-703.  1965b

   	.  Fungal Populations in Relation
    to Pollution of the  Bear River, Idaho-Utah.
    UtahAcad. Proc.  44(1):298-315.  1967

   	and Matsuura, George  S.  A Study
    of Yeast Populations in a Waste Stabilization
    Pond System.  Protoplasma 57:163-187.
    1963

	, Phaff.  H.J., Miller. M.W.,
    Shifrine, M.. and Khapp,  E. Yeasts
    in Polluted Water and Sewage.
    Mycologia 52:210-230.  1960

Emerson, Ralph and Weston, W.H.
    Aqualinderella  fermentans Gen.  et Sp.
    Nov.,  A Phycomycete Adapted to
      Stagnant waters.  I.  Morphology and
      Occurrence in Nature.  Amer.  J.
      Botany 54:702-719.  1967

 Hughes, S.J.  Conidiophores, Conidia and
      Classification.  Can.  J. Bot. 31:577-
      659.  1953

 Johnson,  T.W.,  Jr.  Saprobic Marine Fungi.
      pp. 95-104.  InAinsworth, G. C.  and
      Sussman,  A.S.  The Fungi, III.
      Academic Press, New York. 1968

 	and  Sparrow, F.K.,  Jr.  Fungi
      in Oceans and Estuaries.  Weinheim,
      Germany.  668 pp.  1961

 Meyers,  S.P.  Observations on the Physio-
      logical Ecology of Marine Fungi.  Bull.
      Misaki Mr. Biol. Inst.  12:207-225. 1968

 Prigsheim, E.G.  Iron Bacteria.  Biol. Revs.
      Cambridge Phil.  Soc. 24:200-245. 1949

.Sparrow, F. K.,  Jr.  Aquatic Phycomycetes.
      2nd ed.  Univ. Mich.  Press, AnnArbor.
      1187 pp.  1960.

 	.  Ecology of Freshwater  Fungi.
      pp. 41-93.  InAinsworth,   G. C. and
      Sussman,  A.S.  The Fungi, III.  Acad.
      Press,  New York.  1968

 Stokes, J. L.  Studies on the Filamentous
      Sheathed Iron Bacterium Sphaerotilus
      natans.  J.  Bacteriol. 67:278-291. 1954

 van Uden, N.  and Fell,  J.W. Marine Yeasts.
      pp. 167-201.  In Droop. M.R.  and Wood.
      E. J.F.  Advances in Microbiology of
      the Sea, I.  Academic Press. New York.
      1968

 Yerkes, W. D.  Observations on an Occurrence
      of Leptomitus lacteus in Wisconsin.
      Mycologia 58:976-978.  1966

 Cooke. William B. and Ludzack, F.J.
      Predacious Fungus Behavior in
      Activated Sludge  Systems.  Jour.  Water
      Poll. Cont. Fed. 30(12):1490-1495.  1958.
                                                                                     11-9

-------
  FRESHWATER  POLLUTION  ECOLOGY
Q.  WHAT IS ECOLOGY?

A.  The science of the interrelation between living
    organisms and their environment.
Q.  WHAT IS NOT ECOLOGY?

A.  Not much!


                   T. T. Macan

-------
                 BIOLOGICAL ASPECTS OF NATURAL SELF PURIFICATION
I  INTRODUCTION

A  The results of natural self purification
   processes are readily observed.  Did they
   not exist,  sewage (and other organic
   wastes) would forever remain,  and the
   world as we know it would long ago have
   become uninhabitable.  Physical, chemical,
   and biological factors are involved.  The
   microscopic and macroscopic animals
   and plants in a body of water  receiving
   organic wastes are not only exposed to all
   of the various (ecological) conditions in
   that water, but they themselves create and
   profoundly modify certain of those conditions.

B  Since toxic chemicals kill some of or all
   of the aquatic organisms,  their presence
   disrupts the natural self purification
   processes, and hence,  will not be considered
   here.  The following discussion is based
   solely on the effects of organic pollution'
   such as sewage or other readily oxidizable
   organic wastes.

C  This description is based on the concept of
   a "stream" since under the circumstances
   of stream or river flow, the events and
   conditions occur in a linear succession.
   The same fundamental processes occur in
   lakes,  estuaries, and oceans, except that
   the sequence of events may become
   telescoped or confused due to the reduction
   or variability of water movements.

D  The particular biota (plants and animals,
   or flora and fauna) employed as illustrations
   below are typical of central United States.
   Similar or equivalent forms occur in
   similar circumstances  in other parts of
   the world.

E  This presentation is based on an unpublished
   chart produced by Dr. C.M. Tarzwell and
   his co-workers in 1951.  Examples from
   this chart are employed in the presentation.
II  THE STARTING POINT

 A A normal unpolluted stream is assumed
   as a starting point. (Figure 1)

 B The cycle of life is in reasonably stable
   balance.

 C A great variety of life is present, but no
   one species or type predominates.

 D The organisms present are adjusted to the
   normal ranges of physical and chemical
   factors characteristic of the region, such
   as the following:

   1 The latitude, turbidity,  typical cloud
      cover, etc.  affect the amount of light
      penetration and hence photosynthesis.

   2 The slope, cross sectional area, and
      nature of the bottom affect the rate of
      flow,  and  hence  the type of organisms
      present deposition of sludge,  etc.

   3 The temperature affects both certain
      physical characteristics of the water,
      and the rate of biological activity
      (metabolism).

   4 Dissolved substances naturally present
      in the water greatly affect living
      organisms (hard water vs. soft water
      fauna and  flora).

 E Clean water  zones  can usually be
   characterized as follows:

   1 General features:

      a  Dissolved oxygen high

      b  BOD low

      c  Turbidity low

      d Organic content low
BI. ECO.nap.5c. 12.70
                                      12-1

-------
Biological Aspects of Natural Self Purification
         H
                                                 THE  BIOTA
                   2    1

                  24  12
         3   4
         DAYS
12  24  36  48  60  72  84 96 108
         MILES
         Figure 1: Relations between variety and abundance (production) of aquatic life,
         as organic pollution (discharged at mile 0) is carried down a stream.  Time
         and distance scales are only relative and will be found to differ in nearly every
         case.  After Bartsch and Ingram.
12-2

-------
                                                Biological Aspects of Natural Self Purification
       e Bacterial count low

       f Numbers of species high

       g Numbers of organisms of each species
         moderate or low

       h Bottom free of sludge deposits

    2  Characteristic biota includes a wide
       variety of forms such as:

       a A variety of algae and native higher
         (vascular,  or  rooted) plants

       b Caddis fly larvae (Trichoptera)

       c Mayfly larvae (Ephemeroptera)

       d Stonefly larvae (Plecoptera)

       e Damselfly larvae (Zygoptera)

       f Beetles (Coleoptera)

       g Clams (Pelecypoda)

       h Fish such as:

         - Minnows (Notropid types)

         - Darters (Etheostomatidae)

         - Millers thumb (Cottidae)

         - Sunfishes and basses (Centrarchidae)

         - Sauger,  yellow perch, etc. (Percidae)

         - Others

    3  Organisms characteristic of clean  lakes,
       estuaries, or oceanic shores might be
       substituted for the above, and likewise
       in the  following sections.  However,  it
       should be recognized that no single
       habitat is as thoroughly understood in
       this regard as the freshwater stream.


Ill  POLLUTION

 A  With the  introduction of organic pollution
    (Figure 1,  day 0), a succession of fairly
    well organized events are initiated.
    Important items to observe in interpreting
    the pollutional significance of stream
    organisms are the following:

 B Numbers of species present, they tend to
    decrease with pollution.

 C Numbers of individuals of each species
    tends to increase with pollution.

 D Ratios between types of organisms are
    disturbed by pollution.

    1  Clean water species intolerant of
       organic pollution tend to become scarce
      •and unhealthy.

    2  Animals with air breathing devices or
       habits tend to increase in numbers.

    3  Scavengers become dominant

    4  Predators disappear

    5  Higher plants, green algae, arid most
       diatoms tend to disappear.

    6.  Blue green algae often become
       conspicious

 E The importance of observations on any
    single species is very slight.
IV  THE ZONE OF RECENT POLLUTION

 A  The zone of recent pollution begins with
    the act of pollution, the introduction of
    excessive organic matter: food for
    microorganisms (Figure 1,  day 0)

 B  There follows a period of physical mixing.

 C  Many animals and plants are smothered
    or shaded out by the suspended material.

 D  With, this enormous new supply of food
    material, bacteria and other saprophytic
    microorganisms begin to  increase
    rapidly.
                                                                                         12-3

-------
Biological Aspects of Natural Self Purification
E  The elimination of intolerant predatory
   animals allows the larger scavengers to
   take full advantage of the situation.

F  This explosive growth of organisms,
   particularly fungi and bacteria, draws
   heavily on the free dissolved oxygen for
   respiration, and may eventually eliminate it.

G  The number of types of organisms diminishes
   but numbers of individuals of tolerant types
   may increase.

H  Zone of degeneration, or recent pollution,
   can usually be characterized as follows:

   1 General features:

     a DO variable, 2 ppm to saturation

     b BOD high

     c Turbidity high

     d Organic content high

     e Bacterial count variable to high

     f Number of species declines from
       clean water zone

     g Number of organisms per species
       tends to increase

     h Other:  Slime may appear on bottom

   2 Characteristic biota:

     a Fewer higher plants, but rank heavy
       growth of those which persist

     b Increase in tolerant green, and blue
       green algae

     c Midge larvae (Chironomidae) may
       become extremely abundant

     d Back swimmers (Corixidae) and water
       boatmen (Notonectidae) often present

     e Sludge worms (Tubificidae) common
       to abundant.
      f  Dragonflies (Anisoptera) often present
        have unique tail breathing strainer

      g Fish types,  eg:

        -  Fathead minnows (Pimephales
           promelas)

        -  White sucker (Catostomus
           commersonni )

        -  Bowfin (Amia calva)

        -  Carp (Cyprinus carpio)
V  THE SEPTIC ZONE

A The exact location of the beginning of the
   septic zone, if one  occurs, varies with
   season and other circumstances.
   (Figure 1,  day 1)

B Lack of free DO kills many microorganisms
   and nearly all larger plants and animals,
   again replenishing the mass of dead
   organic material.

C Varieties of both macro and micro-
   organisms and adjustable types (facultative)
   that can live in the  absence of free oxygen
   (anaerobic)take over.

D These organisms continue to feed on their
   bonanza of food (pollution) until it is
   depleted.

E The numbers of types of organisms is now
   at a minimum, numbers of individuals
   may or may not be  at a maximum.

F The septic zone,  or zone of putrefaction
   can usually be characterized as follows:

   1  General features:

      a Little or no DO during warm weather.

      b BOD high but decreasing

      c Turbidity high, dark; odoriferous

      d Organic content high but decreasing
  12-4

-------
                                               Biological Aspects of Natural Self Purification
       e Bacterial count high

       f Number of species very low

       g Number of organisms may be extremely
         high

       h Other: Slime blanket and sludge
         deposits  usually present,  oily
         appearance on surface,  rising gas
         bubbles

    2  Characteristic biota:

       a Blue green algae

       b Mosquito larvae

       c Rat-tailed maggots

       d Sludge worms (Tubificidae and similar
         forms).  Small,  red,  segmented
         (annelid) worms seem to be  character-
         istic of this zone in both fresh and
         salt waters, the world around.

       e Air breathing snails (Physa  for
         example)

       f Fish types: None

    3  Note:  Fortunately, all polluted waters
       do not always degenerate to "septic"
       conditions.


VI  THE RECOVERY ZONE

 A  The septic zone gradually merges into the
    recovery zone.  (Figure  1, day 4)

 B  As the excessive food reserves diminish
    so do the numbers of anaerobic organisms
    and other pollution tolerant forms.

 C  As the excessive demand for  oxygen
    diminishes, free DO begins to appear and
    likewise oxygen requiring (aerobic)
    organisms.

 D  As the suspended material is reduced and
    available mineral materials increase due
    to microbial action, algae begin to increase
    often in great  abundance.
E  Photosynthesis by the algae releases more
   oxygen,  thus hastening recovery.

F  Since algae require oxygen at all times
   for respiration (like animals), heavy
   concentrations of algae will deplete free
   DO during the night when it is not being
   replenished by photosynthesis.

G  Consequently this zone is characterized
   by extreme diurnal fluctuations in DO.

H  With oxygen for respiration and algae, etc.
   for food, general animal growth is resumed.

I  The stream may now enter a period of
   excessive productivity which-lasts until
   the accumulated energy (food) reserves
   have been dissipated.

J  Zone of  recovery may usually be
   characterized as follows:

   1 General features:

     a DO 2 ppm to saturation

     b BOD dropping

     c Turbidity dropping, less color and
       odor

     d Organic content dropping

     e Bacterial count dropping

     f Numbers of species increasing

     g Numbers of organisms per species
       decreasing, (with the increase in
       competition)

     h Other:  Less  slime and sludge

   2 Characteristic biota

     a Blue green algae

     b Tolerant green flagellates and other
       algae

     c Rooted higher plants in lower reaches

     d Midge larve (Chironomids)
                                                                                     12-5

-------
  Biological Aspects of Natural Self Purification
        e  Black fly larvae (Simulium)

        f  Giant water bugs (Belostoma spp.)

        g  Clams (Megalonais)

        h  Fish types:

           - Green sunfish (Lepomis cyanellus)

           - Common sucker (Catostomus
            commersonni)

           - Flathea'd catfish (Pylodictis olivaris)

           - Stoneroller minnow (Campostoma
            anomalum)

           - Buffalo (Ictlobus cyprinellus)

        Excessive production and extreme
        variability often characterize middle and
        lower recovery zones.
     4  Unfortunately, many waters once polluted
        never completely "recover".  Re-
        pollution is the rule in many areas so
        that after the initial pollution,  clear
        out delineation of zones is not possible.
        Characterization of these waters may
        involve such parameters as productivity,
        BOD,  some "index" figure, or other
        value not included here.

VII  CLEAN WATER ZONE

  A  Clean water conditions again obtain when
     productivity has returned to a normal,
     relatively poor level, and a well balanced
     varied flora and fauna are present.
     (Figure  1, day "10") Conditions may
     usually be characterized as follows:

  B  General features: similar to upstream
     clean water except that it is now a larger
     stream.

  C  Characteristic biota:  similar to upstream
     clean water fauna and flora except that
     species include those indigenous to a
     larger stream.
REFERENCES

1  Bartsch, A.F.  and Ingram,  W.M.
      Stream Life and the Pollution Environ-
      ment.  Public Works Publications,
      July 1959, Vol. 90, No. 7, pp. 104-110.*
2  Gaufin, A.R. and Tarzwell, C.M.
      Aquatic invertebrates as indicators of
      stream pollution.   Reprint No. 3141
      fromPHR.  67  (l):57-64.   1952.

3  Gaufin, A.R. and Tarzwell, C.M.
      Environmental changes in a polluted
      stream during winter.  Am.  Midland
      Naturalist.  54:68-88;   1955.

4  Gaufin, A.R. and Tarzwell, C.M.
      Aquatic macro-invertebrate communities
      as indicators of organic pollution in
      Lytle Creek. Sewage and Ind. Wastes.
      28:906-24.   1956.

5  Hynes, H.B.N.  The Biology of Polluted
      Waters.  Liverpool Univ. Press.
      pp. 202.   1963.

6  Katz, M. and Gaufin, A.R.  The  effects
      of sewage pollution on the fish population
      of a midwestern stream.  Trans. Am.
      Fisheries Soc.  82:156-65. 1952.  *

7  Reish, D. J.  The Relationship of the
      Polychaetous Annelid Capitella capitata
      (Fabricius) to Waste  Discharges of
      Biological Origin.  In:  Biol. Prob.
      Water Pol.  - Trans.  1959 Seminar.
      Robert A. Taft  Sanitary Engineering
      Center,  USPHS, Cincinnati, OH.
      pp. 195-200.

8  Biology of Water Pollution FWQA Pub.
      CWA-3 (references with an asterisk
      are reprinted in this  publication. 1967.
This outline was prepared by H. W.  Jackson,
Chief Biologist,  National Training Center,
DTTB,  MDS,  WPQ EPA,  Cincinnati,",
OH   45268.
    12-6

-------
                    ECOLOGY OF WASTE STABILIZATION PROCESSES
I  INTRODUCTION

Living organisms will live where they can live.
This holds for treatment plant environments
just as it does for streams,  impoundments,
oceans, dry or wet lands.

A  Each species has  certain limits or toler-
   ances,  growth, feeding habits and other
   characteristics that determine its favored
   habitat.

B  The presence of certain organisms with
   well defined characteristics in a viable
   condition and in significant numbers also
   provides some inference  with respect to
   the habitat.

C  The indicator organism concept has certain
   pitfalls.  It is not sufficient to base an
   opinion upon one or more critters which
   may have been there as a result of gas
   liquid or solid transport.  It is necessary
   to observe growth patterns, associated
   organisms, environmental  conditions, and
   nutritional characteristics  to provide
   information on environmental acceptability.

D  Organisms characteristic of wastewater
   treatment commonly are  those found in
   nature  under low DO conditions.   Perform-
   ance   characteristics are  related to
   certain organism  progressions and assoc-
   iations that are influenced by food to
   organism ratios and pertinent conditions.
   One single species is unlikely to perfprm
   all of the functions expected during waste
   treatment.  Many associated organisms
   compete in an ecological system for a
   favored position.  The combination includes
   synergistic, antagonistic, competitive,
   predative, and other relationships that may
   favor predominance of one  group for a time
   and other groups under other conditions.

E  It is the responsibility of the treatment
   plant control team to manage conditions
   of treatment to favor the  best attainable
   performance during each hour of the day
   each day of the year.   This outline con-'
   siders  certain biological characteristics
   and their implications with respect to
   treatment performance.
H   TREATMENT PLANT ORGANISMS

 Wastewater is characterized by overfertili-
 zation from the standpoint of nutritional
 elements, by varying amounts of items that
 may not enter the metabolic pattern but have
 some effect upon it,  such as silt, and by
 materials that will interfere with metabolic
 patterns.  Components vary in availability
 from those that are readily acceptable to
 those that persist for long periods of time.
 Each item has some effect upon the organism
 response to the mixture.

 A  Slime forming organisms including certain
    bacteria, fungi,  yeasts;  protista monera
    and alga tend to grow rapidly on dissolved
    nutrients under favorable conditions.  These
    grow rapidly enough to dominate the overall
    population during early stages of growth.
    There may be tremendous numbers of
    relatively few species until available
    nutrients have been converted to cell mass
    or other limiting factors check  the pop-
    ulation explosion.

 B  Abundant slime growth favors production
    of predator organisms such as amoeba or
    flagellates.  These feed upon preformed
    cell mass.  Amoebas tend to flow around
    particulate materials; flagellates also are
    relatively inefficient food gatherers.  They
    tend to become numerous when  the nutrient
    level is high.  They are likely to be assoc-
    iated with floculated masses where food
    is more abundant.

 C  Ciliated organisms are more efficient
    food gatherers because they have the
    ability to move more readily and may
    set up currents in the water to bring food
   .to them for ingestion. Stalked ciliates
    are implicated with well stabilized effluents
    because they are capable of sweeping the
    fine particulates from the water between
    floe masses while their residues tend to
    become associated with the floe.

 D  Larger organisms tend to become establish-
    ed later and serve as scavengers.  These
    include Oligochaetes (worms), Chironomids
    (bloodworms and insect larvae), Isopods
    (sow bugs and crustacea), Rotifera'and
    others.
PC. 19.10.69
                                        12-7

-------
  Ecology of Waste Stabilization Processes
in  TREATMENT OPERATIONAL CONTROL

 An established treatment plant is likely to
 contain representative organisms from all
 groups of tolerant species.  Trickling filters,
 activated sludge, or ponds tend to retain
 previously developed organisms in large
 numbers relative to the incoming feed. The
 number and variety available determine the
 nature, degree and time required for partial
 oxidation and conversion of pollutants  from
 liquid to solid concentrates.

 A Proliferation of slime forming organisms
    characterize the new unit because they grow
    rapidly on soluble nutrients. Predators
    and scavengers may start growing as soon
    as cell mass particulates appear but growth
    rate is slower and numbers and mass lag
    as compared with slime  organisms. As
    slime growth slows due to conversion of
    soluble nutrients to cell  mass, the  slime
    formers tend to associate as agglomerates
    or clumps promoting floculation and liquid
 '  solid separation.

 B Overfeeding an established unit encourages
    rapid growth of slime'organisms as individ-
    ual cells rather than as flocculated masses.
    This results in certain characteristics
    resembling those of a young, rapidly
    growing system.

 C Toxic feeds or unfavorable conditions
    materially reduce the population of exposed
    sensitive  organisms.  The net effect is a
    population selection requiring rapid regrowth
    to reestablish desired operating character-
    istics.  The system assumes new growth
    characteristics to a degree  depending upon
    the fraction remaining after the  toxic effect
    has been relieved by dilution,  degradation,
    sorption,  or other means.

 D Treatment units are  characterized  by
    changes in response  to feed sequence.
    load ratio, and physical  or chemical
    conditions.  Response to accute  toxicity
    may be immediately  apparent.  Chronic
    overloading or mild toxicity may not be
    apparent for several days.   It may  be
    expected that it will require 1 to 3 weeks
    to restore effective performance after any
    major upset.  Performance  criteria may
    not indicate  a smooth progression toward
    improved operation.
 E Observations of the growth characteristics
    and populations do not provide quantitative
    information, but they do indicate trends
    and stages of development that are useful
    to identify problems.  It is not possible to
    identify most slime organisms by direct
    observation. It is possible to recognize
    growth and flocculation characteristics.
    Certain larger  organisms are recognizable
    and are useful as indicator organisms to
    suggest past or subsequent developments.
IV  ILLUSTRATIONS OF ECOLOGICAL
    SIGNIFICANCE

 A The first group represents initial devel-
    opment of non-flocculent growth.  Single
    celled and filamentous growth are shown.
    Rapid growth shows little evidence  of
    flocculation that is necessary to produce
    a stable, clear effluent.

 B The next group of slides indicate develop-
    ment  of floe forming tendencies from
    filamentous or non-filamentous growth.
    Clarification and compaction characteris-
    tics are relatable to the nature and density
    of floe masses.

 C Organisms likely to be associated with
    more stabilized sludges are shown  in the
    third  group.  Scavengers essentially con-
    sist of a large alimentary canal with
    accessories.

 D The last two slides illustrate changes in
    appearance after a toxic load.  Scavengers,
    ciliates, etc. have been inactivated.  New
    growth at the edge of the floe masses are
    not apparent.  Physical structure indicates
    dispersed residue rather than agglomera-
    tion tendencies.   The floe probably contains
    living organisms protected by the surround-
    ing organic material, but only time and
    regrowth will reestablish a working floe
    with good stabilization and clarification
    tendencies.
 ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
 This outline contains significant materials from
 previous outlines by H. W.  Jackson and R.  M.
 Sinclair.  Slide illustrations were provided by
 Dr. Jackson.
                                                  This outline was prepared by F. J. Ludzack,
                                                  Chemist,  National Training Center,   WPO,
                                                  EPA, Cincinnati, OH  45268.
   12-8

-------
                    THE INTERPRETATION OF BIOLOGICAL DATA
                       WITH REFERENCE TO WATER QUALITY
 I   INTRODUCTION

 Sanitary engineers like to have data
 presented to them in a readily assimilable
 form and some of them seem a little
 impatient with biologists who appear unable
 to provide definite quantitative  criteria
 applicable to all kinds of water conditions.
 I think the feeling tends  to be that this  is
 the fault of biologists, and if they would
 only pull themselves out of the  scientific
 stone-age all would be well.  I  will try to
 explain here why I believe that  biological
 data can never be absolute nor  interpret-
 able without a certain amount of expertise.
 In this respect biologists resemble medical
 men who make their diagnoses  against a
 complex background of detailed knowledge.
 Anyone can diagnose an  open wound but it
 takes  a doctor to identify an obscure
 disease; and although he can  explain how
 he does it he cannot pass on his knowledge
 in that one explanation.   Similarly, one
 does not need an expert  to recognize gross
 organic pollution, but only a biologist can
 interpret more subtle biological conditions
 in a water body; and here again he can
 explain how he does it, but that does not
 make  his hearer a biologist.  Beck (1957)
 said something similar at a previous
 symposium in Cincinnati in 1956.
II   THE COMPLEXITY OF BIOLOGICAL
    REACTIONS TO WATER CONDITIONS

 A  Complexity of the Aquatic Habitat

    The aquatic habitat is complex and
    consists not only of water but of the
    substrata beneath it,  which may be
    only indirectly influenced by the quality
    of the water.  Moreover, in biological
    terms, water quality includes such
    features as rate of flow and tempera-
    ture regime,  which are not considered
    of direct importance  by the chemist.
To many animals and plants,  maximum
summer temperature or maximum
rate of flow is just as important as
minimum oxygen tension.  The  result
is that inland waters provide an
enormous array of different com-
binations of conditions, each of which
has its own community of plants and
animals; and the variety of species
involved is very great.  Thus, for
example, Germany has about  6000
species of aquatic animals (lilies 196la)
and probably at least as many species
of plants.  Yet Europe has a rather
restricted fauna because of the
Pleistocene ice age; in most other
parts of the world the flora and fauna
are even richer.

Distribution of Species and Environ-
mental Factors

We know something about the way in
which species are distributed  in the
various habitats, especially in the
relatively much studied continent of
Europe,  but we have, as yet,  little
idea  as to what factors or  combination
of factors actually control the individual
species.

1   Important ecological factors

    Thus,  it is possible to list the
    groups of organisms that  occur in
    swift stony upland rivers
    (rhithron in the sense of lilies,
     1961b) and to contrast them with
    those of the lower sluggish reaches
    (potamon).  Similarly we  know,
    more or less,  the different floras
    and faunas we can expect  in
    infertile (oligotrophic) and  fertile
    (eutrcphic) lakes.  We are, however,
    much less informed as to just what
    ecological factors cause these
    differences. We know they include
    temperature and its yearly
BI.EN. Id. 3.71
                              13-1

-------
The Interpretation of Biological Data with Reference to Water Quality
        amplitude; oxygen,  particularly at
        minimal levels; plant nutrients,
        such as nitrate, phosphate,  silica,
        and bicarbonate; other ions  in
        solution, including  calcium, chloride,
        and possibly hydrogen; dissolved
        organic matter, which is necessary
        for some bacteria and fungi and
        probably for some algae; the nature
        of the substratum; and current.

        Complexity of interacting factors

        We also know these factors  can
        interact in a complex manner and
        that their action on any particular
        organism can be indirect through
        other members of the biota.

        a   Induced periphyton growths

            Heavy growths  of encrusting
            algae induced by large amounts
            of plant nutrients, or of
            bacteria induced by ample
            supplies of organic matter,
            can eliminate or decimate
            populations of lithophile insects
            by simple mechanical inter-
            ference.  But the change does
            not stop there:  the growths
            themselves provide habitats
            for the animals, such as
            Chironomidae and Naidid worms,
            which  could not otherwise live
            on the  stones.

        b   Oxygen levels and depositing
            substrates

            If oxygen conditions over a
            muddy bottom reach levels
            just low enough to be intolerable
            to leeches, tubificid worms,
            which the  leeches normally
            hold in check, are able  to build
            up to enormous numbers
            especially as some of their
            competitors (e.g.  Chironomus)
            are also eliminated.
    c   Oxygen levels and non muddy
        substrates

        One then finds the typical
        outburst of sludge worms,  so
        often cited as indicators of
        pollution. This does not
        happen if the same oxygen
        tension occurs  over  sand or
        rock,  however,  as these are
        not suitable  substrata for the
        worms.  Many such  examples
        could be given, but they would
        only be ones we understand;
        there must be a far greater
        number about which  we know
        nothing.

    d   One must conclude,  therefore,
        that quite simple chemical
        changes can produce far-
        reaching biological effects;
        that we only understand a
        small proportion of them; and
        that they are not always the
        same.

3   Classic examples

    This seems like a note of despair,
    however, if water quality deviates
    too far from normal, the effects
    are immediately apparent.  Thus,
    poisonous substances eliminate
    many species and may leave no
    animals (Hynes 1960); excessive
    quantities of salt remove all
    leeches, amphipods, and most
    insects and  leave a fauna con-
    sisting largely of Chironomidae,
    caddis worms, and oligochaetes
    (Albrecht 1954) and excessive
    amounts of dissolved organic
    matter give rise to carpets  of
    sewage fungus, which never occur
    naturally.  Here no great biologi-
    cal expertise is needed,  and there
 .   is little difficulty in the
    communication of results.  It is
    when effects are  slighter and more
    subtle that biological findings
 13-2

-------
                        The Interpretation of Biological Data with Reference to Water Quality
III
        become difficult to transmit
        intelligibly to other disciplines.
THE PROBLEMS IN PRESENTATION
OF BIOLOGICAL RESULTS
 Because of these difficulties various
 attempts have-been made to simplify the
 presentation of biological findings, but to
 my mind none of them is very successful
 because of the complexity of the subject.
 Early attempts at systematization developed
 almost  independently on the two sides  of
 the Atlantic, although they had some
 similarities.

 A  Early Studies in the  United States
    (Richardson and the  Illinois River)

    In America,  there was a simple division
    into  zones of pollution,  e.g. degradation,
    septic,  and recovery, which were
    characterized in broad general terms.
    This simple, textbook approach is
    summarized by Whipple et al. (1947),
    and serves fairly well for categorizing
    gross organic pollution such as has been
    mentioned above.  It was, however,
    soon found by Richardson (1929) during
    his classical studies on the Illinois
    River that typical  "indicators"  of foul
    conditions, such as Tubificidae and
    Chironomus, were not always present
    where they would be expected to occur.
    This was an early indication that it is
    not the water quality itself that provides
    suitable conditions for "pollution faunas, "
    but other, usually associated, conditions -
    in this instance deposits of rich organic
    mud. Such conditions may, in fact, be
    present in places where water quality
    in no way resembles pollution,  e. g.,
    upstream of weirs in trout streams
    where autumn leaves accumulate and
    decay and cause the  development of
    biota typical of organically polluted
    water.  Samples must therefore be
    judged against a background of biological
    knowledge.  Richardson was fully aware
    of this and was in no doubt about the
    condition of the Illinois River even  in
    places where his samples showed few
    or no pollution indicators.
B   The European Saprobic System

    In Europe, the initial stress was
    primarily on microorganisms and
    results were first codified in the
    early years of the century by
    Kolkwitz and Mars son. In this
    "Saprobiensystem, " zones of organic
    pollution similar to those described
    by the American workers were defined
    and organisms were listed as charac-
    teristic of one or more zones;
                                                              TABLE 1
                                             SAPROBIENSYSTEM - A European system
                                             of classifying organisms according to their
                                             response to the organic pollution in slow
                                             moving streams.  (22)

                                                 Alpha-Mesosaprobic Zone - Area of
                                                 active decomposition,  partly aerobic,
                                                 partly anaerobic, in a stream heavily
                                                 polluted with organic wastes.

                                                 Beta-Mesosaprobic Zone -  That  reach
                                                 of stream that is moderately polluted
                                                 with organic wastes.

                                                 Oligosaprobic Zone - That reach of a
                                                 stream that is slightly polluted with
                                                 organic wastes and contains the
                                                 mineralized products of self-
                                                 purification from organic pollution,
                                                 but with none of the organic pollutants
                                                 remaining.

                                                 Polvsaprobic Zone  - That area of a
                                                 grossly polluted stream which contains
                                                 the complex organic wastes that  are
                                                 decomposing primarily by anaerobic
                                                 processes.
                                                 A recent exposition of this list is
                                                 given by Kolkwitz (1950).  It was then
                                                 claimed that with a list of the species
                                                 occurring at a particular point it was
                                                 possible to allocate it to a saprobic
                                                 zone.  This system early met with
                                                 criticism for several reasons.  First,
                                                                                    13-3

-------
The Interpretation of Biological Data with Reference to .Water Quality
                                       TABLE 2

                 SAPROBICITY LEVELS ACCORDING TO THE TROPHIC
                   STRUCTURE OF THE COMMUNITIES OF ORGANISMS
        Saprobicity Level
       Structure of the Communities of Organisms
      I /3-oligosaprobic
Balanced relationship between producers, consumers
and destroyers; the communities of organisms are
poor in individuals but there is a moderate variety of
species,  small biomass and low bioactivity.
     II a-oligosaprobic
Balanced relationship between producers, consumers
and destroyers; communities of organisms are rich in
individuals and species with a large biomass and high
bioactivity.
     Ill /3-mesosaprobic
Substantially balanced relationship between producers,
consumers and destroyers; a relative increase in the
abundance of destroyers and, accordingly, of the con-
sumers living off them; communities of organisms are
rich in individuals and species with a large biomass and
high bioactivity.
     IV a-mesosaprobic
     V j3-polysaprobic
Producers decline as compared with an increase in
consumers and destroyers; mixotrophic and amphitrophic
forms predominate among the producers; communities of
organisms rich in individuals but poor in species with a
large biomass and extremely high bioactivity; still only
few species of macro-organisms; mass development of
bacteria and bacteria-eating  ciliates.

Producers drastically decline; communities of organisms
are extremely rich in individuals but poor in species with
a large  biomass and high bioactivity; macrofauna represented
only by  a few species of tubificids and chironomids; as in
IV these are in great abundance; mass development of
bacteria and bacteria-eating  ciliates.
     VI a -polysaprobic
Producers are absent; the total biomass is formed
practically solely by anaerobic bacteria and fungi;
macro-organisms are absent; flagellates outnumber
ciliates amongst the protozoa.
     Saprobicity - "Within the bioactivity of a body of water, Saprobicity is the sum
                  total of all those metabolic processes which are the antithesis of
                  primary production.  It is therefore the sum total of all those
                  processes which are  accompanied by a loss  of potential energy. "
                  Part I, Prague Convention.
13-4

-------
                     The Interpretation of Biological Data with Reference to Water Quality
   all the organisms listed occurred in
   natural habitats --they were not evolved
   in polluted water--and there was much
   doubt as to the placing of many of the
   species in the lists.  The system,  how-
   ever, did serve to codify ecological
   knowledge about a long list of species
   along an extended trophic scale. Its
   weaknesses appeared to be merely due
   to lack of knowledge; such a rigid
   system took far too little account of the
   complexity of the reaction of organisms
   to their habitats.  For instance, many
   organisms can be found, albeit rarely,
   in a wide range of conditions and others
   may  occur in restricted zones for
   reasons that have nothing to do with
   water quality. We often do not know if
   organisms confined to clean headwaters
   are kept there by high oxygen content,
   low summer temperatures, or inability
   to compete with other species under
   other conditions.  In the swift waters of
   Switzerland the system broke down in
   that some  organisms appeared in more
   polluted zones than their position in the
   lists  would indicate. Presumably here
   the controlling factor was oxygen,  which
   was relatively plentiful in turbulent cold
   water. In a recent series of experiments,
   Zimmerman (1962) has proven that
   current alone has a great influence on
   the biota, and identically polluted water
   flowing at  different speeds produces
   biotic communities characteristic of
   different saprobic levels.  He finds this
   surprising, but to me it seems an
   expected result,  for the reasons given
   above.

C  Recent Advances in the Saprobic System

   1   Perhaps  Zimmerman's surprise
       reflects the deeply rooted entrench-
       ment of the Saprobiensystem in
       Central Europe.  Despite its obvious
       shortcomings it has been revised
      and extended.  Liebmann (1951)
       introduced the concept of consider-
       ing number as well as occurrence
      and very rightly pointed out that the
       community of organisms is what
       matters rather than mere species
      lists.   But he did not stress the
importance of extrinsic factors,
such as current,  nor that the
system can only apply to organic
pollution and that different types
of organic  pollution differ in their
effects; e.g., carbohydrate solu-
tions from paper works produce
different results from those of
sewage,  as they contain little
nitrogen a'nd  very different  sus-
pended solids.  Other workers
(Sladecek 1961 and references
therein) have subdivided the more
polluted zones, which now,  instead
of being merely descriptive, are
considered to represent definite
ranges of oxygen content, BOD,
sulfide, and  even E. coli populations.
Every water  chemist knows that
BOD and oxygen content are not
directly related and to assume that
either should be more than  vaguely
related to the complexities  of
biological reactions  seems  to me
to indicate a  fundamental lack of
ecological understanding.  I also
think it is damaging to the hope of
mutual understanding between the
various disciplines concerned with
water  quality to give the impression
that one can  expect to find a close
and rigid relationship between
water  quality measurements as
assessed by  different sets of
parameters.   Inevitably these
relationships vary with local  con-
ditions; what applies in a sluggish
river in summer will certainly not
apply to a mountain  stream or even
to the  same river in the winter.
Correlation of data,  even within
one discipline, needs understanding,
knowledge, and judgment.

Caspers and Schulz  (1960) showed
that the failure of the system  to
distinguish between waters  that are
naturally productive and those
artifically enriched  can lead to
absurd results.  They studied a
canal in Hamburg, which because
of its urban situation can only be
regarded as  grossly polluted.
Yet it  develops a rich plankton.
                                                                                  13-5

-------
The Interpretation of Biological Data with Reference to Water Quality
        the composition of which, -according
        to the system,  shows it to be
        virtually clean.

 D  Numerical Application of the Saprobic
    System

    Once the Saprobiensystem was accepted
    it was logical to attempt to reduce its
    findings to simple figures or graphs for
    presentation of results.  Several such
    methods were  developed, which are
    described by Tumpling (1960),  who also
    gives the original references.  In all
    these methods, the  abundance of each
    species is recorded on some sort of
    logarithmic scale (e.g. "1 for present,
    3 for frequent,  5 for common,  etc.).
    The sums of these abundances in each
    saprobic level are plotted on graphs,
    the two most polluted zones showing as
    negative and others as positive.  Or,  the
    various saprobic levels are given
    numerical values [1 for oligosaprobic
    (clean), 2 for/3-mesosaprobic,  etc.]
    and the rating  for each species is
    multiplied by its abundance number.
    The sum of all these products divided
    by the sum of all the frequencies gives
    a "saprobic index" for the locality.
    Clearly the higher this number, the
    worse the water quality in terms of
    organic pollution. In a similar way the
    so-called "relative  Belastung" (relative .
    load) is calculated by expressing the
    sums of all the abundances of organisms-
    characteristic of the two most-polluted
    zones  as a percentage of the sum of all
    abundances. Then  100 percent is
    completely polluted water,  and clean  •
    localities will  give a low number.

 E  Weaknesses of the Saprobic System

    There are various elaborations of these
    methods, such as sharing of species
    between zones  and taking account of
    changes in base-line as  one passes
    downstream.  None  of them,  however,
    eliminates the  basic weaknesses of the
    system nor the fact  that, as Caspers
    and Schulz (1960) point out,  there is
    little agreement between the various
         authors in the assignment of species to
         the different levels.  Therefore, one
         gains a number or a figure that looks
         precise and is  easily understood, but
         it is based on very dubious foundations.

     F   Comparative North American Systems

         Similar systems are indigenous to
         North America, but were independently
         evolved.

         1   Wurtz (1955) and Wurtz and Dolan
             (1960) describe a  system whereby
             animals are divided into sensitive-
             to-pollution and non-sensitive
             (others are ignored), and also into
             burrowing, sessile, and foraging
             species (six classes).
     BSFP BSFP BSFP BSFP BSFP BSFP BSFP BSFP BSFP
                                             e/28/48
                                       RECWRT DEGRAD.
  IOO
Figure 1. Histograms, based on selected organisms, illustrating stream
  reaches of clean, degradation, septic, and recovery conditions [after
  Wurfi]  (22)
             Numbers of these species rep-
             resented are plotted for each station
             as six histograms on the basis of
             percentage of total number of
             species.  If the constitution of the
             fauna from control stations or from
             similar localities is known, it is
             possible to express numerically
             "biological depression" (i.e.,
             percentage reduction in total
13-6

-------
               The Interpretation of Biological Data with Reference to Water Quality
number of species), "biological
distortion  (changes in pro-
portions of tolerant and non-tolerant
species), and "biological skewness"
(changes  in the ratios  of the three
habitat classes).  Such results  must,
of course, be evaluated, and the
definition of tolerance is quite
subjective; but the method.has the
advantages of simplicity and depend-
ence on control data.  Like the
Saprobiensystem, however, it can
have no universal validity. It also
suffers from the fact that it takes
no account of numbers; a single
specimen, which may  be there  by
accident, carries as much weight
as a dense population.

Patrick (1949) developed a similar
system in which several clean
stations on the water body being
investigated are chosen, and the
average number of  species is deter-
mined occurring in each of seven
groups of taxa chosen  because of
their supposed reaction to pollution.
These are then plotted as seven
columns of equal height, and data
from other stations are plotted on
the same scale; it is assumed that
stations differing markedly from the
controls will show biological
imbalance in that the columns will be
of very unequal heights.  Number is
indicated by double  width in any
column containing species with an
unusual number of individuals.
I have already questioned the use-
fulness of this method of presentation
(Hynes 1960), and doubt whether it
gives anymore readily assimilable
data than simple tabulation; it does
however, introduce the concept of
ecological imbalance.
200:


130
   AA
                    ZOO


                    190
             23

             II
.Ill
44i
                               SEMI-HEALTHY
II
           i.

                           3
                              VERY POLLUTED
Figure 2. Histograms, based on selected organisms, illustrating healthy,
  semi-healthy, polluted, and very polluted stations in Conestoga
  Basin, Pa. [ after Patrick ] (22)
        TABLE 3 —Classification of Groups
            of Organisms Shown in Figure2
 I     Blue-green algae; green algae of the genera Stigeoc/onium, Spi-
       rogyra, and Tribonema; the bdelloid rotifers plus Cephafodeffa
       megafocephafo and Proo/es decipiens
 II     Oligochaetes, leeches, and pulmonate snails
 III     Protozoa
 IV     Diatoms, red algae, and "most of the green algae"
 V '    All rotifers not included in Group I, clams, gill-breathing snails,
       and tricladid flatworms
 VI     All insects and Crustacea
VII     All fish
         Beak  (1964),  another author,
         recognized the need for a concise
         expression of pollution based on
         biological information.  Toward
         this end, he developed a method of
         biological scoring which is based on
         the frequency of occurrence of
         certain macroscopic invertebrates
         obtained from 6 years of study on
         one river.  It will be noted that the
         Biological Score is a modification
         and expansion of Beck's Biotic
         Index.
                                                                                13-7

-------
   The Interpretation of Biological Data with Reference to Water Quality
           The indicator organisms are
           divided into three categories:
           Group I contains the pollution -
           tolerant species; Group II comprises
           those species which are facultative
           with respect to pollution; and
           Group III  contains the pollution-
           intolerant forms. Each group is
           assigned a weighted score that can
           be allotted to field samples  on the
           following  basis:

           a    Normal  complement of  Group III
                scores 3 points.

           b    Normal  complement of  Group II
                scores 2 points.

           c    Normal  complement of  Group I
                scores 1 point.

           The scores are additive; thus an  .
           unpolluted stream will have a
           Biological Score of 6. If only
           pollution-tolerant forms are found,
           the score will be 1.   If no organisms
           are found, the score  will be zero.
           Furthermore, a score of, 1 or 2
           points could be allotted to Group in
           when less than the normal com-
           plement is present.   Group  II could
           be treated in a similar manner.
           This scoring device correlated well
           with the biological oxygen demand,
           dissolved oxygen; and solids content
           of the receiving water. Beak also
           related his scoring device to the
           fisheries  potential.  This relation-   :
           ship is shown in Table 4]


                     TABLE 4
TBNTATIVE RELATIONSHIP OF THE BIOLOGICAL SCORE TO THE FISHUIES
        It has long been known that
        : ecologically severe habitats con-
        tain fewer species than normal
        habitats and that 'the few species
        that can survive the severe con-
        ditions  are often very abundant as
        they lack competitors.  Examples
        of this are the countless millions
        of Artemia and Ephydra in saline
        lakes and the  Tubifex tubifex in
        foul mud.  This idea has often been
        expressed in terms of diversity,
        which is some measure of numbers
        of species divided by number of
        specimens collected.  Clearly,
        such a parameter is larger the
        greater the diversity,  and hence
        the normality of the habitat.
        Unfortunately, though as the
        number of species in any habitat
        is fixed, it also decreases as
        sample size increases so no index
        of diversity has any absolute value
        (Hairston 1959).  If a definite
        sample size is fixed, however, in
        respect to numbers of organisms
        identified, it is possible to arrive
        at a constant index.
POTENTIAL (after Beak,
1964) (30)
Pollution status Biotie index Fisheries potential
Unpolluted 6
Slight to moderate pollution 5 or 4
Moderate pollution 3
Moderate to heavy pollution 2
Heavy pollution 1
Severe pollution, usually toxic 0
All normal fisheries for type of
water well developed
Most sensitive fish species re-
duced in numbers or missing
Only coarse fisheries maintained
11 fish present, only those with
high toleration of pollution
Very little, if any, fishery
No fish
       1     .     10          20
               Miles from source
Figure 3.  Zooplankton species diversity
per thousand individuals encountered in
marine systems affected by waste waters
from petrochemical industrial wastes.
The  vertical lines indicate seasonal
variations. (30)
   13-8

-------
                        The Interpretation of Biological Data with Reference to Water Quality
        Patrick et al. (1954). in effect used
        this concept in a study of diatom
        species growing on slides suspended
        in water for fixed periods.  They
        identified 8000 specimens per
        sample and plotted the results as
        number of species per interval
        against number of specimens per
        species on a logarithmic scale.
        This method of plotting gives a
        truncated normal curve  for a wide
        variety of biotic communities.
        In an ordinarily diverse habitat the
        mode is high and the curve short;
        i.e., many species occur in small
        numbers and none is very abundant.
        In a severe habitat the mode is low
        and the curve long; i. e.,there  are
        few rare species and a few with
        large numbers.  This, again,  seems
        to me to be an elaborate way of
        presenting data and to involve  a lot
        of unnecessary arithmetic.
l-Z  2-4  4-8  8-16 16-32 32-64 64-128 128- 256-  512- 1C24- 2C4S- 4036-
                       256 512  1024 2048 40% 8192
            Number of individuals per species
 Figure 4.  A graphic comparison of diatom
 communities from two different environ-
 ments.  (After Patrick et al., 1954)  (30)


    6    Diversity indices vs tabulated data

         Allanson (1961) has applied this
         method to  the invertebrate faunas
         of streams in South Africa and has
         shown, as has Patrick for diatoms,
         that the  log normal curve is flatter
         and longer for polluted stations;
         the difference, however,  is not so
         apparent that it does not need
    exposition.  Here, again, I would
    suggest that tabulated data are just
    as informative.  Indeed I would go
    further and say that  tabulated data
    are essential in the present state
    of our knowledge.  We are learning
    as we go along and if the details of
    the basic findings are concealed by
    some sort of arithmetical manip-
    ulation they cannot be re-interpreted
    in the light of later knowledge,  nor
    are they preserved in the store of
    human knowledge.  This point
    becomes particularly clear when
    one examines some of the early
    studies that include tables.
    Butcher (1946) requotes a con-
    siderable amount of data he
    collected from studies of various
    English rivers during the thirties;
    they are not only clear and easy to
    follow,  but they are  also informative
    about the generalities of pollution
    in a way that data  quoted only
    within the confines of some
    particular  system are not.

7   Examples of tabulated data( Table 5)

    Simple tabulation of biological data
    in relation to water  quality,  either
    in terms of number  of organisms,
    percentage composition of the biota,
    some arbitrary abundance scale,
    or as histograms, has been
    effectively practiced in many parts
    of the world:  in America (Gaufin
    and Tarzwell  1952,  Gaufin 1958),
    Africa (Harrison 1958 and 1960,
    Hynes and  Williams 1962).  Europe
    (Albrecht 1954,  Kaiser 1951,
    Hynes 1961,  Hynes and Roberts  ••
    1962), and New Zealand (Hirsch  ,
    1958) to cite a few.  These tabu-
    lated data are easy to follow, are j
    informative to the expert reader, i
    and conceal no facts. Although the
    non -biologist  may find them tedious,
    he need only read the explanatory
    paragraphs.   It is a delusion to
    think that it is possible to reduce ',
    biological data to simple numerical
    levels. At best,  these  can only be
    produced for limited situations and
                                                                                   13-9

-------
The Interpretation of Biological Data with Reference to Water Quality
                  TABLE 5

QBOAHiae
Eoothannium
Dendroaoma
Gpongllla fragilia
Trochoapongilla leidjrl
Unidentified Sponge
Cordylophon lacuatrto
Dugeala tigrloa
Urnatalla gracilis
Paludicella articulate,
Frederlcella, tultana
Prlatina
Rale commmla
Paranoia
Unidentified Leech
Unidentified Beetle
Coaoborua punctlpenala
BydrOboenua ep. A
Crlcotopua blcinctua
Unidentified Tendipedini
HarniBchie, ap. A
Tendlpea nervoaua
Tendipea modes tua
Poljpedilum ap. B
CeaopeectA exlgua
Tryccrythodea
Stenoaene,
Atbrlpaodee
Potamrta flam
Cheumatopayche
PejcbcHrtldBe Ge'mia A •
Perrlaaia ahlnekii
Quadruia ap.
Quadrula tiiberculata '
Corblcula flimVTB
TOTAL

?06.
left
P
C
C

5
C
C
C



31
1
59
1
51
k
152

1 nowe
mid


7

C



»>7
5
14

* •>•
1
22
1
9O
298
r Unr
right



2
C


1
5
2
16
2

2
a.
5
56


left

C
P
k
C
r
i


9
7
5
1
1
2
-U
141
It
30
b
11
261

2OT •*
•Id

F
A
k
P
»



1
117
23
U
12
3

5
5k

229
B71

rlstt i


A
6
F
1


68
l
2
15
7
w'

U>
17 .-
l>3
92
33
1
•2
!•
381


left



Vt
F
F
1


1
1
. 1
3
1
1
19
2
11
7
1
• 77
llil
1
P01.1
nil

A
A



7


26
1
8
2
Ito

131
3
30
l'l
5
'7'
153

right
F


19
F
F

1

Ii
10

S3*
11
«
21 '
1
19
7 '
1.3.7

                                             •y
                                             -,»,
abundant
Pickwick Tailwater
                                  (35)  .
  r - rev C - ccnvm A -
  Benthos from
        even then they need verbal exposition;
        at worst, they give a spurious im-
        pression of having absolute validity.
           •-•-.              •:-•'*:  •     -"  •*
    8   Comparison of stations

        My final point in this section con-
        cerns comparisons.  It is claimed
        that the German system,  in  effect,
        measures an absolute state,  a
        definite level of water quality.  We
        have seen that this is not a tenable
        claim.  In the other systems, by
        and large,  the need to establish
        local control stations at which to
        measure the normal or "natural"
        biotic conditions is accepted, and
       , then other areas are compared with
        this supposed norm.  This is,  of
        course not always possible as there
        may remain no unaffected area, or
        no unaffected area that is, with
        respect to such  factors as current,
     nature of substratum, etc.,
     sufficiently similar to act as a
     base-line  for data.  Nevertheless,
     basically.,  these systems can be
     used.to compare stations and thus
     to assess changes  in water quality. '
     In doing this, they can all be used
     mbre or less successfully, but I
     maintain that a table is just as use-
     ful as an elaborate analysis,  and
     I believe that the table.should be
     included with whatever is done.
     For a particular situation, however,
i    it is often possible to distill the data
.-    into a single figure as a measure of
     similarity between stations.

[•Q   Coefficients of  similarity

     Burlington (1962) and Dean and Bur-
     lington (1963) have recently proposed
     an entirely objective means of doing
     this, which involves simple arith-
     metical manipulation.  In his system,
;     a "prominence  value" is  calculated
     for each species at each  station.
     This is a product of its density and
     some function of its frequency in
     samples, but the details  of this
     calculation can be altered to suit
     any particular situation.   Then a
     coefficient of similarity between
     each pair of stations can be calcu-
     lated by dividing twice the sum of
     the lower prominence values of taxa
     that the two stations have in common
     by the sum of all the prominence
     values  of both stations.   Identical
     stations will then have a coefficient
     of similarity of 1:00; this coefficient
     will be lower the more the stations
     differ from one another.   This is an
     easy way to compare stations in an
     entirely unbiased way and as such
     may satisfy the need for  numerical
     exposition; however, it tells one
     nothing about why  the localities are
     different and like all the  other more
     or less numerical methods of pre-
     senting data has no absolute value.
     Moreover, it still leaves unanswered
     the fundamental question of how
     different is "different? "
13-10

-------
                       The Interpretation of Biological Data with Reference to Water Quality
                                         TABLE 6
•^ Clean
4 '•
g> WATER QUALITY (high multiple use indicated^
*"* A. Jv
c /| Organisms in Order of Tendency to Disappear as PS
g_ V . • Degree of Pollution Increases *
Types of
Organisms
Present
Plecoptera
nymph
present
Ephemeroptera
nymph
present
Trichoptera
larvae
present
Gammaridae
present
Asellus and/or
Ltrceus
present
Tubificid worms,
Tendipes . and
Cricotopus
blcinctus
(one or more of
these groups)
All above types
absent
BIOTIC INDEX
. Variety Present
More than one species
One species only
More than one species
jf
One species only
More than one species
One species only *
All above species absent
All above species absent
All above species absent
Some organisms such as
Eristalis tenax not requiring
dissolved oxygen may be present
V Total Number of Groups
Present •
0-1.
—
— '
~
—
—
4
3
2
1
0
2-5
Bio
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
2
1
6-10
Inde
8
7
7
6
6
5 __,
5
4
3
2
11-15
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
4
~
16+
10
9
9-*
8
8
7
7
6

—
*Stenonema nepotellum excluded           10* main stream reservoirs and west Tennessee streams
* Stenonema nepotellum (Ephem.)  is  counted in this section, for the purpose of classification.
       V  ONE FOR EACH KNOWN SPECIES 'IN THESE GROUPS:
               Platyhelminthes
               Hirudinea
               Mollusca
               Crustacea
               Plecoptera
               Dlptera (excluding specific ones listed below)
               Coleoptera
               Neuroptera (
          ONE FOR EACH GROUP.  REGARDLESS OF NUMBER OF SPECIES, ETC.:
               Annelida excluding Naididae
               Naididae
               Each Mayfly  genera  (excluding Stenonema nepotellum)
               Stenonema nepotellum
               Each Trichoptera  family
               Chironomidae  (excluding specific ones listed below)
               Chironomus  riparlus and plumpsus and Crtcotopus bicinctus.
               Family Simuliidae
adapted from Trent  River Board - Tennessee Stream Pollution Control Board 8/66 RMS
                                                                                           13-11

-------
  The Interpretation of Biological Data With Reference to Water Quality
IV   THE PROBLEMS OF  SAMPLING

  The systems outlined above are all based on
  the assumption that it is possible to  sample
  an aquatic, habitat with  some degree of
  accuracy;  this is a  dubious  assumption,
  however,  when applied  to biological data.
  From what has been said about the com-
  plexity of  biological reactions to. the  various
  factors in the environment,  and from the
  obvious  fact that  rivers especially are a
  mosaic of • microhabitats,  it is  clear that to
  achieve  numerical accuracy or even some
  limits of confidence considerable numbers
  of samples need to be taken.   Indeed, even
  in so  apparently unvaried a habitat as a
  single riffle, Needham  and Usinger (1956).
  showed that a very  large number of samples
  would be necessary to give  significant
  numerical data.

  A   Representative  Sampling
      There is  a limit to the number of sam-
      ples that  can reasonably be taken and,
      anyway,  it is desirable to sample many
      different types of habitat  so as  to get
      as broad  as  possible  an estimate of the
      biota.  -
-------
                        The Interpretation of Biological Data with Reference to Water Quality
V    CONCLUSIONS

 It may appear from the previous sections
 that my attitude to this problem is entirely
 obstructionist.  This is far from being so.
 Water quality is as much biological phenom-
 enon as it is a chemical or physical one;
 often what we want to know about water is
 almost exclusively biological -- will it smell
 nasty, is it fit to drink, can one bathe in it,
 etc?  I suggest, therefore, that it is desirable
 to organize water monitoring programs that
 will tell one what one wants to know.  There
 is no point in measuring everything biolog-
 ical, just as there is no point in performing
 every possible chemical analysis; what is
 measured should be related to local conditions.
 It would be a waste of time to measure
 oxygen content in a clean mountain stream;
 we know it to be high,  and it becomes worth
 measuring only if we suspect that it may
 have been lowered by pollution.  Similarly,
 there is  little point in studying the plankton
 in such a stream; we know it only reflects
 the benthic flora.  In a lake or in a slow
 river, on the other hand, if our interest in
 the water lies in its potability, records of
 the plankton are of considerable importance
 as changes in plankton are, in fact, changes
 in the usability of the water.

 A   Periphyton arid Benthos Studies

     For long-term studies, especially for
     the recording of trends or changes
     induced by pollution, altered drainage,
     agricultural poisons,  and other havoc
     wrought by man, one can expect in-
     formative results from two principal
     techniques:  First, we can study
     microscopic plant and animal growth
     with  glass slides placed in the water for
     fixed periods; second,  we can obtain
     random samples of the benthic fauna.
     The algae and associated microfauna
     tell one a good deal about the nutrient
     condition of the water and the changes
     that occur in it, and the larger b'enthic
     fauna reveal changes in the trophic
     status, siltation due to soil erosion,
     effects of insecticides and other poisons,
     etc.
 B   Varying Levels of Complexity

     The study of growths on glass slides is
     reasonably skilled work, but can easily
     be taught to technicians; like chemical
     monitoring, such study needs to be
     done fairly often. Sampling the benthos
     is more difficult and,  as explained
     above, needs expert handling; unlike
     most other monitoring programs,
     however,  it need be done only in-
     frequently, say, once or twice a year.
     Inevitably sampling methods  will vary
     with type of habitat; in each case,  the
     question will arise as to whether it is
     worth looking at the fish also.  It is
     here that the biologist must exercise
     judgment in devising and carrying out
     the sampling program.

' C   Data Interpretation

     Judgment is also needed in the inter-
     pretation of the data.  It is for this
     reason I maintain that it should all be
     tabulated so that it remains available
     for reassessment or comparison with
     later surveys.  If need be, some sort
     of numerical format can be prepared
     from the data for ad hoc uses,  but it
     should never become a substitute for
     tabulations.  Only in this way can we
     go on building up our knowledge.
     Perhaps some day we shall be able to
     pass all this  information into a com-
     puter,  which will then be able to
     exercise better judgment than the
     biologist.  I hope this will happen,  as
     computers are better able to remember
     and to cope with complexity than men.
     It will not, however, pension off the
     biologist.  He will .still be needed to
     collect and identify  the samples.
     I cannot imagine any computer wading
     about on rocky riffles nor persuading
     outboard motors and mechanical grabs
     to operate from the unstable confines"
     of small boats.  We shall still need
     flesh and blood biologists long after the
     advent of the hardware water chemist,
     even though,  with reference to my
     earlier analogy, a Tokyo University
                                                                                     13-13

-------
 The Interpretation of Biological Data with Reference to Water Quality
    computer recently outpointed 10 veteran
    medicals in diagnosing brain tumors and
    heart disease.  It should be pointed out,
    however, that the computer still had to be
    fed with information, so we are still
    a long way from the hardware general
    practitioner.  I believe though that he is
    likely to evolve before the hardware
    biologist; after  all, he studies only one
    animal.
 REFERENCES
 1  Albrecht,  M. L.  Die Wirkung der
       Kaliabwasser auf die Fauna der
       Werra  and Wipper.  Z. Fisch. N.
       3:401-26.  1954.
F.
 2  Allanson,  B.  R. Investigations into the
       ecology of polluted inland waters in
       the Transvaal.  Part I.  Hydrobiologia
       18:1-94.  1961.

 3  Bartsch, A. F. and Ingram, W.  M.
       Biological Analysis of Water Pollution
       in North America.  Verb.  Internat.
       Verein. Limnol.   16:788-800.  1968.

 4  Beak, T. W., de Courval,  C.  and
       Cooke, N. E. Pollution monitoring
       and prevention by use of bivariate
       control charts.  Sew.  Industr.
       Wastes 31:1383-94.  1959.

 5  Beck, W.  M., Jr.  The Use and Abuse of
       Indicator Organisms.  Transactions
       of a Seminar on Biological Problems
       in Water Pollution.  Cincinnati.  1957.

 6  Burlington, R. F.  Quantitative Biological
       Assessment of Pollution.  J. Wat.
       Poll. Contr. Fed.  34:179-83.  1962.

 7  Butcher, R.  W.  The Biological  Detection
       of Pollution.  J. Inst. Sew. Purif.
       2:92-7.  1946.

 8  Cairns,  John, Jr.  et al.  A Preliminary
       Report on Rapid Biological Information
       Systems for Water  Pollution Control.
       JWPCF.  42(5):685-703.  1970.

 9  Caspers, H. and Schulz, H.  Studien
       zur Wertung der Saprobiensysteme.
       Int. Rev.  ges. Hydrobiol.  45:535-65.
       1960.

10  Dean, J. M. and Burlington,  R.  F.
       A Quantitative Evaluation of Pollution
       Effects on Stream Communities.
       Hydrobiologia 21:193-9.   1963.
11  Ferdjingstad, E.  Taxonomy and
      Saprobic Valency of Benthic Phyto-
      microorganisms. • Inter. Revue der
      Ges.  Hydrobiol. 50(4):475-604.  1965.

12  Ferdjingstad, E.  Pollution of Streams
      Estimated by Benthal Phytomicro-
      organisms.   I.  A System Based on
      Communities of Organisms and
      Ecological Factors.  Int.  Revue ges.
      Hydrobiol. 49:63-131.

13  Gaufin, A. R.  The Effects of Pollution
      on a Midwestern Stream.   Ohio J.
      Sci. 58:197-208.  1958.

14  Gaufin, A. R.  and Tarzwell,  C.  M.
      Aquatic Invertebrates as Indicators
      of Stream Pollution.  Pub. Hlth.
      Rep.  67:57-64.  1952.

15  Hairston, N. G.  Species Abundance and
      Community Organization.   Ecology
      40:404-15.  1959.

16  Harrison, A. D.  The Effects of Sulphuric
      Acid Pollution on the Biology of
      Streams in the Transvaal, South
      Africa.  Verb. Int. Ver. Limnol.
      13:603-10.  1958.

17  Harrison, A. D.  The role of River Fauna
      in the Assessment of Pollution.
      Cons. Sci. Afr. Sud Sahara Pub.
      64:199-212.  1960.

18  Hirsch,  A.   Biological Evaluation of
      Organic Pollution of New Zealand
      Streams.  N.Z. J. Sci. 1:500-53.
      1958.

19  Hynes, H. B. N.  The Biology of
      Polluted Waters.  Liverpool.  1960.

20  Hynes, H. B. N.  The Effect of Sheep-
      dip Containing the Insecticide BHC
      on the Fauna of a Small Stream.
      Ann.  Trop.  Med.  Parasit.
      55:192-6.  1961.

21  Hynes, H. B. N. and Roberts, F.W.
      The Biological Effects of Detergents
      in the River Lee,  Hertfordshire.
      Ann.  Appl.  Biol. 50:779-90.   1962.

22  Hynes, H. B. N. and Williams, T. R.
      The Effect of DDT on the  Fauna of
      a Central African Stream. Ann. Trop.
     • Med.  Parasit.  56:78-91.  1962.

23  lilies, J.  Die Lebensgemeinschaft des
      Bergbaches.  Wittenberg-Luther stadt.
      1961a.
   13-14

-------
                           The Interpretation of Biological Data with Reference to Water Quality
24  lilies, J.  Versuch einer allgemeiner
      biozonotischen Gliederung der
      Fliessgewasser.  Int.  Rev.  ges
      Hydrobiol.  46:205-13.  1961b.

25  Ingram, W.  M., Mackenthun, K.  M., and
      Bartsch,  A.  F. Biological Field
      Investigative Data for Water Pollution
      Surveys.  USDI, FWPCA Pub.  WP-13,
      139 pages.  1966.

26  Kaiser,  E. W.  Biolgiske, biokemiske,
      bacteriologiske samt hydrometriske
      undersogelser af Poleaen 1946  og
      1947.  Dansk.  Ingenforen.  Skr.
      3:15-33.  1951.

27  Keup, Lowell E., Ingram, W.  M., and
      Mackenthun, K. M.  Biology of Water
      Pollution. USDI.  FWPCA CWA-3,
      290 pages.  1967.

28  Kolkwitz,  R. Oekologie der Saprobien.
      Uber die Beziehungen der Wasser-
      organismen zur Ummelt.  Schr.
      Reihe ver Wasserhyg.   4:64 pp. 1950.

29  Liebmann, H.  Handbuch der Frischwasser
      und Abwasserbiologie.  Munich.  1951.

30  Maciel,  Norma C. Levantamento
      hipotetico de um rio com rtde
      Surber.  Inst.  de Engenharia Sanitaria,
      Rio de Janeiro, Brazil.  Pub. No. 58,
      96 pages.  1969.  (Zones of pollution
      in a Brazilian river.)

31  Mackenthun, K.  M.  The Practice of
      Water Pollution Biology.  USDI.
      FWPCA.  281 pp.   1969.

32  Needham,  P. R. and Usinger,  R.  L.
      Variability in the Macrofauna of a
      Single Riffle in Prosser Creek,
      California,  as indicated by the  Surber
      Sampler. Hilgardia 24:383-409.  1956.

33  Olson,  Theodore A.,  and Burgess, F. J.
      Pollution and Marine Ecology.  Inter-
      science Publishers. 364 pages.  1967.

34  Patrick, R.  A Proposed Biological
      Measure  of Stream Conditions, based
      on a Survey of the Conestoga Basin,
      Lancaster County,  Pennsylvania.
      Proc. Acad. Nat.  Sci. Phila.
      101:277-341.  1949.

35  Patrick, R.  A Study of the Numbers and
      Kinds of Species found in Rivers in
      Eastern United States.  Proc. Acad.
      Nat.  Sci. Phila. 113:215-58.  1961.
36  Patrick, R.,  Hohn, M. H. and Wallace,
      J. H.  A New Method for Determining
      the Pattern of the Diatom Flora.
      Not. Nat. Phila. Acad. Sci.  259.
      12 pp.  1954.

37  Patrick, Ruth.  Benthic Stream Com-
      munities.  Amer. Sci. 58:546-549.
      1970.

38  Richardson, R. E.  The Bottom Fauna of
      the Middle Illinois River, 1913-1925;
      Its Distribution, Abundance, Valuation
      and Index Value in the Study of Stream
      Pollution.  BuU. 111.  Nat. Hist. Surv.
      17:387-475.  1929.

39  Sinclair,  Ralph M., and Ingram,
      William M.  A New Record for the
      Asiatic Clam in the United States-'-
      The Tennessee River.  Nautilus
      74(3):114-118.   1961.  (A typical
      benthos faunal list for a large inland
      unpolluted river, with an eroding
      substrate.)

40  Sladecek,  Vladimir. Water Quality
      System.  Verh.  Internat.  Verein.
      Limnol.  16:809-816.  1966.

41  Sladecek,  V.  Zur  biologischen
      Gliederung der hoheren Saprobi-
      tatsstufen.  Arch. Hydrobiol.
      58:103-21.  1961.

42  Sladecek,  Vladimir. The Ecological and
      Physiological Trends in the Sapro-
      biology.  Hydrobiol.  30:513-526.
      1967.

43  Tumpling, W.  V.   Probleme, Methoden
      und Ergenbnisse biologischer
      Guteuntersuchungen an Vorflutern,
      dargestellt am Beispiel der Werra.
      45:513-34.  1960.

44  Whipple,  G. C., Fair. G. M.  and
      Whipple,  M. C.  The Microscopy of
      Drinking Water.  New York.  1947.

45  Woodiwiss, F. S.  The Biological System
      of Stream Classification used by the
      Trent River Board.   Chem. and Ind.,
      pp. 443-447.  March 1964.

46  Wurtz, C. B. and Dolan, T.  A Biological
      Method Used in the Evaluation of Effects
      of Thermal Discharge in the Schuylkill
      River.  Proc. Ind. Waste Conf. Purdue.
      461-72.   1960.
                                                                                     13-15

-------
 The Interpretation'of Biological Data with Reference to Water Quality
47  Zimmerman, P.  Der Einfluss auf die
      Zusammensetzung der Lebensgemein-
      schaften in Experiment.  Schweiz. Z.
      Hydrol.  24:408-11.  1962.

48  Hynes, H. B. N.  The Ecology of Flowing
      Waters in Relation to Management.
      JWPCF.  42(3):418-424.  1970.

49  Hynes, H. B. N.  The Ecology of Running
      Waters.   Univ. of Toronto Press. 555 pp.
      1970.

50  Scott, Ralph D.  The Macro-invertebrate
      Biotic Index - A Water Quality Measure-
      ment and Natural Continuous Stream
      Monitor for the Miami River Basin.
      17 pp.  The Miami Conservancy District,
      Dayton, OH 45402.   1969.

 51 Cooke, Norman E.  Stream Surveys
      Pinpoint Pollution.  Industrial Water
      Engineering, p.  31-33.  Sept.  1970.
This outline was prepared by Dr. H. B. N.
Hynes, Chairman, Department of Biology,
University of Waterloo,  Ontario,  Canada.


Reprinted from: Symposium Environmental
Measurements Valid Data and Logical   .
Interpretation,  July. 1964, PHS Publication
No. 999-AP-15, ppi,  289-298.


Figures, tables, additional references,  and
headings are editorial changes by Ralph
Sinclair, Aquatic Biologist,  National Training
Center,  Water Programs Operations,  EPA,
Cincinnati, OH 45268.
   13-16

-------
                       EFFECTS OF POLLUTION ON AQUATIC LIFE '
I  INTRODUCTION

A  The effluent from any given industrial
   plant may be combined with municipal
   sewage, and/or wastes from other
   industries.   This may occur in the
   sewerage system or in a natural body
   of water.

   1  Toxic wastes  may inhibit biota  of
      treatment plant as well as life in
      receiving stream.

   2  Organic  wastes may simply increase
      sewage-type load on plant and stream.

   3  The above effects may be reinforced
      or neutralized by a complex of
      industrial wastes.

B  The general overall character of a body
   of water may be  subtly changed over a
   period of time.
   The principle of limiting factors (see
   Figure 1) deals with the response of
   organisms to various factors in the
   environment.

   Liebig's Law of the Minimum (Figure 1)
   states that the  distribution of a species
   may be limited by one or more essential
   environmental factors which occur in
   minimal quantities.

   Shelford on the other hand pointed out in
   his Law of Tolerance (Figure 1) that there
   are also maximum values of most
   environmental factors which can be
   tolerated.  In between these two extremes
   there are ranges which may be called
   "optimum" for factors useful to the
   organism.  Purely deleterious factors
   on the other hand have a maximum tol-
   erable value, but no optimum.  The
   range between  the maximum concentration
   (greater than zero) which kills no orga-
   nism and the minimum concentration
    which kills all organisms is known as
    the "critical range."

    These principles apply to all aquatic life
    whether in a stream,  lake, estuary,  or
    treatment plant.  They are the basis for
    the control or regulation of biological
    conditions.
IE  INDIRECT TOXICITY: MODIFICATIONS
    OF THE ENVIRONMENT WHICH AFFECT
    AQUATIC LIFE

 A Deposition of inert precipitates and silt
    tends to smother bottom organisms.
    Contributing materials include silt or
    sand from erosion due to poor agricul-
    tural practices, rock flour or tailings
    from mining or quarry operations,  mica,
    coal washings,  sawdust and debris from
    lumbering, insoluble precipitates or
    complexes from chemical industries.

    1  Vulnerable organisms include
       important fish foods such as insect
       larvae and snails; also fish eggs,
       bottom-living algae such as diatoms,
       and many others.

    2  Physical injury to delicate membranes
       of eyes, and gills may also result.

    3  Inert suspended materials and dyes
       reduce light penetration, suppress
       photosynthesis and hence biological
       productivity. They also prevent game
       fish and other predators from seeing
       their prey, thereby reducing the
       efficiency of food utilization.
 The word  stream  should be interpreted in
 most cases to mean "river, " "lake, "
 "estuary, " etc.,  as applicable.
 BI. BIO. Ilk. 5. 71
                                   14-1

-------
Effects of Pollution on Aquatic Life
       CD
      .X
       o
    •8  8,
     «  "
     y  c
     §  §
     u
     tt
Liebig's Law
Shelfords Law
                  Extinction
                                              Extinction
                   Low
                                    Magnitude of Factor
                                              •High
                   Figure 1.  EFFECTS OF ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
   Wastes of significant heat content may
   change the "climate" of a body of water.
   Temperature may be higher or lower
   than normal.

   1 Abnormally low summer temperatures
     may prevent the reproduction of some
     of the typical inhabitants, on the other
     hand colder water forms such as trout
     may be enabled to survive.

   2 Abnormally high winter temperatures
     may encourage a rapid development
     of some species, thus for example,
     causing an early emergence of some
     insect followed by its death from normal
     winter temperatures.  Southern forms
     may also invade more northerly waters,
     sometimes leading to a year-round
     nuisance from flying swarms of adults
     such as caddis flies.

   3 Artificially produced high temperatures,
     often lack dependability. It  is dis-
     couraging for organisms to spend six
     days in summer temperatures in
     January, only to freeze to death over
     the weekend because no one  warned
     them that the plant would shut down!

   4 Excessively high summer temperatures,
     even for a few hours once a  year,
     probably represent the greatest tem-
     perature danger.  Some species  of fish
     can adjust to temperatures approaching
     1000 F, if the change takes place slowly.
                                   Each species however, has some
                                   maximum temperature above which
                                   it cannot survive (Figure 1).

                                   a  Quick temperature changes are
                                      fatal at much lower values.

                                   b  Lack of oxygen due to low solubility
                                      at high temperatures or from an
                                      increase in the rate of the BOD,
                                      also contributes greatly to high
                                      temperature mortalities.

                              C Oxygen-consuming wastes kill by depleting
                                the free dissolved oxygen resources.

                                1  Amount present, rather than percentage
                                   of saturation,  is usually more significant.

                                2  Minimum amounts rather than averages
                                   are most critical.

                                   a  Any species can survive something
                                      less than the optimum concentration
                                      of DO for a limited period of time.
                                      There is, however,  some concen-
                                      tration for any given temperature,
                                      which will eventually result in the
                                      death of that species.  Let us call
                                      this the "critical" DO.

                                   b  As the DO faUs below the critical
                                      concentration, survival time
                                      eventually drops to zero.
   14-2

-------
                                                        Effects of Pollution on Aquatic Life
       c  The absolute values of these thresh-
          olds vary with the species and other
          factors.  Five mg O_ per liter is
          often listed as a minimum permissible
          value to maintain a well-rounded •
          healthy population of fishes on a year-
          round basis.

       Low oxygen tensions may also increase
       the toxicity of certain chemicals.
  D pH
IV
       "pH" is a logarithmic expression of the
       hydrogen ion concentration in a solution.
       Hydrogen ions (H+) in certain concen-
       trations are toxic to aquatic life
       (as are also hydroxyl ions:  OH").
       Aquatic life in relative abundance and
       variety can be found in waters ranging
       from approximately pH 5 to 9;  Thriving
       communities including algae, insects,
       and fish have been studied in waters
       with a pH of at least 11.

       Many species of aquatic organisms can
       adjust to pH values over a wide range.
       Sudden change of any kind however can
       be fatal.

       Most metals and other toxic substances
       in dilute  solution tend to become less
       toxic at high pH values. A notable
       exception is ammonia.
POLLUTION WHICH RENDERS FISH OR
SHELLFISH UNUSABLE OR INTERFERES
WITH THEIR CAPTURE

Radioactivity at levels currently found in
our waters has not been observed to
adversely affect aquatic life itself.  It may
however,  be taken up with food materials
and render fish or fishery products unusable.

1  Radioactive  nuclides (forms of chemicals)
   are taken up by the plants (predominantly
   algae) in the processes of photosynthesis
   and other types of protoplasmic syn-
   thesis.  There is no selection between
   nuclides on the basis of radioactivity.
   2  As the chemicals originally assimi-
      lated by the algae are "eaten up the
      food chain" (from algae to inverte-
      brates to small fish to.large fish to
      man and other predators) their
      radioactivity moves along with them.

   3  Thus radioactivity is acquired by
      fishes essentially through food, and
      scarcely at all by direct assimilation
      or absorption.

   4  Plankton-feeding organisms such as
      herrings, oysters, and clams  acquire
      radioactivity directly from the algae
      on which they feed.  Since they con-
      centrate this food from large volumes
      of water, they may be much "hotter"
      than the surrounding water itself.

B  Fish may be repelled or driven out of an
   area by obnoxious chemicals.  This may
   simply result in their scarcity or absence
   from a given locale, or it may prevent
   their swimming up a river to spawn.  In
   this case the species would soon disappear
   and be lost to the community.

C  Color, odor, oil, floating scum,  bacterial
   slimes,  and other such materials tend to
   discourage sport fishing and interfere
   with gear used by commercial fisheries.

D  Sublethal concentrations of chemicals
   such as phenol, benzene,oil, 2-4-D,  etc.,
   may impart an unpleasant taste to fish
   flesh, even when present in very  dilute
   concentrations.  This is nearly as
   detrimental to the fisheries as a complete
   kill, and of course applies to shellfish
   as well as fin fish.

E  Minamata disease was first described
   from Minamata,  Japan,  as a disorder
   resulting from eating various  seafoods
   taken from Minamata Bay, Kyushu,
   Japan. The disease results from
   industrial toxicity,  in this case an organic
   mercury compound, transmitted to a wide
   variety of local marine seafood species.
   These organisms are not known to be
   affected,  but acting as "transvectors, "
                                                                                   14-3

-------
 Effects of Pollution on Aquatic Life
   pass the toxin along to predators or human
   consumers.  Over 30% mortality occurred
   in Minamata among people eating local
   seafood.

   1  It may be important to note that a fish
      kill was recently reported from a TVA
      lake in this country resulting from
      mercury leaching from corroded 50
      gallon drums used as floats by
      marinas.

   2  Bird and fish kills have recently
      occurred in Swedish lakes resulting
      from mercury compounds from pulp.
      mills. Levels in pike exceed the WHO
      standards for human consumption and
      the local population has been advised
      not to eat pike more than once a week!
      Cases of high mercury levels are increasing.
                                Acute toxicity can be evaluated by
                                means of the toxicity bioassay
                                technique and various modifications
                                (Figure 2).
   DIRECT TOXICITY:
   ORGANISM ITSELF
AFFECTS THE
Fish kills are often the result of direct
toxicity.  If this is sufficiently potent to kill
at once,  or within a few days,  it is called
acute, and is often observed as a "fish kill. "

Action that may require weeks or months to
be effective may be referred to as low "level,
cumulative, or chronic toxicity, and is more
often  observed as  simply a reduction of
productivity:  "Fishin1 ain't what it used to
be. "  Examples of chemicals often believed
to be  involved include:  acids,  alkalines,
ammonia, chlorine,  cyanides,  metals,
phenols,  solvents, sulfides,  synthetic organic
chemicals, oil field brines, pesticides,
herbicides,  detergents and others.

A  Acute toxicity may be so broadly effective
   that many forms of life are  affected at one
   time,  or it may be highly selective.  It
   may result from a low concentration of a
   highly toxic material or a high concentration
   of a relatively less toxic material.

   1   It is frequently encountered as a "slug"
      resulting from a dump or spill, followed
      by  normal, relatively non-toxic con-
      ditions as the mass of water containing
      the poison flows oh .downstream,  or is
      deflected by tidal movements.
        Increasing Concentration

        Figure 2 - Critical Range

C:  maximum concentration at which
no fish die,  C1:  minimum concen-
tration at which all die.  TLgo*.
50% tolerance limit (concentration
tolerable to 50% of the population)
for time t.
                          B  Chronic or low-level toxicity may change
                             the entire population balance.

                             1 Susceptible species of either fish or
                               fish food organisms may die off,
                               thereby permitting tolerant species
                               to flourish for lack of competition.

                             2 If algae and/or invertebrate food
                               organisms are killed off fish may die
                               or move out of the  area.

                             3 Weakened individuals are more
                               susceptible to attack by parasites and
                               'disease, such as the aquatic fungus
                               Saproleenia.

                             4 Reproductive  potential may be altered.
                               Eggs or fry may or may not be more
                               susceptible to toxic substances than
                               adults.

                             5 Host fish for mussel (unionidae) life
                               cycle may not survive.
 14-4

-------
                                                        Effects of Pollution on Aquatic Life
    6  The result may be a.slow and subtle
       alteration of the characteristics of a
       stream over an extended period.of time.

  C The specific physiological mechanisms
    involved are infinite in variety and but
    little known.  Included are such processes
    as enzyme inhibition as in the case with
    some of the pesticides, and over .stimu"
    lation of mucous membranes of the gills,
    leading to death by suffocation.

  D There are a number of excellent diagnostic
    techniques for the examination of dying
    fish, these  include pathogenic bacteria,
    parasites, some metals,  and certain
    pesticides.  None are routine but require
    specific handling and preservation tech-
    niques •

  E A recently developed procedure for
    protecting aquatic life from deleterious
    substances  is biomonitoring.  This is
    the continuous monitoring or surveillance
    of an effluent for toxicity by means of a
    system for  exposing living organisms
    (such as fish or invertebrates) to a con-
    tinuously flowing stream in a dilution just
    below the known danger point.  Should the
    toxicity of the substance increase the test
    organisms respond in some recognizable
    manner,  thus giving warning that correc-
    tive measures need to be initiated.
VI  MECHANISMS OF POLLUTION
    TOLERANCE AND SENSITIVITY

 The fact that some organisms are more
 resistant to pollution than others needs no
 emphasis.   The matter of "why?" and "how?"
 on the other hand, is quite another question.
 In some cases the answer is obvious, in
 others not.  In general we can say that  the
 adaptations of certain species enable them
 to resist certain types of natural conditions
 such as organic deposits or sand bars.  When
 man artificially creates conditions such as
 sludge banks, or sand bars,  organisms which
 can tolerate such conditions move in, survive,
  and often thrive.  Other forms are
  eliminated.
A  Organic pollution is essentially non-toxic.
   Its typical result as noted above is
   oxygen depletion, physical turbidity, and
   smothering blankets of sediment or sludge.

B  Devices and mechanisms for living in
   oxygen-poor or oxygen-free water include
   the following:

   1 Obtaining oxygen from the air by means
     of periodic trips or access to the
     surface.

     a   The snorkel tube of the rat-tailed
         maggot.

     b   Periodic trips of the mosquito
         larvae and Corixidae or water
         boatmen.  The mosquito takes air
         directly into its respiratory system,
         the water boatman into a trap or
         space beneath the wing covers,  as
         well as into a layer of air held by
         fine hairs  or "pile" all over its body.

     c   Behavior of the air breathing snails
         such as Physa which have an internal
         lung cavity.

     d   Insects which tap  into air tubes in
         aquatic plants.

     e   Fishes which gulp air at surface or
         breathe surface water.

   2 Special devices and behavior for
     respiration of water

     a   Hind intestine respiratory
         structures of dragonfly larvae
         permits respiration in silt-laden
         water.

     b   Movement  of gill covers and
         similar structures in isopods and
         certain insect groups maintains a
         current of water over respiratory
         organs.

     c   Body movements of chironomld
         larvae create water current in
         tibe.  Sludge worms
                                                                                      14-5

-------
Effects of Pollution on Aquatic Life
         and other annelids also create water
         movement by means of sinuous body
         movements.

   3  Physiological and behavioral adaptations
      to  endure low oxygen tensions.

      a  Forms possessing accessory
         respiratory pigments such as
         hemoglobin might be expected to
         be able to be able to extract the
         last vestige of  dissolved oxygen from
         the water.  Two groups famous for
         resisting low DO do have hemoglobin:
         the.-larvae  of certain Chironomid
         midge flies,  and small annelid worms
         such as sludge  worms, (it should be
         noted however, that the hemoglobin
         in each case is simply dissolved in
         the blood plasma, rather than being
         concentrated in special corpuscles
         as is the case in the more efficient
         vertebrate system.)

      b  The mere possession of hemoglobin
         however, does  not seem to assure
         tolerance of low DO (Walshe '47).
         Larvae of the midge Tanvtarsus SDP.
         have hemoglobin, but will not
         tolerate oxygen "poor waters.
         Hemoglobin-bearing Chironomus
         bathopilus  is moderately tolerant,
         and Chironomus plumosus is highly
         tolerant, however.

      c  During periods of low DO,  ChironomuB
         plumosus apparently respires carbo"
         hydrates as usual, but excretes
         excess lactic acid instead of accu-
         mulating it.

      d  Various species of Daphnia (micro-
         Crustacea) have been shown to
         accumulate hemoglobin in oxygen-
         poor waters but not in oxygen-rich
         waters (Fox '47). No clear adaptive
         significance has yet been proven
         however.

C  Advantageous Feeding Habits

   All highly organic pollution tolerant orga-
   nisms are scavengers, and hence find an
   abundance of food.  Most  are relatively
   defenseless and hence have normally high
   reproductive rate. The result in a
   polluted situation is thus usually an
   extreme abundance.

D  The reverse problem is why are intolerant
   species intolerant?

   1 A physiological requirement for higher
     oxygen levels is probably most basic.

   2 Turbidity would hamper any organisms
     employing sight in any way.

   3 Absence of light would suppress the
     growth of green algae, and hence also
     restrict the growth of algae feeders.

E  Inert silts by themselves have  many
   damaging effects such as abrasive or
   smothering action.

   Biological mechanisms for enduring inert
   silt  or  sand pollution are not numerous,
   and  consequently such locations are
   usually known as biological deserts.
   Since some life exists even in deserts
   however, a few forms may occasionally
   be found. In general they are typical sand
   or mud dwellers. Since the available
   food in such a substrate is at best of a
   very low order, inhabitants of these
   situations must either seek buried or
   trapped food particles or capture food
   from the passing waters.

   1 If there is no BOD involved,  and water
     and  oxygen circulate down into the
     deposit,  burrowing forms such as
     certain mayflies, annelid worms,
     ammocetes lamprey larvae,  micro-
     crustaceans, and others may burrow
     down to depths of two feet or more.
     Fish eggs normally deposited in gravel
     and  newly hatched larvae are also
     dependent on circulating water.   Such
     a population can be killed overnight by
     a layer of fine sediment or sludge which
     seals the surface to water circulation.

   2 Water or plankton feeders include
     clams and mussels which can move
     about freely in a soft, shifting bottom,
     thus keeping on top of silt or sand as
 14-6

-------
                                                  Effects of Pollution on Aquatic Life
   it accumulates.  If deposition is
   actively taking place,  however, there
   will probably be so much turbidity in
   the water that plankton (food) organisms
   are unable to live.  Under such cir~
   cumstances certain clams and snails
   have the ability to close the shell so
   tightly by means of valves or an
   operculum that  all contact is lost with
   the environment for extended periods,
   during which  CO_ tends to lower the
   rate  of body metabolism.  Organisms
   of this type have been reported to be
   dug up with sand and gravel and
   incorporated  into concrete products
   while still alive.  Emergence of a
   population of  asiatic clams (Corbicula)
   for example,  just as a big block of
   concrete is setting is said to be rough
   on contractors!

3  An interesting situation occasionally
   develops in estuaries where mud of
   moderate organic content is slowly
   deposited over oyster beds.  The
   oysters are unable to move,  but as
   they  grow, their shells tend to bend
   upward above the accumulating silt,
   and may grow to several inches in
   length while growing very little in
   width. Crowding brings about a similar
   reaction in the effort to avoid being
   buried.

Few generalizations can be offered
relative to toxic pollution except that
toxicity is relative, and all forms  do not
respond equally  to a given toxicant.

1  Few mechanisms of toleration can be
   listed, beyond the natural resistance
   that certain forms may have for a given
   condition. For example, some marine
   species may survive a salt concentration
   that is toxic to freshwater species.
   Over a period of several generations,
   some species may develop a genetic
   resistance to some toxicant such as
   insecticides in the same way that DDT-
   resistant strains of  houseflies have
   developed.  Copper  sulfate, and chlorine•
   resistant strains of  algae such as
   Cosmarium for  example, may develop
   in treated water supply reservoirs.
        Some bottom in-fauna organisms such
        as annelid worms may retreat down
        into burrows until a slug of undesirable
        water passes.

        Molluscs may close shells tightly for
        the same purpose. The metabolic
        rate is known to diminish with the
        increase of CO, inside the closed
        shell, thereby enabling them to
        remain tightly sealed for  extended
        periods  of time.
VII  EFFECTS OF LIFE HISTORY STAGES

  A  In order to survive in a polluted area,
     each life history stage of an indigenous
     organism must be able to survive in turn.

  B  If some given life history stage cannot
     tolerate conditions,  and the  species is
     present:

     1 Fortuitous changes may occur  at the
       proper time(s) to permit  survival of
       the more susceptible stages(s) or:

     2 Recruitment from less polluted areas
       may occur.

  C  Some examples of reproductive stages or
     procedures which might affect pollution
     sensitivity:

     1 Egg or egg-like stages are often
       enclosed in protective membranes,
       jelly masses, or cases.  May remain
       dormant until favorable conditions
       develop.

     2 Eggs may  be deposited in locations
       where they are less exposed to polluted
       water as:

          buried in the gravel,
          on the surface film,
          on rocks over the water moistened
             by spray,
          on mud surface near water,
          or in locations where maximum
             water circulation is encountered
             as at lip of waterfall.
                                                                                14-7

-------
   Effects of Pollution on Aquatic Life
         Eggs may require minimal DO due to
         low metabolic rate.

         Eggs deposited on or in bottom may be
         susceptible to smothering.

         Newly hatched larvae often continue to
         live on stored yolk material for a time.
         On beginning to take natural food, they
         may be killed by toxic content thereof,
         such as organochlorines.

         Some forms such as certain sludge
         worms commonly reproduce by
         (vegetative) fragmentation, hence
         avoiding egg and larva stages.
V1H   NATURA L SE LECTION A ND
      ACCLIMATIZATION TO POLLUTION

   A  Known biological mechanisms for selective
      breeding of pollution resistant strains
      operate  in nature among fishes as among
      other organisms.

      1  Studies of population genetics indicate
        that after some finite number of gen-
        erations of population stress (e.g.,
        exposure to a given pollutant),
        permanent heritable resistance may be
        expected to develop.

      2  If the environmental stress (or
        pollutant) is removed prior to the time
        that permanent resistance is developed
        in the population,  reversion to the
        non-resistant condition may occur within
        a relatively few generations.

      3  Habitats  harboring populations under
        stress in this manner are often marked
        with the dead bodies of the unsuccessful
        individuals.

   B  Individual organisms on the other hand can
      over a period of time (less than one life
      cycle)  develop a limited ability to tolerate
      different conditions, e.g., pollutants:

      1  With reference to all categories of
        pollutants both relatively facultative
        and obligate species are encountered
        (e.g., euryhaline vs stenohaline,
        eurythermal vs stenothermal).
   2  This temporary somatic acclimatization
      is not  heritable.

C  A given single-species collection or
   sample of living fishes may therefore
   represent one or more types of pollution
   resistance:

   1  A sample of an original population
      which  has been acclimated to a given
      stress in toto.

   2  A sample of the surviving portion of
      an originalpopulation, which has been
      "selected" by the ability to endure the
      stress.  The dead fish in a partial fish
      kill are that portion of the original
      population unable to endure the stress.

   3  A sample of a sub-population of the
      original species  in question which has
      in toto over  a period of several
      generations  developed a heritable
      stress resistance.

D  Any given multi-species field collection
   will normally contain  species illustrative
   of one  or more of the  conditions outlined
   above.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS:

Certain portions of this outline contain
material from a prior outline by Croswell
Henderson and revisions by R.  M. Sinclair.
REFERENCES

1  Cordone, A.J.  and Kelley, D.W.   The
      Influence of Inorganic Sediment on the
      Aquatic Life in Streams.  Calif. Fish
      and Game.   47:189-228.  No.2.   1961.

2  Ellis, M.M.   Detection and Measurement
      of Stream Pollution.  Bull.  22,  U. S.
      Bur. Fish:   also.  Bull. Burg.  Fish 48:
      356-437.  1937.

3  Foster, R.F. and Davis, J. J.   The
      Accumulation of Radioactive Sub-
      stances in Aquatic Forms, No. A/Conf.
      8/P/280.  U.S.A. International Conf.
      on Peaceful Uses  of Atomic Energy.
      pp.  1-7.  1955.
    14-8

-------
                                                      Effects of Pollution on Aquatic Life
 4  Ingram, W.M. and Towne, W.W.
       Stream Life Below Industrial Outfalls.
       Public Health Reports.   74:1059-1070.
       1959.

 5  Kurland,  Leonard.  The Outbreak of a
       Neurologic Disorder in Minimata,
       Japan, and its Relationship to the
       Ingestion of Seafood Contaminated by
       Mercuric Compounds.   Proc. Nat.
       Shell.  Sanlt. Workshop,   pp. 226-228.
       1961.

 6  Mackenthun, K. M. and Keup, L. E.
       Assessing Temperature Effects with
       Biology.  Proc. Am. Power Conf.
       Vol. 31.  pp. 335-343.    1969.

 7  Tarzwell,  C. M. and Gaufin,  R.R.  Some
       Important Biological Effects of Pollution
       Often Disregarded in Stream Surveys.
       Purdue Univ. Engr. Bull. Proceedings
       8th Ind. Waste  Conf. May 4, 5, and 6,
       1953.

 8  Tarzwell,  C. M.   Hazards of Pesticides
       to Fishes and the Aquatic  Environment.
       The Use and Effects of Pesticides.
       Proc.  of Symposium, Albany,  N.Y.
       Sept. 23,  1963.  N.Y. State Joint
       Legis. Comm.  on Nat. Resources,
      Albany, N.Y.   pp.  30-40.

 9  Vinson, S. B.,  Boyd,  C.E. and Ferguson,
       D. E.  Resistance to DDT in the
       Mosquito Fish Gambusia affinis Science.
       139:217-218.   January 18, 1963.

10  Walshe, Barbara M.   On the Function of
       Hemoglobin in Chironomus after Oxygen
       Lack.   Jour. Exp. Biol. Cambridge.
       124:329-342.   1947.
 2  Foster, R.F. and Davis, J.J.  Aquatic
      Life Water Quality Criteria.   Second
      Progress Report, Aquatic Life
      Advisory Committee,  Sewage and
      Ind.  Wastes,  28:678-690.   1956.

 3  Fox,  H. Munro.  Daphnia Hemoglobin.
      Nature.   London,   p. 431.
      September 27, 1947.

 4  Ingram, W.M. and Wastler, HI,  T.A.
      Estuarine and Marine Pollution.
      Selected Studies, U. S. DHEW, PHS,
      Robt. A. Taft Sanitary Engineering
      Center, Cincinnati, Ohio.   Technical
      Publication No. W6 1-04.

 5  Jackson, H.W. and Brungs, Wm. A.
      Biomonitoring of Industrial Effluents.
      Purdue Industrial Waste Conference,
      Layfayette, Indiana.  May 3-5,  1966.

 6  Rodhe,  W.   Limnology,  Social Welfare,
      and Lake Kinneret.   Int. Jour.
      Limnology, Vol. 17.  November 1969.

 7  Tennessee Valley Authority, Fish Kill
      in Boone Reservoir.  TVA Water
      Qual. Branch.  Chattanooga,  Tenn.
      1968.

 8  Robert A. Taft Sanitary Engineering
      Center.   Pesticides in Soil and Water.
      An annotated  Bibliography.  PHS
      Publication No. 999-WP-17.
      September 1964.

 9  Stewart, R. Keith, Ingram, William M.
      and Mackenthun, Kenneth.   Selected
      Biological References on Fresh and
      Marine Waters.   FWPCA Publication
      No. WP-23, pp. 126.   1966.
 SUPPLEMENTARY READING

 1  Bullock, Glen L.  A Schematic Outline for
      the Presumptive Identification of
      Bacterial Diseases of Fish. Prog.  Fish
      Cult. 23(4):147-151.   1961.
10 Warren, Charles E.
      Pollution Control.
      434pp.  1971.
Biology and Water
W.B. Saunders Co.
 This outline was prepared by H.W. Jackson,
 Chief Biologist,  National Training Center,
 WPO, EPA, Cincinnati, OH 45268.
                                                                                   14-9

-------
          THE EFFECTS OF ORGANISMS ON POLLUTION AND THE ENVIRONMENT
 I  INTRODUCTION

 A Pollution is often studied as a factor
   affecting the biota, but it is equally
   important to recognize the environmental
   changes produced by the biota.

 B According to Westlake, under many
   conditions "..'.. the environment is almost
   as much a product  of the  community as the
   community is of the environment. "
II   SOM E ENVIRONM ENTA L EX AMP LE S

 A  Diatom Blooms

    "...Asterionella (an oil storage alga)
    produces an autotoxin (autoantibiosis)
    which will inhibit  itself, may stimulate or
    inhibit other species that store oil,  but
    always  stimulate algae that store  starch.
    For example, Asterionella may produce
    a bloom and inhibit itself, but stimulate
    a population of Synedra.  These oil
    storage  algae produce a substance that
    stimulates a starch-storing alga,
    Coelastrum. which may stimulate another
    star en-storing organism,  Cosmarium, and
    they, in turn, stimulate an oil storing
    species  of Dinobryon. "  Patrick.

 B  The altered structure of the plankton
    community due to the introduction of the
    alewife

 C  Fecal deposit feeders in the estuarine
    environment

 D  Particle feeders are successful in the
    pipe clogging community and are
    generally (Sebestyen):

    1  Sessile

    2  Suspension feeders

    3  Have motile larvae

    4  Resistant stages

 E  Biogeochemical Cycles

    In terms of biomass and energy flow, the
    mussel  Modiolus  (Figure 1) is a relatively
    minor component of the marsh community.
   However,  they have been demonstrated to
   have a major effect on the recycling and
   retention of valuable phosphorus; thereby
   maintaining fertility and production of
   autotrophs (Odum).

F  Sudd (dense aggregations of floating weeds)

   Flowering aquatic plants are a serious
   problem in shallow, stagnant,  or slow-flowing
   water in many tropical countries.  They are
   expensive  liabilities in newly impounded
   reservoirs in developing nations.


G  Biological Pollution

   Contamination of living native, biotas by
   introduction of exotic life forms has been
   called biological pollution by Lachner et al.
   Some of these introductions are compared
   to contamination as severe as  a dangerous
   chemical release.  They also threaten to
   replace known wildlife resources with
   species of little or unknown value.

   1  Tropical areas have especially been
      vulnerable.  Florida is referred to as
      "a biological cesspool of introduced
      life".

   2  Invertebrates

      a  Asian Clams have a pelagic veliger
         larvae, thus,  a variety of hydro
         installations are vulnerable to sub-
         sequent pipe clogging by the adult
         clams.

      b  Melanian snails are intermediate
         hosts for various trematodes
         parasitic on man.

   3  Vertebrates

      a  At least 25 exotic species of fish
         have been established in North
         America.

     b  Birds, including starlings and cattle
         egrets.
 WP.NAP.22d.9.72
                                                                                         14-11

-------
  The Effects of Organisms on Pollution and the Environment
       c  Mammals,  including nutria.

    4  Aquatic plants

       Over twenty common exotic species are
       growing wild in the United States.  The
       problem of waterway clogging has been
       especially severe in parts of the
       Southeast.
in  In polluted environments, there is a more
 noticeable change in balance, time response,
 and effects.

 A Organic Pollution

    The conditions here are classic and well
    described.  There is a succession of
    biological communities (Figure 2) each
    of which modify the environment and water
    properties,  thus, the effects are pre-
    dominately biological.

    1  Tubificidae (aquatic earthworms) in the
       first zone may reach as many as
       1, 7000, 000/m  and move up to 50 tons
       of mud per acre per day.

    2  In the second zone chironomids (midge
       larvae) are found in thousands per
       square meter and may reduce the DO
       level by one and one-half ppm per
       stream mile.

    3  The Isopod (sowbug) zone (the genus
       Asellus or Lirceus depending on locality)
       third in succession also may reach a
       density of thousands per  square meter,
       a further oxygen demand due to
       respiration.  (Figure 2)

    4  The filamentous green alga Cladophora
       in both streams and lakes responds to
       organic enrichment by producing dense
       growths.   (Figure 3)

    5  Higher aquatic plants such as
       Potamogeton pectinatus may also be
       involved in these ecological changes
       in streams, particularly respiration
       vs.  photosynthesis. There is  correlation
       between weed bed growths, velocity and
       silt  deposition.  In some  streams these
      massive growths on sloughing off foul
      water intakes and reduce DO levels as
      they decompose.

   6  Sphaerotilus and/or slime growths
      below organic wastes, by metabolic
      demands while living and decomposition
      after death,  impose a high BOD load
      on the stream and can severely deplete
      the dissolved oxygen.  (Figure 3)

   7  Blackflies (Diptera, family Simuliidae)
      often reach large populations below
      organic waste sources, filter feed  on
      this material and in so doing, further
      degrade stream conditions with their
      fecal deposits.

B  Inorganic and Toxic Pollution

   When progressive changes occur they
   are rarely produced by the biological
   community.

C  Biological Magnification

   Biological magnification is an additional
   chronic effect of toxic and other pollutants
   (such as heavy metals, pesticides,
   carcinogens,  teratogens, radionuelides,
   bacteria, and viruses) which must be
   recognized and examined before clearance
   can be given for the disposal of a waste
   product into natural waters.  To para-
   phrase Odum we could give nature an
   apparently innocuous amount of pollutant
   and have  her give it back to us in a  lethal
   or detrimental package.

   1  Many animals, and especially bivalves,
      have the ability to remove from the
      environment and store in their tissues
      substances present at nontoxic levels
      in the  surrounding water.

      a This process may continue in the
        clam or fish,  for example, until
        the body burden of the toxicant
        reaches such levels that the animal's
        death would result if the pollutant
        were released into the bloodstream
        by physiological activity.
  14-12

-------
             The Effects of Organisms on Pollution and the Environment
                                    PHOSPHORUS IN WATER
                                    particular*     14 mgm/m'
                                    phosphate     19   "
                                    dissolved organic 6   "
                                      (total    '39 mgm/m1
                                        5.5 mgm/m'/day
                                        ~"  intake

                                             0.3 mgm/m'/doy
                                                recycle
           —•- ENERGY FLOW •

              flux by Modiolus
            amount in environment
                   MODIOIUS
  _ _   _          POPULATION
phosphorus 37 mgm/m1
      BIOMASS ' 1 .Sg/m'
  	. respiration  0.1 kcol/m'doy
~~"^- production  0.05 "   "  "
                  energy :    : 0.008
(Reproduced from Figure 4-4,  from Ecology by Eugene P. Odum,
copyright (c)  1963 by Holt,  Rinehart and Winston, Inc. used by
permission of Holt,  Rinehart and Winston, Incs)


     Figure 1.  The  role of a shellfish (mussel) population
                in the cycling and retention of phosphorus
                in an estuarine ecosystem.
     Figure 2.  linear alterations in populations of Tubificids (A)
                Chironomids (B),  and Isopods (C) (from Bartsch).
                Zone C is often referred to as the Cladophora-
                Asellus Zone.        '
                                                                         14-13

-------
The Effects of Organisms on Pollution and the Environment
                                          20    30
                                            Miles
                  60
         Figure 3.  Linear alterations in populations of slime growths and Cladophora
                                 (modified from Bartsch)
      b  This may occur, as in the case of
         chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides
         (such as DDT and endrin) stored in
         fat depots,  when the animals food
         supply is restricted and the body
         fat is mobilized.

      c  The appearance of the toxicant in
         the bloodstream causes the death
         of the animal.

      The biological magnification and
      storage of toxic residues of polluting
      substances and microorganisms may
      have another serious after effect.

      a  Herbivorous and carnivorous fish at
         lower trophic stages may gradually
         build up DDT residues of 15 to 20
         mg/1 without apparent ill effect.

      b  Carnivorous fish, mammals, and
         birds preying on these contaminated
         fish may be killed immediately or
         suffer irreparable damage because
         of the pesticide  residue or infectious
         agent.

      c  Commercial shellfisheries are
         damaged by toxins produced by some
         dino-flagellate blooms in nearshore
         waters.
IV  In summary, the biological causes of DO
 changes, associated changes in pH and CO?,
 ammonia, nitrates,  and sulphides, require
 study if the  effects of organic pollution are
 to be calculated and predicted.  Further
 biological effects on pollution include the
 relation to fouling organisms; stabilization
 of sediments in estuaries; recycling of
 nutrients; and problems of biological
 magnification.
 REFERENCES

 1  Curtis,  E.J.  Review Paper.  Sewage
       Fungus:  Its Nature and Effects.
       Water Res. 3:289-311.   1969.

 2  Herbst, Richard P.   Ecological Factors
       and the Distribution of Cladophora
       glomerata in the Great Lakes.  Amer.
       Mid. Nat.  82(l):90-98.   1969.

 3  Holm,  L. G., Weldon, L.W. and Blackburn,
       R.D.   Aquatic Weeds.  Science.
       66:699-709.   1969.

 4  Odum, E.P.  Ecology.   Holt, Rinehart,
       and Winston.    192pp.  1961.
14-14

-------
                             The Effects of Organisms on Pollution and the Environment
5  Lachner, Ernest A., Robins, C. Richard,
     and Courtenay, Walter R. Jr.
     Exotic Fishes and Other Aquatic
     Organisms Introduced into North
     America Smithsonian Contrib. to
     Zool.   59:1-29.   1970.

6  Patrick, Ruth.  Water Research Programs
     Aquatic Communities. Office Water
     Resources,  U.S. Department of the
     Interior, Washington, D. C.  22 pp. 1968.

7  Sculthorpe, C. D.   The Biology of Aquatic
     Vascular Plants.  St. Martin's Press,
     New York.  610pp.  1967.

8  Sebestyen, Olga.   On Urnatella gracilis
     Leidy (Kamptozoa Cori) and its
     occurrence  in an industrial waterworks
     fed by Danube water in Hungary.  Acta
     Zool.  Acad. Sci. Hungaricae.
     8:435-448.
 9  Westlake,  D.F.   The Effects of Orga-
      nisms on Pollution.  Proc. Linnean
      Soc. London.   170 session pt.  2.
      p. 171-172.   1959.

10  Westlake,  D.F.   The Effects of
      Biological Communities on Conditions
      in Polluted Streams.  Symp. No.  8
      Inst.  of Biol.  London (41 Queen's
      Gate, London,  S.W.T.)p. 25-31. 1959.

11  Whitton, B.A. Review Paper.  Biology
      of Cladophora in Freshwaters,  Water
      Research 4:457-476.  1970.
 This outline was prepared by Ralph M.
 Sinclair,  Aquatic Biologist,  National
 Training  Center, Water Programs Operations,
 EPA,  Cincinnati, OH  45288.
                                                                                    14-15

-------
                  GLOBAL-DETERIORATION AND OUR ENVIRONMENTAL CRISIS
I  FROM LOCAL TO REGIONAL TO GLOBAL
   PROBLEMS

A  Environmental problems do not stop at
   national frontiers, or ideological barriers.
   Pollution in the atmosphere and oceans
   taints all nations, even those benignly
   favored by geography, climate, or natural
   resources.

   1;  The smokestacks of one country can
      pollute the air and water of another.

   2  Toxic effluents poured into an inter-
      national  river  can kill fish in a
      neighboring nation and ultimately
      pollute international seas.

B  In Antarctica, thousands of miles from
   pollution sources, penguins and fish
   contain DDT in their fat. Recent layers
   of snow and ice on the white  continent
   contain measurable amounts of lead.
   The increase can be correlated with the
   earliest days of lead smelting' and com-
   bustion of leaded gasolines.

C  International cooperation,  therefore, is
   nece.ssary on many environmental fronts.

   1  Sudden accidents that chaotically
      damage the environment - such as oil
      spills  from a tanker at sea - require
      international cooperation both for
      prevention and for cleanup.

   2  Environmental effects cannot be
      effectively treated by unilateral action.

   3  The ocean can no longer be considered
      a dump.

D  "One of the penalties of an ecological
   education is that one lives alone in a
   world of wounds.   Much of the damage
   inflicted  on land is quite invisible to
   laymen.  An ecologist must either harden
   his shell and make believe that the conse-
   quences of  science are none  of his business,
   or he must be the doctor who sees the marks


BI. ECO. hum. 2e. 10. 73
    of death in a community that believes
    itself well and does not want to be told
    otherwise. " Aldo Leopold
H  CHANGES IN ECOSYSTEMS ARE
   OCCURRING CONTINUOUSLY

 A Myriad interactions take place at every
   moment of the day as plants and animals
   respond to variations in their surroundings
   and to each other.  Evolution has produced
   for, each species, including .man, a genetic
   composition that limits how far that
   species can go in adjusting to sudden
   changes in its surroundings.  But within
   these limits the several thousand species
   in an ecosystem, or for that matter,  the
   millions in the biosphere, continuously
   adjust to outside stimuli.  Since inter-
   actions are so numerous, they form long
   chains of reactions.

 B Small changes in one part of an ecosystem
   are likely to be felt and compensated for
   eventually throughout the system.
   Dramatic examples of change can be  seen
   where man has altered the course of
   nature.  It is vividly evident in his well-
   intentioned but poorly thought out tampering
   with river, lake, and other ecosystems.

   1  The Aswan High Dam

   2  The St. Lawrence Seaway

   3  Lake Kariba

   4  The Great Lakes

   5  Valley of Mexico

   6  California earthquake (Scientific
      American 3981,  p. 333)

   7  Everglades and the Miami,  Florida
      Jetport

   8  Copperhill,  Tennessee (Copper  Basin)

   9  (You may add others)

                                       15-1

-------
 jjrlobal Deterioration and Our Environmental Crisis
C  Ecosystem Stability

   1  The stability of a particular ecosystem
      depends on its diversity.  The more
      interdependencies in an ecosystem, the
      greater the chances that it will be able
      to compensate for changes imposed
      upon it.

   2  A cornfield or lawn has little natural
      stability.  If they are not constantly
      and carefully cultivated, they will not
      remain cornfields or lawns but will
      soon be overgrown with a  wide variety
      of hardier plants  constituting a more
      stable ecosystem.

   3  The chemical elements that make up
      living systems also depend on complex,
      diverse sources to prevent cyclic
      shortages or oversupply.

   4  Similar diversity is essential for the
      continued functioning of the cycle by
      which atmospheric nitrogen is made
      available to allow life to exist.  This
      cycle depends on  a wide variety of
      organisms, including soil bacteria and
      fungi, which are often destroyed by
      pesticides in the soil.
D  Biological Pollution

   Contamination of living native biotas by
   introduction of exotic life forms has been
   called biological pollution by Lachner et al.
   Some of these introductions are compared
   to contamination as severe as a dangerous
   chemical release.  They also threaten to
   replace known wildlife resources with
   species of little or unknown value.

   1  Tropical areas have especially been
      vulnerable.  Florida is referred to as
      "a biological cesspool of introduced
      life".
     2  Invertebrates

       a  Asian Clanis have a pelagic veliger
          larvae, thus,  a variety of hydro
          installations are vulnerable to sub-
          sequent pipe clogging by the adult
          clams.

       b  Me Ionian snails are intermediate
          hosts for various trematodes
          parasitic on man.

     3  Vertebrates

       a  At least 25  exotic species of fish
          have been established in North
          America.

       b  Birds,  including starlings and
          cattle egrets.

       c  Mammals,  including nutria.

     4  Aquatic plants

       Over twenty common exotic species
       are  growing wild in the United States.
       The problem of waterway clogging has
       been especially severe in parts of the
       Southeast.

     5  Pathogens and Pests

       Introduction of insect pests and tree
       pathogens have had severe economic
       effects.
Ill  LAWS OF ECOLOGY

 A Four principles have been enunciated by
    Dr.  Barry Commoner.

    1  Everything is connected to everything
       else.

    2  Everything must go somewhere.

    3  Nature knows best.

    4  There is no such thing as a free lunch.

 B These  may be summarized by the principle,
    "you can't do just one thing. "
 15-2

-------
                                            Global Deterioration and Our Environmental Crisis
IV   THE THREE PRINCIPLES OF
     ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL (Wolman)

  A  You can't escape.

  B  You have to organize.

  C  You have to pay.


 V   POLLUTION COMES IN MANY PACKAGES

  A  The sources of air,  water,  and land
     pollution are interrelated and often
     interchangeable.

     1  A single source may pollute the air
       with smoke and chemicals, the land
       with solid wastes, and a river or lake
       with chemical and other wastes.

     2  Control of air pollution may produce
       more solid wastes, which then pollute
       the land or water.

     3  Control of wastewater effluent may
       convert it into solid wastes, which
       must be disposed of on land,  or by
       combustion to the air.

     4  Some pollutants - chemicals, radiation,
       pesticides - appear in all media.

  B  "Disposal" is as important and as costly
     as purification.
VI  PERSISTENT CHEMICALS IN THE
    ENVIRONMENT

 Increasingly complex manufacturing
 processes,  coupled with rising industrialization,
 create greater amounts of exotic wastes
 potentially toxic to humans and aquatic life.

 They may also be teratogenic (toxicants
 responsible for changes in the embryo with
 resulting birth defects, ex., thalidomide),
 mutagenic  (insults which produce mutations,
 ex., radiation), or carcinogenic (insults
 which induce cancer, ex., benzbpyrenes)
 in effect.
A  Metals - current levels of cadmium, lead,
   and other substances whose effects on
   humans and fish and wildlife are not fully
   understood constitute  a mounting concern.
   Mercury pollution,  for example, has
   become a serious national problem, yet
   mercury has been present on earth since
   time immemorial.  More research is
   needed, yet we dare not relax our
   standards until definitive answers  have
   been provided.

B  Pesticides

   1  A pesticide and its metabolites  may
      move through an ecosystem in many
      ways. Hard (pesticides which are
      persistent,  having  a long half-life in
      the environment includes the organo-
      chlorines, ex.,  DDT) pesticides
      ingested or otherwise borne by  the
      target species will stay in the
      environment, possibly to be recycled
      or concentrated further through the
      natural action of food chains if the
      species is eaten.  Most of the volume
      of pesticides do not reach their target
      at all.

   2   Biological magnification

      Initially, low levels of persistent
      pesticides in air, soil, and water
      may be concentrated at every  step
      up the food chain.  Minute aquatic
      organisms and scavengers,  which
      screen water and bottom mud  having
      pesticide levels  of a few parts per
      billion, can accumulate levels
      measured in parts per million -
      a thousandfold increase.  The sediments
      including fecal deposits are continuously
      recycled by the bottom animals.

      a  Oysters,  for  instance,  will con-
        centrate  DDT 70, 000 times higher
        in their tissues than it's  concentration
        in surrounding water.  They  can
        also partially cleanse themselves
        in water  free of  DDT.
                                                                                       15-3

-------
 Global Deterioration and Our Environmental Crisis
           Fish feeding on lower organisms
           build up concentrations in their
           visceral fat which may reach several
           thousand parts per million and levels
           in their edible flesh of hundreds of
           parts per million.
           Larger animals, such as fish-eating
           gulls and other birds, can further
           concentrate the chemicals. A survey     E
           on organochlorine residues in aquatic
           birds in the Canadian prairie  provinces
           showed that California and ring-billed
           gulls were among the most con-              2
           taminated.  Since gulls breed in
           colonies, breeding population changes  VIE   SUMMARY
           can be detected and related to levels
           of chemical contamination. Ecological
           research on colonial  birds to  monitor
           the effects of  chemical pollution on
           the environment is useful.
   great influence on previously unpolluted
   waters and their life.

C  Minimata,  Japan  and mercury pollution.

D  Organochlorine levels in commercial and
   sport fishing stocks, ex., the lower
   Mississippi River fish kills.
   You may complete the following:

   1
  C "Polychlorinated biphenyls" (PCB's).
     PCB's are used in plasticizers,  asphalt,
     ink, paper,  and a host of other products.
     Action has been taken to curtail their
     release to the environment, since their
     effects are similar to hard pesticides.

  D Other compounds which are toxic and
     accumulate in the ecosystem:

     1  Phalate esters - may interfere with
        pesticide analyses

     2  Benzophyrenes

     3

VII  EXAMPLES OF SOME EARLY WARNING
     SIGNALS THAT HAVE BEEN DETECTED
     BUT FORGOTTEN, OR IGNORED.

  A Magnetic micro-spherules in lake
     sediments now used to detect changes
     in industrialization indicate our slowness
     to recognize indicators of environmental
     change.

  B Salmonid fish kills in poorly buffered
     clean lakes in Sweden. Over the past
     years there had been a successive
     increase of SO, in  the air and precipitation.
     Thus, air-borne contamination from
     industrialized European countries had a
   Ecosystems of the world are linked
   together through biogeochemical cycles
   which are determined by patterns of
   transfer and concentrations of substances
   in the biosphere and surface rocks.
B  Organisms determine or strongly
   influence chemical and physical charac-
   teristics of the atmosphere, soil, and
   waters.

C  The Inability of man to adequately predict
   or control his  effects  on the environment
   is indicated by his lack of knowledge
   concerning the net effect of atmospheric
   pollution on the earth's climate.

D  Serious potential hazards for man which
   are all globally dispersed,  are radionuclides,
   organic chemicals,  pesticides, and
   combustion products.

E  Environmental destruction is in lock-step
   with our population  growth.

A CKNOWLEDGEMENT:

This outline has been extracted in part from
the first annual report of the Council on
Environmental Quality: Environmental
Quality.   USGPO,  Washington,  DC.
326 pp. $1.75. 1970.

REFERENCES

1  Goldman,  Charles R.   Is the  Canary Dying?
      The time has come for man, miner of
      the worlds  resources, to surface.  Calif.
      Medicine 113:21-26.  1970.
 15-4

-------
                                        Global Deterioration and Our Environmental Crisis
 2 Lachner,  Ernest A., Robins, C. Richard,
      and Courtenay, Walter R., Jr.
      Exotic Fishes and Other Aquatic
      Organisms Introduced into North
      America. Smithsonian Contrib. to
      Zool.  59:1-29.  1970.

 3 Nriagu, Jerome O.  and Bowser, Carl J.
      The Magnetic Spherules in Sediments
      of Lake Mendota, Wisconsin.  Water
      Res. 3:833-842.  1969.
   Hood,  Donald W.
      on the Oceans.
      738  p. 1971.
ed.  Impingement of Man
Wiley-Inter science.
 5 Commoner, Barry.  The Closing Circle,
      Nature,  Man, and Technology. Alfred
      A. Knopf.  326 p. 1971.

 6 Dansereau, Pierre ed.  Challenge for
      Survival. Land, Air,  and Water for
      Man in Megalopolis, Columbia Univ.
      Press.  235 p. 1970.

 7 Wiens, John A.  ed.  Ecosystem  Structure
      and Function.  Oregon State Univ.
      Press. 176 p. 1972.

 8 Matthews,  W. H., Smith, F.  E., and
      Goldberg,  E.  D. Man's Impact on
      Terrestrial and Oceanic Ecosystems.
      MIT Press. 1971.

 9 Leopold, Aldo.  A Sand  County Almanac
      with Essays on Conservation from
      Round River.  Sierra Club/Ballantine
      Books.  295 p. 1970.

10 Sondheimer,  Ernest B.  and Simeone,
      John B.  Chemical Ecology.  Academic
      Press.  336 p. 1970.

11 Environmental Quality.  Second Annual
      Report of the Council on Environmental
      Quality.  August 1971.  Fourth Annual
      Report 1973.

12 Toxic Substances.  Council on
      Environmental Quality.  25 p.
      April 1971.
13 Zinc in Water.  A Bibliography USDI.
     Office Water Resources WRSIC Series
     208.  1971. Also in this series WRSIC
     201-207, Mercury, Magnesium,
     Manganese, Copper, Trace Elements,
     and Strontium.

14 The Changing Chemistry of the Oceans;
     Proc. 20th Nobel Symposium.
     Wiley.  1972.

15 Bradley,  Michael D. Human, Ecology
     and Coastal-Zone Pollution.  Water,
     Air,  and Soil Pollution.  1(4): 405-414.
     1972.

16 Thomas,  William A., Indicators of
     Environmental Quality. Plenum Press.
     275 p. 1972.

17 Cowell, E. B. "Oil Pollution in perspec-
     tive", in The Ecological Effects  of Oil
     Pollution on Littoral Communities.
     Inst.  of Petroleum.  Appl. Sci. Pub.
     1972.  (Includes a pollution rating
     scale).

18 Oglesby,  RayT., Carlson,  Clarence A.,
     and McCann, James A. River Ecology
     and Man.  Academic Press. 465 p. 1972.
                           This outline was prepared by Ralph M.
                           Sinclair,  Aquatic Biologist, National
                           Training  Center, Water Program Operations,
                           EPA, Cincinnati, OH  45268.
                                                                                  15-5

-------
                      FUNDAMENTALS OF THE TOXICITY BIOASSAY
I  INTRODUCTION

A  The toxicity bioassay procedure herein
   discussed is intended for use by indus-
   trial and other laboratories.

B  Its objective is to evaluate the toxicity
   of wastes and other water pollutants to
   fish or other aquatic organisms.

C  This basic procedure evaluates relatively
   acute toxicity only (chronic or cumulative
   toxicity requires more extensive study).

D  Potential applications are numerous.

   1  Dilution and/or treatment necessary
      to avoid acute toxic effects can be
      estimated.

   2  The efficacy of a treatment can be
      tested.

   3  The potential usefulness of a proposed
      treatment can be estimated.

E  The toxicity bioassay technique does not
   involve a chemical knowledge of the
   toxicant.

   1  Synergism, antagonism, and other
      interactions of chemical components
      cannot always be anticipated, but are
      automatically included in the overall
      evaluation.

   2  All chemical and physical information
      available is essential to the adequate
      interpretation and application of test
      results.

F  The test is designed for local application.
   Generalizations should be made with
   great caution.
G  Field observations should be made of
   results of application over a significant
   period of time.

H  Careful distinction should be made
   between fish mortality due to a phys-
   iological toxicant, and that due to lack
   of DO.

I  A uniform testing procedure is essential
   to effective action in water pollution
   control.
   ROUTINE PROCEDURE
A  Test animals should be fish or other
   organisms of local significance.

   1  Extremely resistant or extremely
      sensitive species should not be
      selected.
   2  They should be' species which are
      amenable to captivity.

   3  They should be accurately identified.

   4  They should be relatively uniform in
      size.  Individuals less than 3 inches
      in length are usually most convenient.

   5  They should be healthy and thoroughly
      acclimated to the laboratory.

B Test water should preferably be taken
   from the receiving stream just above
   the discharge being evaluated.

   1  If this is unsuitable, cleaner waters
      from an upstream station may be
      substituted.

   2  Artificial "standard" waters are not
      recommended for general use.

C Other Experimental Conditions
BI. BIO. met. 7c. 10.69
                                                                                     16-1

-------
 Fundamentals of the Toxicity Bioassay
    1  Temperature

       The tests should be performed at a
       uniform temperature in the upper part
       of the expected summer range,  e.g.,
       200 - 250C for warm water fish, and
       120 - iso c for cold water species.
       It has been found however, that for
       most routine operations',  ambient
       laboratory temperatures are satisfactory.
       Standard modern air conditioning,
       particularly if it  is maintained 24 hours
       a day, is quite adequate.

    2  Test containers should be of glass.
       Wide mouthed  "pickle jugs" or battery
       jars are satisfactory.  Five and one
       gallon sizes are both useful, but the
       larger size is required for conclusive
       results.

    3  Artificial Aeration should not be used
       to maintain the dissolved oxygen
       concentration.  If this falls below
       approximately  4 or 5 ppm at any time
       during the test, fewer fish should be
       used per container or an auxiliary
       oxygenation procedure invoked that is
       designed to void undue loss of volatile
       toxicants.

    4  The number of test animals should not
       be less than 10 per concentration for
       reliable conclusions; these may be
       distributed between two or more
       containers.

    5  Ratio of fish to solution

       There should be less than 2 grams of
       fish per liter of test solution,
       preferably not  more than one.

 D  Experimental Procedure

    1 All dilutions for a given run should be
       prepared from the same sample.

    2  Control tests are essential.
    4  Dead fish should be removed as soon
       as observed.  Survivors should be
       counted and recorded each 24 hours.

    5  Feeding during the test should be
       avoided.

    6  Experimental concentrations

       Any appropriate concentrations may
       be used. A logarithmic series such
       as is suggested in Table I is very
       convenient..  Concentrations can be
       expressed in percent by volume,
       parts per million by weight,  or other
       appropriate units.

    7  Expression of results

       The measure of relative toxicity is
       the median tolerance limit (symbol:
       TL  , this is the analogue of the
       LD™ of the ioxicologist).
          5U

      . a  This is the concentration which
          just 50% of the test animals can
          survive for a stipulated period of
          time (sometimes written TL*
          where t « 24, 48, 96 hours, ePc.)

       b  The TL   may conveniently be
          estimatea graphically, by plotting
          the experimental data on semi-
          logarithmic graph paper,  with the
          test concentration laid off on the
          log, scale, and the percent
          survival on the arithmetic scale.
          Connect with a straight line the
          two successive data points
          representing survival values of
          greater than and less than 50%.
          Note the concentration which
          corresponds to 50% survival on
          this graph.  This is the "TL*  ".
          Other methods are acceptable?
Ill  REPORTING, INTERPRETATION AND
    APPLICATION
    3  Duration
      Tests should be run for at least 48 hours,
      preferably 96.
 A  Reports should include an orderly
    tabulation of all pertinent data such as:

    1  Identity of experimental animals
16-2

-------
                                                  Fundamentals of the Toxicity Bioassay
   2  Their source, average size and
      condition,  and number used per
      concentration

   3  Source and chemical and physical
      analysis of experimental water

   4  Experimental temperature

   5  Volumes of experimental liquid in
      each container

   6  Records of running analyses such as
      DO and pH
   7  TL   and data from which it was
      determined
B  Interpretation and application will be
   discussed more thoroughly later.
   Briefly:
    2  The problem is to extrapolate from
       this well established mid concentration
       to a safe concentration well below the
       "critical concentration range".

    3  Initiation of regulatory procedures
       based on the TL   should be followed
       by periodic fieldobservations. If
       aquatic life flourishes, there is no
       problem indicated. If not, the
       material must be still further diluted.
IV  SPECIAL PROBLEMS

 A  Unaerated aquaria with finite quantities
    of toxicant are not always satisfactory
    (Static Tests).

    1  The toxicant may be volatile.

    2  Toxic materials may be masked by
       a high  BOD.
                                                   3  The toxicant may be progressively
                                                      adsorbed or otherwise changed.
1  The TL  is an estimate of the midpoint
   of the critical concentration range
   (the interval between the highest
   concentration at which all test animals
   survive, and the lowest at which they
   all die).
                                     TABLE I
              A Guide to the Selection of Experimental Concentrations,
              Based on Progressive Bisection of Intervals on a
              Logarithmic Scale.
Col. 1 Col. 2
10.0 	
	 	
	 	
	 	
	 	
	 	
	 	
	 	
	 3.2
	 	
	 	
	 	
	 	
	 	
	 	
	 	
Col. 3
	
	
	
	
5.6
	
	
	
	
	
	

1.8
	
	
	
Col. 4
	
	
7.5
	
	
	
4.2
	
	
	
2.4
	
	
	
1.35
	
Col. 5
	
8.7
	
6.5
	
4.9
	
3.7
	
2; 8
	
2.1
	
1.55
	
1.15
                          1.0
                                                                                    16-3

-------
 Fundamentals of the Toxicity Bioasaay
 B  Standards or requirements other than
    those involving toxicity per se may be
    involved.

 C  Preliminary and Concurrent Investigations

    1  Obtain all available information about
      unknown to be tested.

    2  Does the material lend itself to this
      type of test?

    3  Run feasible on the spot analyses
      including DO.

    4  Significant quantities of solutions
      removed from test containers for
      analysis should be replaced with
      similar volume of same dilution.

 D  Wastes with a high BOD or COD

    1  Suggested preliminary tests

      a  Set up two identical exploratory
         tests.

      b  Aerate one but not the other.

      c  If great difference develops
         between them, special procedures
         are indicated.

    2  Oxygenation or aeration of dilution
      water before making dilutions may
      help.

    3  Oxygenation of experimental containers
      during run.  Pure oxygen is suggested
      instead of air in order to avoid the
      bubbling any more gas through the
      containers than is necessary as some
      of the toxic fraction may be volatile
      materials which would be stripped out.

      a  Lead oxygen into tank through glass
         tube instead of breaker stone in
         order to keep bubbles large.
      b  Control rate of bubbling.  Keep it
         at the minimum number of
         bubbles per minute which will
         maintain 4 to 5 milligrams' of
         oxygen per liter.  Do not attempt
         saturation.

      c  Other systems of Oxygenation are
         available.

   4  Renewal of solutions at stated inter-
      vals (12, 24, or 48 hours) is  approved.
      Fish are not harmed by being
      carefully transferred from one
      container to another.  It is useful
      where:

      a  Initial DO is adequate but slowly
         exhausted.

      b  Toxicant is volatile, progressively
         adsorbed, precipitated,  or other-
         wise changed.

E  Continuous flow apparatus is highly
   desirable but expensive.

   1  Equipment more involved and subject
      to failure during a run.

   2  May be adapted to monitoring by use
      of proportioning equipment.  Makes
      longer runs possible.

F  Other Considerations

   1  Radioactive wastes must be evaluated
      in regard to their chemical toxicity
      as  well as their radioactivity.

   2  Sub acute levels of many toxicants
      such as lead,  arsenic,  chromium,
      etc.,  may exert a low level chronic
      toxicity over a long period  of time.

   3  "Safe  levels" of a waste in  regard to
      toxicity may still exceed standards
      of other types such as color,  organic
      content, suspended solids,  etc.
16-4

-------
                                                   Fundamentals of the Toxicity Bioassay
REFERENCES

1  American Public Health Association,
      Standard Methods for the Examination
      of Water and Wastewater, 12th edition.
      New York.   1965.

2  Doudoroff, P.,  et al.   Bio-As say
      Methods for the Evaluation of Acute
      Toxicity of Industrial Wastes to Fish,
      Sew.  andlnd. Wastes, Vol. 23, No.  11.
      November 1951.

3  Doudoroff, P. and Katz, M.   Critical
      Review of Literature on the Toxicity
      of Industrial  Wastes and Their
      Components to Fish.   I.   Alkalies,
      Acids and Inorganic Gases, Sew. and
      Ind. Wastes,  Vol.  22,  No.  11,  1432.
      November 1950.
4  Ellis, M.M., Westfall,  B.A. and
      Ellis,  M.D.   Determination of
      Water Quality, Research Report 9,
      U. S.  Fish and Wildlife Service,
      122 pp.   1946.

5  Hart, W.B.,  Doudoroff, P. and
      Greenbank, J.  The Evaluation of the
      Toxicity of Industrial Wastes,
      Chemicals and Other Substances to
      Fresh-Water Fishes.  The Atlantic
      Refining Company,  Philadelphia,  Pa.
      317 pp.

6  Hart, W.B.,  Weston,  R.F. and
      DeMann,  J. F.  An Apparatus for
      Oxygenating Test Solutions in Which
      Fish are Used as Test Animals for
      Evaluating Toxicity.  Trans. Am.
      Fisheries Soc.  1945, 75, 228 pub.
      1948.

This outline was prepared by H. W. Jackson,
Chief Biologist,  National Training Center,
Water Programs Operations,  EPAi'
 Cincinnati,  OH  45288.
                                                                                    16-5

-------
                             BIOLOGICAL FIELD METHODS
 I  INTRODUCTION

 A  Due to the nature of ecological inter-
    relationships, methods for the collection
    of different types of aquatic organisms
    differ.  In general we can recognize
    those that swim or float and those that
    crawl, those that are big and those that
    are little.  Each comprises & part of
    "the life" at any given survey station
    and consequently a  "complete" collection
    would include all types.

 B  Field methods in the following outline
    are grouped under four general
    categories,  the collection of:

    1   Benthos (or bottom dwelling
        organisms).  These may be
        attached, crawling, or burrowing
        forms.

    2   Plankton (plancton).   These are all
        of the microscopic plants and
        animals normally swimming or
        suspended in the open water.

    3   Periphyton or "aufwuchs".  This is
        the community of organisms
        associated with the surfaces of
        objects. Some are attached, some
        crawl.  The group is  intermediate
        between the benthos and the plankton.

    4   Nekton.  Nekton are  the larger,
        free swimming active animals such
        as shrimp or fishes.

 C  Aquatic mammals and birds. In most
    cases, require still other approaches
    and are not included.

 D  There is little basic difference between
    biological methods for oceanic,
    estuarine, or freshwater  situations
    except those dictated by the physical
    nature of the environments and the
    relative sizes of the organisms.
Fish, benthos,  and plankton collection
is essentially the same whether con-
ducted in Lake  Michigan,  Jones'
Beach, or the Sargasso Sea.

1   Marine organisms range to larger
    sizes,  and the corrosive nature of
    seawater dictates  special care in
    the design  and maintenance of
    marine equipment.  Site selection
    and collection schedules are
    influenced  by such factors as tidal
    currents and periodicity, and
    salinity distribution,  rather than
    (river) currents, riffles, and pools.

2   Freshwater organisms are in
    general smaller, and the water is
    seldom chemically corrosive on
    equipment. Site selection in
    streams involves riffles, falls,
    pools,  etc., and a unidirectional
    flow pattern.  Lake collection may
    involve less predictable  strati-
    fication or flow  patterns.

Definite objectives should be established
in advance  as to the  size range of
organisms  to be collected and counted.
i.e.: microscopic only, microscopic
and macroscopic,  those retained by
"30 mesh"  screens,  invertebrates and/
or vertebrates, etc.
STANDARD PROCEDURES

Certain standard supplementary
procedures are a part of all field
techniques.  In order to be  interpreted
and used, every collection must be
associated with a record of environ-
mental conditions at the time of
collection.

1   Data recorded should include the
    following as far as practicable.

    Location (name of river,  lake, etc.)
BI. MET. fm.le. 1.74
                               17-1

-------
Biological Field Methods
        Station number (particular location
        of which a full description should
        be on record)

        Date and hour

        Air temperature

        Water temperature (at various
        depths,  if applicable)

        Salinity (at various depths, if
        applicable)

        Tidal flow (ebb or flood)

        Turbidity (or light penetration, etc. j

        Weather

        Wind direction and velocity

        Sky or cloud cover

        Water color

        Depth

        Type of bottom

        Type of collecting device and
        accessories

        Method  of collecting

        Type of sample (quantitative or
        qualitative)

        Number of samples at each station

        Chemical and physical data, e.g.,
        dissolved oxygen,  nutrients,  pH,
        etc.

        Collector's name

        Miscellaneous observations (often
        very important)

    2   All collecting containers should be'
        identified at least with location,
        station number, sample number,  '
        and.date.  Spares are very handy.
IV
3 '  Much transcription of data can be
    eliminated by using sheets or cards
    with a uniform arrangement for
    including the above data.  The
    same field data sheet may include
    field or laboratory analysis.

Compact kits of field collecting equip-
ment and materials greatly increase
collecting efficiency, especially if
collection site is remote from
transportation.
PERSONA L OBSERVA TION A ND
PHOTOGRAPHY

Direct or indirect observation of under-
water conditions has become relatively
efficient.

1   Diving spheres, pioneered by
    William Beebe,  Cousteau,  Honot,
    Willm,  and Manad are proving
    very important for deep water
    observations.

2   Use of the aqualung permits direct
    personal study down to over
    200 feet.

3   Underwater television (introduced
    by the.British Admiralty for
    military purposes) is now generally
    available for biological and other
    observations.

4   Underwater photography is
    improving in quality and facility.

5   Underwater swimming or use of  i
    SCUBA  is quite valuable for direct
    observation and collecting.        :
COLLECTION OF BOTTOM OR
BENTHIC ORGANISMS               '
                                     i

Shoreline or Wading Depth Collecting
Plates I, II

1   Hand picking of small forms
    attached to or crawling on rocks,
    sticks, etc. when lifted out of the
 17-2

-------
                                             Biological Field Methods
                 BOTTOM GRABS
open         closed



     Ekman
   Shipek
Petersen
                    PLATE I
                                                                17-3

-------
Biological Field Methods
                            LIMNOLOGICAL EQUIPMENT
        Hand Screen
                                              Surber Sampler
                               Apron net
                           Sorting pan
                                                             Specimen or
                                                             reagent bottles
                                                     Pail
                                     PLATE II
 17-4

-------
                                                      Biological Field Methods
water is a fundamental and much
used method for quickly assaying
what is present and what may be
expected on further search.

Patches of seaweed and eelgrass
and shallow weedy margins any-
where are usually studied on a
qualitative basis only.

a   The apron net is one of the best
    tools for animals in weed beds
    or other heavy vegetation.  It
    is essentially a pointed wire
    sieve on a long handle with
    coarse screening over the top
    to keep out leaves and sticks.

b   Grapple hooks or a rake may
    be used to pull masses of
    vegetation out on the bank
    where the fauna may be
    examined and collected as they
    crawl out.

c   Quantitative estimates of both,
    plants and animals  can be made
    with a "stove pipe" sampler  ;
    which is forced down through •
    a weed mass in shallow water
    and embedded in the bottom.  '
    Entire contents can then be
    bailed out into a sieve and
    sorted.
d   A frame of known dimensions
    may be placed over an area to;
    be sampled and the material  .
    within cropped out.  This is
    especially good for larger
    plants and large bivalves.
    This .method yields quantitative
    data.

Sand and mud flats in estuaries and
shallow lakes may be sampled
quantitatively by marking off a
desired area and either digging
away surrounding material or
excavating the desired  material
to a measured depth.  Handle-
operated samplers recently
developed by Jackson and
B.
    Larrimore, make for more
    effective sampling of a variety
    of bottoms down to the depth of
    the  handles.  Such samples are
    then washed through graded
    screens to retrieve the organisms.

4   Ekman grabs are most useful  on
    soft bottoms.  This is a completely
    closing clamshell type grab with
    spring operated jaws.  Size of grab
    is usually 6" X6" or 9" X9". the
    12" X12" size is impractical due
    to its heavy weight when filled with
  .  bottom material.

    For use in shallow water,  it is
    convenient to rig an Ekman with  .
    a handle and a hand operated jaw-
    release mechanism.

5   The Petersen type grab (described
    below) without weights will take  :
    satisfactory samples in firm muds,
    but tends to bury itself'in very
    soft bottoms.  It is seldom used iri
    shallow water except as noted
    below.

Collecting in Freshwater Riffles or   ;
Rapids                              '

1   The riffle is one of the most
    satisfactory habitats for comparing
    stream conditions at different
    points.                          !

2   The hand screen is the simplest
    and easiest device to use  in this
    situation.  Resulting collections  '
    are qualitative only.

    a   In use the screen is firmly  ',
        planted in the stream bed.   i
        Upstream bottom is thoroughly
        disturbed with the feet, or   ;
        worked over by hand  by      j
        another person.  Organisms i
         dislodged are carried down
        into the screen.             J

    b   Screen is then lifted and
         dumped into sorting tray  or
         collecting jar.
                                                                           17-5

-------
 Biological Field Methods
         The well-known square foot Surber
         sampler is one of the best quan-
         titative collecting devices for
         riffles.

         a   It consists of a frame one foot
            square with a conical net
            attached.  It is usable only in
            moving water.

         b   In use it is firmly planted on
            the bottom.  The bottom stones
            and gravel within the square
            frame are then carefully gone
            over by hand to ensure that all
            organisms have been dislodged
            and carried by the  current into
            the net.  A stiff vegetable
            brush is often useful in this
            regard.

         c   From three to five square-foot
            samples should be  taken at each
            station to insure that a reason-
            able percentage of  the species
            present will be represented.

         The Petersen type grab may be used
         in deep swift riffles or where the
         Surber is unsuitable.

         a   It is planted by hand on the
            bottom, and worked down into'
            the bottom with the feet.

         b   It is then closed and lifted by
            pulling on the rope  in the usual
            manner.

        A strong medium weight dipnet is  ,
        the closest approach to  a universal
         collecting tool I

         a  Sweeping Weed beds  and Stream
           Margins
           This is used with a sweeping motion,
           through weeds, over the bottoms or
           in.open water.  A triangular shape
           is preferred by some.
        b  Stop net or Kicking Technique

           This may be used as a roughly quan-
           titative device in riffles by holding the
           end flat against the bottom and
            backing slowly up-stream
            disturbing the substrate with
            •one's feet.  A standard period
            of time is used.

        c   The handle should be from 4
            to 6 feet long, and about'the
            weight of a garden rake
            handle.

        d   The ring should be made of
            steel or spring brass, and
            securely fastened to the
            handle.  It'should be  strong
            but not cumbersome; size of
            ring stock will depend on     :
            diameter of ring.

        e   The bag or net should be the
            strongest available, not over :
            1/8 inch mesh,  preferably    '
            about 1/16 inch. Avoid 30 ori
            more meshes to the inch; this;
            is so fine that the net plugs too
            easily and is slow and heavy  ;
            to handle.                    |

        f   There should be a wide canvai
            apron sewed around the rim  !
            and protecting the bag.  The  !
            rim may be protected with    '
            leather if desired.           |
                                         i
D   Deep Water Benthic Collecting Plate III
                                         |
    1   When sampling from vessels, a
        crane and winch, either hand or  i
»        power operated,  is used.  The    :
        general ideas described for shallojw
        waters apply also to deeper waters,
        when practicable.                i
                                         i
    2   The Petersen type grab,  seems toj
        be the best all around sampler fort
        the greatest variety of bottoms at j
        all depths, from shoreline down to
        over 10, 000 meters. (Plate I)     i
             It consists of two heavily
             constructed half cylinders
             closed together by a strong
             lever action.
17-6

-------
                           Biological Field Methods
DEEP WATER  EQUIPMENT
     Bathythermograph
     Biological dredge
  PLATE III
                                        17-7

-------
 Biological Field Methods
        b   To enable them to bite into
            hard bottoms, or to be used in
            strong currents,  weights may
            be attached to bring the total
            weight up to between 50 and
            iOO Ibs.

        c   Areas sampled range from
          — I/5th to  I/20th square naeters
            (1/10 square meter equals
            approximately  1.1 square ft.)

        d   A Petersen grab to be hauled
            by hand should be fitted with
            5/8 or 3/4 inch diameter twisted
            rope in order to provide
            adequate hand grip.  It is best
            handled by means of wire ropes
            and a winch.

        Other bottom samplers include the
        VanVeen,  Lee, Holme,  Smith-
        Mclntyre, Knudsen, Ponar,  and   •
        others.

        A spring loaded sampler has
        recently been developed by Shipek
        for  use  on all types of bottoms.    !
        It takes a half-cylinder sample,
        I/25th square meters in area and.  '
        approximately 4 inches deep at the
        center.  The  device is automatically
        triggered on contact with the      •
        bottom, and the sample is com-    :
        pletely protected  enroute to the    [
        surface. (Plate I)                '
                                         I
        Drag dredges or scrapes are often!
        used in  marine waters and deeper  i
        lakes and streams,  and comprise  j
        the  basic equipment of several types
        of commercial fisheries.  Some    i
        types have been developed for      ',
        shallow streams.   In general      !
        however, they have been little used
        in fresh water.                   '

        The above is  only a partial listing  j
        of the many sampling devices      i
        available.  Others that are often   I
        encountered are the orange-peel   I
        bucket,  plow  dredge,  scallop type  j
        dredge, hydraulic dredges, and    j
        various coring devices. Each has !
    its own advantages and dis-
    advantages and it is up to the
    worker and his operation to decide
    what is best for his particular needs.
    The Petersen type and Ekman grabs
    are perhaps the most commonly
    used.

7   Traps of many types are used for
    various benthic organisms,
    especially crabs and lobsters.
    Artificial substrates (below) are  in
    essence a type of trap.

8   Since most biological communities
    are not evenly distributed, it is
    advisable to routinely take at least
    two and preferably more samples
    from any one  station.

Artificial substrates rely on  the
ecological predilection of organisms
to grow wherever  they find a suitable  j
habitat.  When a small portion of      i
artificial habitat is provided, it tends ;
to become populated by all available   j
species partial to  that type of situation*
The collector can  then at will remove \
the habitat or trap to his laboratory anii
study the population at leisure.        !

This versatile research technique is   '.
much used for both routine monitoring;
and exploratory studies of pollution.   ;
It is also exploited commercially,     j
especially for shellfish production.    '
Types of materials used include:      i

1   Cement plates and panels.        j

2   Wood (especially for burrowing   j
    forms).     •                     :
                                     !
3   Glass slides (ex:  Catherwood     i
    diatometer).            .    '     j

4   Multiple plate trap (masonite).
            '  •'•     •                 j
5   Baskets (or other containers) holding
    natural bottom material and either!
    imbedded in the bottom,  or sus-   :
    pended in the  overlying water.     !
17-8

-------
                                                            Biological Field Methods
   6   Unadorned ropes suspended in the
       water,  or sticks thrust into the
       bottom.

F  Sorting and Preservation of Collections

   1   Benthic collections usually consist
       of a great mass of mud and other
       debris  among which the organisms   :
       are hidden.  Various procedures
       may be followed to separate the      '
       organisms.

       a   The organisms  may be picked   :
           out on the spot by hand or the
           entire mess taken into the       •
           laboratory where it can be       i
           examined more efficiently
           (especially 'in rough weather).   !
           Roughly equivalent time will
           probably be required in either
           case.

       b   Specimens may be limply       ;
           observed and recorded or they   !
           may be preserved as a
           permanent record.              i

       c   Organisms may be simply    '   j
           counted,  weighed, or  measured  j
           volumetrically; or they may be
           separated and recorded in    :   <
           groups or species.           !   '
       If separation is in the field, this
       usually done by hand picking,
       screening, or some type of flotati
       process.
                            i
                            I
Hand picking is best done on a
white enameled tray using
light tough limnological forceps.

Screening is one of the most
practical methods to separate
organisms from debris in the
field.  Some prefer to use a
single fine screen, others
prefer a series of 2 or 3
screens of graded sizes.  The
collection may be  dumped
directly on the screen and the j
.mud and debris washed through.
    or it may be dumped into a
    bucket or small tub.  Water
    is then added, the mixture is
    well stirred,  and the  super-
    natant poured through the
    screen.  The residue is then
    examined for heavy forms that
    will not float  up.

c   A variation of this method in
    situations where there is no
    mud is to pour a strong sugar
    or salt solution over the
    collection in the bucket, stir ;
    it well, and again pour the
    supernatant through the screen.
    This time,  however,  saving
    the flotation solution for
    re-use.  The heavier-than-
    water solution accentuates the
    separation of organisms from
    the debris  (except for the
    heavy shelled molluscs, etc. )j.
    A solution  of 2-1/2 Ibs. of
    sugar per gallon of water  is  |
    considered to be optimum.

Preservation or stabilization is  j
usually  necessary in the field.    i

a   95% ethanol (ethyl alcohol) is
    highly satisfactory.  A final  i
    strength of 70% is necessary i
    for prolonged storage.  If the.
    collection is  drained  of water j
    and flooded with 95%  ethanol j
    in the field, a laboratory     i
    flotation separation can usually
    be made later, thus saving
    much time.  Considerable
    quantities of  ethanol are     j
    required for this procedure, j
                                I
b   Formaldehyde is more widely)
    available and is effective  in  j
    concentrations of 3 - 10% of j
    the commercial formulation, j
    However,  it shrinks and     i
    hardens specimens,  collector],
    and laboratory analyst without
    •favor!  In  order to minimize !
    bad effects from formalin,   <
    neutralized formalin  is      i
                                                                                17-9

-------
Biological Field Methods
            recommended.  Mollusc shells
            will eventually disintegrate in
            acid formalin

            Properly preserved benthos
            samples may be retained
            indefinitely, thereby enhancing
            their utility.

            Refrigeration or icing is very
            helpful.
V  MICROFAUNA AND PERIPHYTON
    (OR AUFWUCHS) SAMPLING

 A  This is a relatively new area which   j
    promises to be of great importance.   i
    The microfauna of mud and sand
    bottoms may be studied to some extent
    from collections made with the various
    devices mentioned above.  In most
    cases however, there is considerable
    loss of the smaller forms.

 B  Most special microfauna samplers for
    soft bottoms are essentially modified
    core samplers in which an effort is
    made to bring up an undisturbed portion
    of the bottom along with the immediately
    overlying water.  The best type currently
    seems to be the Enequist sampler which
    weighs some 35 kg. and takes a 100 sq,
    cm sample  50 cm.  deep.

 C  Microfauna from the surface of hard  ;
    sand or gravel bottoms may be sampled
    by the Hunt vacuum sampler. This had
    a bell-shaped "sampling" tube sealed !
    by glass diaphragm.  On contact with i
    the bottom, the glass is automatically i
    broken and the nearly bottom material j
    is swept up into a trap.               j

 D  Periphyton attached to or associated  '
    with hard surfaces such as rock or
    wood may be sampled by scraping or
    otherwise removing all surface        ;
    material from  a measured area.  The j
    periphyton, however, is more effectively
    quantitatively sampled by artificial    j
    substrate techniques described above.
VI  -  THE.COLLECTION. OR SAMPLING
      OF PLANKTON PLATE IV

, A    Phytoplankton: A Planned,Program is
      Desirable

      1   A planned program of plankton
         analysis should involve periodic
         sampling at weekly or even more
         frequent intervals.

      2   A well-planned study or analysis
         of the growth pattern of plankton
         in one year will provide a basis
         for predicting conditions the
         following year since seasonal     ;
;         growth patterns tend to repeat
         themselves from year to year.

:         a    Since the seasons and the years
;          •    differ,  records accumulated
:              over the years become more
I              useful.

         b    As the time for an anticipated
              bloom of some troublesome
i              species approaches, the
i              frequency of analyses may be
;              increased.

      3   Detection of a bloom in its early
:         stages will facilitate more
i         economical control.

i B    Field Aspects of the. Analysis Program
          Two general aspects of plankton  i
          analysis are commonly recognized:
          quantitative and qualitative.

          a   Qualitative examination tells
              what is present.

          b   Quantitative tells how much.

          c   Either approach is useful,  a
              combination is best.

          Equipment for collecting samples
          in the field is varied.

          a   A half-liter bottle will serve j
              for surface samples of       j
              phytoplankton, if carefully   j
17-10

-------
                                               Biological Field Methods
                   PLANKTON SAMPLERS
                     Wisconsin net
Kemmerer
                      High speed plankton sampler
                       PLATE IV
                                                              17-11

-------
Biological Field Methods
        b   A Kemrrierer, Nansen, or
            other special sampler (small"
            battery operated pumps are
            time saving) is suggested for
            depth samples.

        c   Plankton nets concentrate the
            sample in the act of collecting
            and also  capture certain  larger
            forms which escape from the
            bottles.  Only the more      .]
            elaborate types are quantitative
            however.  For phytoplankton,
            #20 or #25 size nets are
            commonly used.  Usually a net
            diameter of 5 - 10 inches is
            sufficient. The smaller  forms   !
            However,  are lost through any
            net.

 C  Zooplankton Collecting
                                            !
    1    Since zooplanktpn have the ability
        to swim away from water bottles, .    j
        etc. nets towed at moderately fast    '<
        speed are used for their capture. '
        Number 12 nets (aperature       !    j
        size 0.119 mm, 125 meshes 1 inch)
        or smaller numbered net sizes-are    <
        commonly used.  A net diameter  .    \
        greater than 5" is preferred.
                                            !
        Frequently half meter nets or
        larger are employed.  These  may
        be equipped with flow measuring  ;    i
        devices for measuring the amount!
        of water entering the net.             ,

    2    Other instruments such as the    >
        Clark-Bumpus, Gulf-Stream,     ;    j
        Hardy continuous plankton recorder,   !
        and high-speed instruments are   ,    ,
        used for collecting zooplankton, also, i

    3    The devices used for collecting   j
        plankton capture both the plant and    '
        animal types.  The mesh size    ;
        (net no.) is a  method for selecting!    j
        which category of plankton is  to be!
        collected.                            ,
                                        !    i
 D  The Location of Sampling Points       '
                                        i    t
    1    Both shallow and deep samples ard    ''•
	    suggested.       	    	  J
4.
5.
6.
      Shallow" samples should be
    taken at a depth of 6 inches to
    one foot.  The surface film is
    often significant.

b   "Deep" samples should be
    taken at such intervals
    between surface and bottom
    as circumstances dictate.
    In general,  the entire water
    column should be  sampled as
    completely as practicable,
    and the plankton from each
    level recorded separately.

For estuarine plankton, it is     ;
necessary to sample different
periods in the stage of the tide,   !
otherwise samples would be biased
to a given time,  or type of water i
carried by the tidal currents.    |
                                i
Plankton is subjected to the force ,
of the winds and currents. Asa ;
result, the plankton is often in   \
patches or "wind rows," (Langmuir
cells).  For this reason when using
a net, it is  often desirable to tow :
the net at right angles  to the wind br
current.
                                f
Nearly all plankton are horizontally
discontinuous.   Planktonic organisms
tertd to be numerous near the bottom
in daylight, but  distributed more
evenly through the water  column at
night. Therefore, a series of tows
or samples at different depths is
necessary to obtain a  complete
sampling.  One  technique often em-
ployed is to take an oblique tow
from the bottom to the top of the
water column.
            "w
Pilot studies to  indicate sampling
locations and intervals are often
mandatory.  Some studies require
random sampling points.

The number of sampling stations
 that should be estabilshed is limited
 by the capability of the laboratory  to
 analyze the samples,  but should
 approach the needs of the objectives
 as closely as possible.
17-12

-------
                                                             Biological Field Methods
vn
         Field conditions greatly affect the
         plankton, and a record thereof
         should be carefully identified with
         the collection as in II above.

         Provisions should be made for the
         field stabilization of the sample
         until the laboratory examination
         can be made  if more than an hour
         or so is to  elapse.
                                             !
         a   Refrigeration or icing is very
             helpful,  but ice should never ;
             be placed in_the sample.      •

         b   Preservation by 5% formalin is
             widely used but badly shrinks .    :
             animals  and makes all forms
             brittle.                         J

         c   Lugo Is solution is a good
             preservative.

         d   Ultra-violet sterilization is
             sometimes used in the laboratory'
             to retard the decomposition bf;
             plankton.                       ;

         e   A highly satisfactory merthiolate i
             preservative has been described j
             by Weber (1968).
COLLECTING FISH AND OTHER      .   j
NEKTON PLATES V, VI              .

Fish and other nekton must be sought in   i
the obscure and unlikely areas as well i
as the obvious locations in order for the   j
collection to be complete.  Several    ;   '
techniques should be employed where- ; . • |
ever possible (this  is appropriate for  ,   •
all biota).  It is advisable to check with   •
local authorities to inform them of the i   j
reasons for sampling,  because many of   !
the techniques are not legal for the    |
layman.  In this area,  perhaps more   .   S
than any other,  professionally trained :
workers are important. Also,  there   i •  .
must be at least one helper, as a single   \
individual always has difficulty in pulling
both ends  of a 20 foot seine simultaneously!!
    The more common techniques are
    listed below.

B   Seines

    1   Straight seines range from 4-6 feet
        and upwards in length.  "Common
        sense"  minnow seines with approxi-
        mately  1/4 inch mesh are widely
        used along shore for collecting the
        smaller fishes.

    2   Bag seines have an extra trap or
        bag tied in the middle which helps
        trap and hold fish when seining in
        difficult situations.

C   Gill nets are of use in offshore and/or
    deep waters.  They range in length
    from approximately  30 yards upward.
    A mesh size is designed to catch a
    specified size of fish.  The trammel
    net is a variation of  the gill net.       .

D   Traps range from small wire boxes or
    : cylinders with inverted cone entrances!
    to semi-permanent weirs a half mile  oir
    .more in length.   All tend to induce fish
    to swim into an inner chamber pro-   j
    tected by an inverted cone or V - shaped
    notch to prevent escape.  Current     '
    operated rotating fish traps are also
    very effective (and equally illegal) in   i
    suitable situations.                   j
                                         i
E   Trawls are  submarine nets,  usually or
    considerable size, towed by vessels at
    speeds sufficient to overtake and scoop
    in fish, etc. The mouth of the net muit
    be held open by some device such as  a!
    long beam (beam trawl) or two or more
    vanes or "otter boards" (otter trawl), j
    Plate III                             !
                                                          Beam and otter trawls are usually
                                                          fished on the bottom,  but otter
                                                          trawls when suitably rigged are
                                                          now being used to fish mid-depthsl
                                                      2   The midwater trawl resembles a :
                                                          huge plankton net many feet in
                                                          diameter.  It is proving very effec-
                                                          tive for collecting at mid-depths.
                                                                                   17-13

-------
Biological Field Methods
                                    FISH NETS
               Gill
                                                              Hoop
                                    PLATE V
    17-14

-------
TJ
H
M
               Cod end
                                                               Electrically

                                                             controlled  doors
                                                     MIDWATER TRAWL
                                                        PLATE VI
                                                                                                                 M
                                                                                                                 o'
                                                                                                                 i—'
                                                                                                                 o
I
t—1
CJl
                                                                                                                 O
                                                                                                                 Q.
                                                                                                                 03

-------
  Biological Field Methods.
          Numerous special designs have been
          developed.  Plate VI

   F  Electric seines and screens are widely
      employed by fishery workers in small
      and difficult streams.  They may also
      be used in shallow water like areas with
      certain reservations.

   G  Poisoning is much used in fishery studies
      and management.   Most widely used and
      generally satisfactory is rotenone in
      varying formulations, although many
      others have been employed from time to
      time,  and some appear to be very good.
      Under suitable circumstances, fish may
      even be killed selectively according to
      species.                           '

   H  Personal observation by competent
      personnel,  and also informal inquiries
      and discussions .with local residents
      will often yield information 6f real use.
      Many laymen are keen observers,
      although they do' not always understand I
      what they are seeing.  The organized
      creel census technique yields data on
      what and how many fish are being
      caught.

   I   Angling remains in its own right a very
      good technique in the hands of the skilled
      practitioner,  for determining what fish
      are present.  Spear-fishing also is now
      being used in some studies.

   J  Fish and other nekton are often tagged
      to trace their movements during      ;
      migration and at other times.  Minia-
      ture radio transmitters  can now be    j
      attached or fed to fish (and other
      organisms) which enable them to be
      tracked over considerable distances.
      Physiological information is often     ;
      obtained in  this way.  This is known as
      telemetry,
VIII   SPECIA L REQUIREMENTS ON BOATS
                                          !

   Handling biological collections (as  con-  i
   trasted to chemical and physical sampling!)
   on board boats differs with the size of the:
!_  craft and the magnitude of operations.    \
 Senle-plfesi&le tteme ape listed below.
 Hoisting and many other types of gear are
 used in common with other types of
 collection, and will not be listed.

 A   Special Laboratory Room(s)

 B   Constant flow of Clean water for
     culturing organisms.   (Selection of
     materials and design of a system to
     insure non-toxic water may be very
     troublesome but very important. )

 C   Live Box built into ship at water level

 D   Refrigeration System(s)               .

     1    For controlling temperature of
          experimental organisms in
          laboratory.

     2    For deep -free zing and storage of ,
          specimens to be  examined later.  .
                                          j
 E   Storage Space (Unrefrigerated)        j
            ••*                             i
', F   Facilities for the  safe storage and use;
:     of microscopes and other laboratory  j
     • equipment.                           ,
                                          i
                                          i
 G   Facilities for the  safe storage and use
     of deck equipment.
     .   ^     '                            \
 H   Administrative access to the Captain  |
     and Technical Leader in order to
     coordinate requirements for biological
'.     collection (such as a  slow plankton towj)
     with those for other collections.      j
;                                        •  j
\ I   Safety of personnel working in and     j
I     around boats, as well as in other field;
     activities should be seriously con-    j
i     sidered and promoted at all times.    j
 x ,   OTHER TYPES OF BIOLOGICAL
      FIELD STUDIES INCLUDE       '
                          '
 A    Productivity Studies of Many Types
I B   Life Cycle and Management

; C   Distribution of Sport or (potentially)   j
      Commercial Species                 I
   17-16

-------
                                                          Biological Field Methods
D   Scattering Layers and Other Submarine
    Sound Studies

E   Artificial Culture of Marine Food Crops

F   Radioactive Uptake

G   Growth of Surface-Fouling Organisms

H   Marine Borers

I   Dangerous Marine Organisms

J   Red Tides

K   Others
X   SOURCES OF COLLECTING
    EQUIPMENT

Many specialized items of biological
collecting equipment are not available
from the usual laboratory  supply houses.
Consequently, the American Society of
Limnology and Oceanography has compiled
a list of companies handling such items
and released it as "Special Publication
No. 1, Sources of Limnoligical and
Oceanographic Apparatus and Supplies. "
Available from the Secretary of the Society.

XI   SAFETY

The hazards associated with work on or near
water require special consideration.  Personnel
should not be assigned to duty alone in boats,
and should be competent in the use of boating
equipment (courses are offered by the U. S.
Coast Guard). Field training should also include
instructions on the proper rigging and handling
of biological sampling gear.

Life preservers( jacket type work vests)  should
be wron at all times when  on or near deep water.
Boats should have air-tight or foam-filled com-
partments for flotation and be equipped with
fire extinguishers, running lights,  oars,  and
anchor.  The use of inflatable plastic or rubber
boats is discouraged.

All boat trailers should have two rear running
and stop lights and turn signals and a license
plate illuminator.  Trailers 80 inches (wheel
to wheel) or more wide should be equipped with
amber marker lights on the front and rear of
the frame on both sides.

Laboratories should be provided with fire
extinguishers, fume hoods, and eye fountains.
Safety  glasses should be worn when mixing
dangerous chemicals and preservatives.

A copy of the EPA Safety Manual is available
from the Office of Administration, Washington,
.D. C.  (Reference:  10)
References

1  Arnold, E.L., Jr. and Gehringer, J.W.
    High Speed Plankton Samplers,
    U. S. Fish and Wildlife Spec. Sci.
    Rept. Fish No.  88:1-6.

2  Barnes,  H. (ed.).  Symposium on New
    Advances in Underwater Observations.
    Brit. Assoc.  Adv. Sci., Liverpool.
    pp.  49-64.  1953.

3  Hedgepeth,  Joel W.  Obtaining
    Ecological Data in the Sea Chapter 4
    in "Treatise on Marine Ecology and
    Paleoecology" Memois 67.  Geol.
    Soc. Am.  1963.

4   Isaacs, John D. and Columbus,  O. D.
     Oceanographic Instrumentation NCR
     Div. Phys. Sci.  Publ.  309, 233 pp.
      1954.

5  Jackson, H.W.  A  Controlled Depth
    Volumetric Bottom Sampler. Prog.
    Fish Cult., April, 1970.

6  Lagler, Karl F.  Freshwater Fishery.
    Biology, Wm.  C.  Brown Company.
    Dubuque.   1956.

7  Standard Methods for the  Examination
    of Water and Wastewater.  APHA,
    AWWA, WPFC.  Publ. by Am.  Pub.
    Health Assoc. New York.
                                                                                  17-17

-------
Biological Field Methods
 8  Sverdrup, H. U.  et al.  Observations
    and collections at sea.  Chapter X
    in:  The Oceans, Their Physics,
    Chemistry,  and Biology.  Prentice-
    Hall,  Inc., New York. 1087pp.  1942.

 9   Usinger, R. L.  Aquatic Insects of
     California (Section on Field Methods).
     University of  California Press.
     Berkeley.  1956.

 10  Weber,  C.I.  Biological Field and Lab
     Methods for Measuring the Quality of
     Surface Waters and Effluents.  U.S.
     Environmental Protection Agency, Nat-
     ional Environmental Research  Ctr.,
     Cincinnati, OH  Environmental Monitoring
     Series   670/4-73-001.  July,  1973.

 11  Welch, Paul S.   Limnological Methods.
     The  Blakiston Company,  Philadelphia,
     Pennsylvania.  1948.

 12  FWPCA, Investigating Fish Mortalities.
     USDI,  No.  CWT-5, 1970. U.S.  Gov't.
     Print.  Off.  1970 0-380-257
This outline was prepared by H. W. Jackson,
Former Chief Biologist, National Training
Center, Office of Water Programs, EPA,
Cincinnati, OH 45268,  and revised by
Ralph M.  Sinclair,  Aquatic Biologist,
National Training Center.
Descriptors:
Aquatic Environment, Analytical Techniques,
Sampling, On-Site Investigations, Preser-
vation, Samplers,  Water Sampling,
Handling,  Sample, Surface Waters, Aquatic
Life
17-18

-------
                              STREAM INVERTEBRATE DRIFT
 I   Invertebrates which are part of the benthos,
 but under certain conditions become carried
 downstream in appreciable numbers, are
. known as drift.

 A  Groups which have members forming a
    conspicuous part of the drift include the
    insect orders Ephemeroptera,
    Trichoptera,  Plecoptera and the crus-
    tacean order Amphipoda.

 B  Other invertebrate groups exhibit drift
    patterns.
II  THREE BASIC TYPES OF DRIFT
    ARE RECOGNIZED

 A  Catastrophic Drift

    Floods wash numerous benthic organisms
    downstream. Application of pesticides
    may also cause such drift.

 B  Constant Drift (Incidental or Adventitious)

    Organisms are constantly being dislodged
    from the substrate during normal
    activities and carried downstream.

 C  Periodic (Diel) or Behavioral Drift

    In contrast to the other categories, this
    is a specific behavior pattern and related
    to circadian activity rhythms.

    1  Seasonal drift occurs,  for example,
       in some maturing stoneflies which
       drift downstream for emergence.
       This is another reason for a  serious
       consideration of drift in bottom fauna
       sampling since such presence of
       stoneflies could easily be  misinterpreted.

    2  Periodic or diel drift occurs in peaks
       for  successive 24-hour periods.

       a  Night-active.  Light intensity is the
          phase-setting mechanism.
       b  Day-active.  Water temperature
          appears to be the phase-setter.
in  DIEL DRIFT

 A  Diel activity rhythms generally include
    two peaks during the 24-hour period;
    one major and the other minor.

    1  The bigeminus type in which the
       major peak occurs first (after sunset).
  §
  O
               FIGURE 1

     2  The alternans pattern with the major
       peak occurring last.
       1200     1800    2400     0600
                   Time
           Sunset         Sunrise
                FIGURE 2

  B  Drift Rate and Density (Waters.  1969)

     1 Drift rate defined is ".. .the quantity
       of organisms passing a width transect
       or portion thereof,  per unit time;
  BI.ECO. 22a. 9.72
                                                                                       18-1

-------
  Stream Invertebrate Drift
       it is a measure of displacement or
       the movement of organisms from one
       place to another. "

       Drift density "... is the quantity of
       organisms per unit volume of water,
       in much the  same way as plankton
       density can be defined. "
IV  IMPLICATIONS FOR BIOLOGICAL
    SAMPLING

 A  The drift from productive upstream
    reaches may support a fish population
    existing in relatively barren stream
    sections.

 B  Drift will colonize artificial substrates,
    such as suspended rock baskets, when
    placed in such habitats.

 C  A bottom sampler such as the  Surber,  .
    could also be sampling drift when only
    resident benthic organisms are intended
    to be collected.  This would depend on
    the hour of collection and length of time
    the Surber sampler is in the water.

 D  Application of drift studies have been
    widely used in pesticide related studies.
    In conjunction with such studies, Dimond
    concluded that:

    1 The status of drift is a much better
      indicator of the steady state and of
      total productivity than is the status
      of the bottom fauna.

    2 Bottom sampling, however,  is
      superior when  analyzing survival
      and recovery of the  quality  of population.

    3 A  combination  of both in such a
      sampling program would be most
      likely to yield the most useful data.

 E  Drift sampling techniques have been
    useful for recovery of large numbers of
    sand-dwelling mayflies, which were
    once  rarely collected.
V  MAJOR TAXA INVOLVED IN DRIFT

 A The crustacean order Amphipoda

   1  Gammarus species

   2  Hyalella azteca

 B The Insect Orders

   1  Ephemeroptera

      Baetis species (apparently universal)

   2  Plecoptera

   3  Trichoptera

   4  Dipt era
      Simuliidae
   5  Elmidae

 C The main groups exhibiting very high
   drift rates include:  Baetis.  some
   Gammarus species, and some Simuliidae.


 REFERENCES

 1  Anderson, N. H.   Biology and Down-
      stream Drift of some Oregon
      Trichoptera.   Can. Entom.  99:507-
      521.   1967.

 2  Dimond, John B.   Pesticides and
      Stream Insects.   Bull. 23,  Maine
      Forest Service,  21 pp.   1967.

 3  Dimond, John B.   Evidence that drift of
      Stream Benthos  is Density Related.
      Ecology 48:855-857.    1967.

 4  Pearson,  William D.,  and Kramer,
      Robert H.  A Drift Sampler  driven
      by a Waterwheel.  Limnology and
      Oceanography 14(3):462-465.

 5  Reed,  Roger J.   Some Effects of DDT on
      the Ecology of Salmon Streams in
      Southeastern Alaska.   Spec.  Sci.
      Report-Fisheries 542:1-15.  U.S.
      Bureau Comm. Fisheries.   1966.
  18-2

-------
                                                         Stream Invertebrate Drift
Waters, Thomas F.   Interpretation of          8  Waters, Thomas F.   Invertebrate
   Invertebrate Drift in Streams.                     Drift-Ecology and Significance to
   Ecology 46 (3):327-334.  1965.                    Stream Fishes.  (T. G. Northco  .e,
                                                    Ed.)  Symposium Salmon and Trout
Waters, Thomas F.   Diurnal Periodicity             in Streams.   University of British
   in the Drift of a Day-active Stream                Columbia, Vancouver,  pp. 121-134.
   Invertebrate.  Ecology 49:152.   1968.             1969.
                                              This outline was prepared by R. M.
                                              Sinclair, Aquatic Biologist, National
                                              Training Center,  Water Programs Operations,
                                              EPA, Cincinnati, OH 45268.
                                                                                  18-3

-------
                                  ARTIFICIAL SUBSTRATES
 I   INTRODUCTION:  THE NATURE OF
    ARTIFICIAL SUBSTRATES

 A  Artificial substrates are anything
    deliberately placed in the water for the
    purpose of providing a place for benthic
    or attached (sessile, sedentary,  etc.)
    organisms to grow on or in.  This is in
    contrast to  "bait" which is used as an
    attractant.
 B  Their origins for  commercial use, or human
    food production are rooted in antiquity.
    Some examples are:
    1  Ropes, poles, brush, concrete
      structures,  and other objects thrust
      into the bottom, or suspended in
      estuarine waters to catch and grow
      oysters and mussels (cultural techniques),
      known virtually around the world.

    2  Straw .or reed tepees planted in shallow
      alkaline lakes (in Mexico for example)
      to  catch the eggs of Corixids (Insecta:
      Order Hemiptera, back-swimmers).
      Eggs  are harvested by drying and
      brushing them off onto white sheets.
      Used  for human food.

 C  The fouling of  ships bottoms, piling, etc.
    by barnacles and other marine life is an
    "artificial substrate in reverse".
 D  The use of aggregate to support a zoogloeal
    mass of micro-biota in a trickling filter,
    thus simulating a  riffle area in a  surface
    stream,  is a modern concept to harness
    and make use of "consumer"  and  "reducer"
    elements of a community in order to
    dissipate the energy (oxidize, exhaust the
    food value) contained in sewage.

II   ECOLOGICAL BASIS

 A  Artificial substrates are based on the
    "laws of organismal distribution.  "
    1 Any given kind  of organisms tends to be
     present (inhabit) in all available suitable
     habitats.
   2 Any given habitat tends to be inhabited
     by all suitably adapted kinds of
     organisms.

B  A "substrate" being an object (or group
   of objects) constitutes a habitat suitable
   for sessile or attached organisms,  and
   also those that naturally burrow in, crawl
   over,  or otherwise live associated with
   objects.  Natural objects here could mean
   the bottom, stones, sticks (floating or
   sunk), etc.

C  Organisms that would not be attracted to
   substrates would be plankton and nekton
   (fish and larger swimming invertebrates).

D  Ecological Succession

   Colonization is  rapid in a biologically
   productive water,  and normally reaches
   a stable climax* community in about a
   month. A typical outline of successive
   forms to appear in a freshwater situation,
   for example, might be as follows.

   1 Periphyton (slime forming) stage
     (see also below)
     a Bacteria - within an hour

     b Diatoms - within the first day
     c Other micro-algae - within the first day
     d Protozoa - within the first day

   2 Macroinvertebrate dominated stage
     (see also below)

     a Primary attached or sedentary
       colonizers - second to third day
        1)  Net caddisflies
        2) Bryozoa

        3) Cordylophora caspia

        4) Hydra
  *A community which has achieved a point of no further change, under a given set of
   environmental conditions.  Time scale may vary with circumstances.
  NOTE:  Mention of commercial products and manufacturers does not imply endorsement
          by the Environmental Protection Agency.
  BI.MET.fm.7d.9.72
                                    19-1

-------
  Artificial Substrates
in
       b Primary foragers

         1)  Mayflies

         2)  Stoneflies

         3)  Midges

       c Secondary attached or sedentary
         colonizers:

         1)  Sponges

         2)  Filamentous algae

       d Adventitious forms

         1)  Crustaceans

         2)  Flatworms

         3)  Leeches

         4)  Snails

         5)  Other

       Artificial substrates in a marine
       environment proceed through similar
       stages, except that the macroinvertebrate
       stage  may be more subject to variation
       in the attachment of broods of barnacle,
       oyster, and other larvae resulting from
       greater numbers of types present, tidal
       current variation,, meteorological
       conditions, etc.
ARTIFICIAL SUBSTRATES AS SCIENTIFIC
COLLECTING DEVICES

A review of the history of artificial
substrates for collecting microorganisms
(aufwuchs) (Cooke,  1956) indicates that
glass microscope slides were first used
for this purpose about 1915.  Wood or
metal panels appear,  however, to have been
deliberately exposed for the scientific
collection of larger organisms at least
since approximately the turn of the century,
and probably long before that (Visscher, 1928).
B  Biological Applications

   The principles of the artificial substrate
   remain the same, regardless of the
   community sampled.  Two general types
   of communities and associated samplers
   have been employed:

   1 Periphyton (or aufwuchs) samplers

     Periphyton is the community of slime
     forming microorganisms which is the
     first to attach to objects newly exposed
     under water.  This community is
     generally considered to provide an
     anchor layer to which other higher
     forms of life can more readily attach.
     It tends to persist until overgrown or
     displaced by larger organisms, and
     then in turn can be found spreading over
     the  surfaces of these same larger
     plants and animals.

   2 Periphyton has been widely studied as
     it appears on 1 X3 glass microscope
     slides which are equally convenient to
     expose in the field and to study in the
     laboratory.

   3 Particular studies have included:

     a The original bacterial and fungal
       slime

     b Diatom identification and counts

     c Identification and counts of other
       microscopic algae

     d Protozoans

     e Primary productivity

   4 The macroinvertebrate community is
     sampled by a great variety of devices
     such as those cited below.  The
     organisms are usually removed from
     the  substrate for study. Applications
     have included the following:

     a General study of the macroinverte-
       brate community
   19-2

-------
                                                                     Artificial Substrates
      b  Estimates of productivity

      c  Studies of the life cycle of particular
         species

      d  Studies of the influence of the sub-
         strate on the attachment of sessile
         forms
         1) The influence of toxic paints for
           the prevention of fouling organisms

         2) Wood panels to study the pene-
           tration of boring molluscs and
           crustaceans

C Effect of type of device on what is collected

   1  Wood boring organisms like teredo
      worms (Mollusca, Pelecypoda) or
      gribbles (Arthropoda, Isopoda) would
      obviously be attracted primarily to
      wood (although 'some are  known to bore
      in other materials).  •

   2  Delicate forms  and crawling forms
      would be most likely to be collected on
      devices having a shape to protect
      against strong currents.

   3  Those with strong attachments could
      endure swift currents; often,  surpris-
      ingly, even during periods of original
      attachment (ex.  byssus attached clams
      which are also benthic forms).

   4  Bottom burrowers would  be most likely
      collected in artificially contained
      portions of bottom material.

D Effect of Location

   1  The depth at which a sampler is sus-
      pended may influence the organisms
      attracted.

   2  Location in or out of a current, direct
      sunlight,  etc., will influence the take.

E Some Types of Devices

   1  Cement plates,  panels, and blocks

   2  Ceramic tiles

   3  Wood blocks

   4  Metal plates
5  Glass slides -1X3 inch micro slides
   are used by many workers.  Numerous
   devices are employed to hold them.
   They are generally either floated
   (Weber and Raschke 1966) or sus-
   pended in racks,  anchored to
   submerged bricks or other objects.

6  Plastic petri dishes

   Burba,nck and Spoon  utilized an
   ordinary 50 X 12 mm plastic petri
   dish for collecting sessile protozoa.
   Sickle modified this  by using a
   styrofoam cup (6 pz. size) with the
   bottom third being cut off. The
   lower unit of the  plastic  dish is
   easily wedged into place in the cup
   and the device is simply held by a
   nylon line on a rope  held in place by
   an appropriate anchor and float.

   The  cup which tends to float is so
   held that the petri dish bottom is in
   a horizontal position and bottom side
   up.

7  Multiple plate (Hester and Dendy, 1962)

   a  Common current procedure •
      utilizes 3-inch squares of  1/4
      inch thick Masonite separated
      by 1-inch square spacers.

   These may be:

   b  Threaded on an eye bolt or long
      rod.

   c  Suspended by a loop of nylon cord.

8  Baskets or trays of bottom-type
   material

   a  Trays of bottom material sunk in
      the surface layer of the bottom.

   b  Baskets of stones suspended in
      the water (Anderson and Mason,
      1966).

9  Boxes,  cages, bundles,  etc., of
   brush,  reeds, or artificial material.
                                                                                     19-3

-------
 Artificial Substrates
   10  Polyethylene tapes

   11  Plastic webbing

       Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing
       Company conservation web no.  200.

   12  Styrofoam

   13  Glass cover slips

       Small slips are floated on the surface
       of the water.  Highly useful for protozoa
       and rotifers.  Remove and place on a
       micro slide.  Examine as a wet mount.

 F Retrieval is an acute problem with all of
   these  samplers.

   1   Physical factors

       a   Relocation

       b   Floods and drift

       c  High water

   2   Well marked samplers or floats are
       naturally vulnerable to the public,
       resulting in disturbed, damaged, or
       destroyed sample gear.

       a  This has been overcome by an
         ingenious submerged float and
         recovery line device.  The weak
         link in a submerged recovery line
         is  a modified flash bulb. An
         electronic device actuated by an
         underwater gun breaks the  bulb
         allowing the float and attached
         line to surface.  (Ziebell,
         McConnell, and Baldwin)

      b  This unit has been further modified
         by Fox (University of Georgia
         Cooperative Fishery Unit) who
         used an inexpensive detonator,
         "Seal Salute".   The latter is an
         inexpensive fused charge designed
         for underwater explosion.
IV  ARTIFICIAL SUBSTRATES OR SAMPLERS,
    AND WATER QUALITY

 A Artificial substrates provide a habitat
    ("place to live").  It follows from the
    laws of distribution (II A  I and 2 above),
    that the community which inhabits a
    device will be governed by the physical
    nature or structure interacting with the
    characteristics of the surrounding water  •
    (velocity, temperature, chemical
    characteristics, etc.).  Since the nature
    of the sampler is controlled, it is evident
    that the characteristics of the water
    constitute the variable factor.

 B Water Quality Surveillance

    1  Similar substrates suspended side by
      side in the same water tend to accumulate
      (essentially) the same communities and
      quantities of organisms.

    2  Similar substrates suspended in different
      waters accumulate different communities
      and quantities.

    3  Ergo: different communities and
      quantities  collected from similar
      substrates at different places and times,
      probably indicate different water qualities.

      a These may be natural (seasonal,
         diurnal, etc.)

      b Or they may be a result of human
         influences (pollution)

       c A series of samplers the length of a
         stream, lake, or estuary can suggest
         "steady state" differences in water
         quality.

       d A series of samplers exposed over a
         period of time at a given site can
         suggest changes of water quality in
         time.

    4  The artificial substrate thus essentially
       constitutes an in-situ bioassay of the
      water.
19-4

-------
                                                                     Artificial Substrates
   Interpretation and Significance of
   Collections

   1 The unit of comparison is most
     appropriately taken as "the sampler".
     The artificial substrate by definition is
     not the natural local bottom material,
     and unless it consists of a  portion of
     that bottom which has been actually
     removed and replaced in an artificial
     container (IH-D-7)the composition and
     magnitude of the  community it contains
     may or may not bear a definitive
     relationship to the actual natural
     problem.  The take of the artificial
     substrate thus may have relatively
     little relationship to the take of a
     Petersen or an Ekman grab (dredge).

   2 Comparisons  between  different types
     of samplers are likewise hazardous.
     Each is what it is, and if they are
     different they are not identical; thus
     the biota each collects cannot be
     expected to be identical (CF: H A).

   3 Artificial substrates should generally
     be  compared on a "sampler vs sampler"
     basis, or for  periphyton, "unit area
     vs  unit area".
REFERENCES

1  Anderson,  J. B. and Mason, William T. Jr.
     A Comparison of Benthic Macro-
     invertebrates collected by Dredge and
     Basket Sampler.  Jour. Water Poll.
     Cont.  Fed.  40(2):252-259.

2  Arthur, John W. and Horning, W.B., II.
     The Use of Artificial Substrates  in
     Pollution Surveys.  Amer. Midi. Nat.
     82(l):83-89.

3  Besch, W., Hoffman, W.,  and Ellenberger,
     W.   Das Macrobenthos auf
     Polyatchylensubstraten in Fliessgs-
     wasseren.  Annals de Limnologic.
     3(2):331-367.    1967.
4  Burbanck, W.D. and Spoon, D.M.   The
      Use of Sessile Ciliates Collected in
      Plastic Petri Dishes for Rapid
      Assessment of Water Pollution.
      J. Protozool.   14(4):739-744.   1967.

5  Cobke, William B.   Colonization of
      Artificial Bare Areas by Microorganisms.
      Bot.  Rev.  22(9):613-638.  Nov.  1956.

6  Fox, Alfred C.  Personal Communication.
      1969.
 7  Hester,  F.E. and Dendy,  J.S.
      A Multiple-Plate Sampler for Aquatic
      Macroinvertebrates. Trans.Am.
      Fish. Soc. 91(4):420-421.  April 1962.

 8  Hilsenhoff, William L.  An Artificial
      Substrate Device for Sampling Benthic
      Stream Invertebrates.  Limnology and
      Oceanography.  14(3):465-471.  1969.

 9  Mason, W.T., Jr., Anderson,  J. B., and
      Morrison, G.E.   A Limestone-Filled,
      Artificial Substrate Sampler Float Unit
      for Collecting Macroinvertebrates in
      Large Streams.   Prog. Fish-Cult.
      29:74.  1967.

10  Ray,  D. L.   Marine Boring and Fouling
      Organisms.   University of Washington
      Press, Seattle,  pp 1-536.   1959.

11  Sickel, James B.  A  Survey of the
      Mussel Populations (Unionidae) and
      Protozoa  of the Altamaha River with
      Reference to their Use in Monitoring
      Environmental Changes.  MS Thesis.
      Emory University.   133pp.   1969.

12  Sladeckova,  A.  Limnological Investigation
      Methods for the Periphyton ("Aufwuchs")
      Community.  Bot. Rev. 28(2):286-350.
       1962.
                          I
13  Spoon,  D.M. and Burbanck,  W.D.   A
      New Method for Collecting Sessile
       Ciliates in Plastic Petri Dishes with
      Tight Fitting Lids.   J. Protozool.
       14(4):735-739.  1967.
                                                                                      19-5

-------
 Artificial Substrates
14  Visscher, J. Paul.   Nature and Extent
       of Fouling of Ships Bottom.  Dept.          7=^	rp	——„  „,—r~	
       Comm. Bur. Com. Fish. Doc.              ™1S °"tl™ WfS ^T™* *? *'  .W" fljackfon'
       No. 1031   pp 193-252   1928              Chief Biologist and R. M.  Sinclair,  Aquatic
       INO. iuoi.  pp i»o m.  la^o.             Biologist, National Training Center, Water
15  Weber,  C.E. and Rauschke, R. L.              Programs Operations. EPA, Cincinnati,
       Use of a Floating Periphyton Sampler        OH 45268.
       for Water Pollution Surveillance.
       Water Poll. Sur. Sept. Applications
       and Develop.   Report No. 20.
       FWPCA-USDI, Cincinnati, Ohio.
       September 1966.
JL6 Wene,  George and Wickliff, E. L.
      Modification of a Stream Bottom and
      its Effect on the Insect Fauna.
      Canadian Entomologist.  Bull. 149,
      5 pp.   1940.

 17 ZiebeU,  Charles D., McConnell, W.  J.,
      and Baldwin,  Howard A. A Sonic
      Recovery Device for Submerged
      Equipment.  Limnol. and Ocean.
      13(1):198-200.  1968.
 19-6

-------
                                   ATTACHED GROWTHS
                                  (Periphyton or Aufwuchs)
I  The community of attached microscopic
plants and animals is frequently investigated
during water quality studies.  The attached
growth community (periphyton) and suspended
growth community (plankton) are the principal
primary producers in waterways--they con-
vert nutrients to organic living materials and
store light originating energy through the
processes of photosynthesis.  In extensive
deep waters, plankton is probably the pre-
dominant primary producer. In shallow lakes,
ponds, and rivers,  periphyton is the predominant
primary producer.   During the past two
decades, investigators of microscopic
organisms have increasingly placed emphasis
on periphytic growths because of inherent
advantages over the plankton when interpreting
data from surveys on flowing waters:

A  Blum (1956) ";'.. .workers are generally
   agreed that no distinctive association of
   phytoplankton is found in streams, although
   there is some  evidence of this for individual
   zooplankters (animals) and for a few
   individual algae and bacteria.  Plankton
   organisms are often introduced into the
   current from impoundments, backwater
   areas or stagnant arms of the stream....
   Rivers whose plankton is not dominated by
   species from upstream lakes or ponds are
   likely to exhibit a majority of forms which
   have been derived from the stream bottom
   directly and which are thus merely
   facultative or opportunistic plankters. "

B  "The transitory nature of stream plankton
   makes it nearly impossible to ascertain at
   which point upstream  agents producing
   changes in the algal population were
   introduced, and whether the changes
   occurred at the sampling site  or at some
   unknown point upstream.  In contrast,
   bottom algae (periphyton) are  true com-
   ponents of the  stream biota.  Their
   sessile-attached mode of life subjects
   them to the quality of  water continuously
   flowing over them.  By observing the
   longitudinal distribution of bottom algae
   within a stream,  the sources of the agents
   producing the change can be traced
   (back-tracked)" (Keup, 1966).
II   TERMINOLOGY

 A  Two terms are equally valid and commonly
    in use to describe the attached community
    of organisms.  Periphyton literally means
    "around plants" such as the growths over-
    growing pond-weeds; through usage this
    term means the attached film of growths
    that rely on substrates as a "place-to-
    grow" within a waterway.  The  components
    of this growth assemblage consists of
    plants,  animals, bacteria, etc.  Aufwuchs
    is an equally acceptable term [probably
    originally proposed by Seligo (1905)].
    Aufwuchs is a German noun without
    equivalent english translation; it is
    essentially a collective term equivalent
    to the above American (Latin root) term -
    Periphyton.  (For convenience,  only,
    PERIPHYTON,  with its liberal modern
    meaning will be used in this  outline.)

 B  Other terms,  some rarely encountered in
    the literature,  that are essentially
    synonymous with periphyton  or describe
    important and dominant components of the
    periphytic community are:  Nereiden,
    Bewuchs, Laison,  Belag, Besatz,  attached,
    sessile, sessile-attached, sedentary,
    seeded-on,  attached materials,  slimes,
    slime-growths, and coatings.

    The academic community occasionally
    employs terminology based on the nature
    of the substrates the periphyton grows on
    (Table 1).

              TABLE 1

      Periphyton Terminology Based
          on Substrate Occupied

 Substrate                 Adjective
 various        epiholitic, nereiditic, sessile
 plants          epiphytic
 animals        epizooic
 wood           epidendritic, epixylonic
 rock           epilithic

[After Srameck-Husek( 1946) and via Sladeckova
 (1962)] Most kbove listed latin-root adjectives
 are derivatives of nouns  such as epihola,
 epiphyton, spizoa, etc.
BI.MIC.enu. 19b.5.71
                                                                                       20-1

-------
 Attached Growths (Periphyton or Aufwuchs)
III  Periphyton, as with all other components
  of the environment,  can be sampled quali-
  tatively (what is present) and quantitatively
  (how much or many are present).

  A Qualitative sampling can be performed by
    many methods and may extend from direct
    examination of the growths attached to a
    substrate to unique "cuttings" or scraping*
    It may also be a portion of quantitative
    sampling.
  B Quantitative sampling is difficult because
    it is nearly impossible to remove the
    entire community from a standardized or
    unit area of substrate.

    1  Areas scraped cannot be determined
       precisely enough when the areas are
       amorphous plants, rocks or logs that
       serve as the principal periphyton
       substrates.

    2  Collection of the entire community within
       a standard area usually destroys individual
       specimens thereby making identification
       difficult (careful scraping can provide
       sufficient intact individuals of the species
       present  to make qualitative determinations);
       or the process of collection adds sufficient
       foreign materials (i. e. detritus, sub-
       strate, etc.) so that some commonly
       employed quantitative procedures are
       not applicable.
IV  Artificial substrates are a technique
 designed to overcome the problems of direct  .
 sampling.  They serve their purpose,  but
 cannot be used without discretion.  They are
 objects standardized as to surface area,
 texture, position, etc. that are placed in the
 waterway for pre-selected time periods during
 which periphytic growths accumulate.  They
 are usually made of inert materials, glass
 being most common with plastics second in
 frequency.  Over fifty various devices and
 methods of support or suspension of the
 substrates have been devised (Sladeckova,
 1962) (Weber,  1966) (Thomas, 1968).
 V  ARTIFICIAL SUBSTRATE PLACEMENT

 A  Position or Orientation

    1  Horizontal - Includes effects of settled
       materials.

    2  Vertical - Eliminates many effects of
       settled materials.

 B  Depth (light) - A substrate placed in lighted
    waters may not reflect conditions in a
    waterway if much of the natural substrate
    (bottom) does not receive light or receives
    light at reduced intensity.  (Both excessive
    light and a shortage of light can inhibit
    growths and influence the kinds of organisms
    present.)

 C  Current is Important

    1  It can prevent the settling of smothering
       materials.

    2  It flushes metabolic wastes away and
       introduces nutrients to the colony.
VI  THE LENGTH OF TIME THE SUBSTRATE
    IS EXPOSED IS IMPORTANT.

 A The growths need time to colonize and
    develop on the recently introduced
    substrate.

 B Established growths may intermittently
    break-away from the substrate because
    of current  or weight induced stresses, or
    "over-growth" may "choke" the attachment
    layers (nutrient,  light,  etc. restrictions)
    which then weaken or die allowing release
    of the mass.

 C A minimum of about ten days is required
    to produce sufficient growths on an
    artificial substrate; exposures exceeding
    a longer time than 4-6 weeks may produce
    "erratic results" because of sloughing or
    the accumulation of senile growths in
    situations where the substrate is
    artificially protected from predation and
    other environmental stresses.
  20-2

-------
                                                     Attached Growths (Periphyton or Aufwuchs)
 VII   Determining the variety of growths present
   is presently only practical with microscopic
   examination. (A few micro-chemical pro-
   cedures for  differentiation show promise--
   but, are only in the early stages of development.)
Vin  "DETERMINING THE QUANTITY OF
      GROWTH(S)

   A  Direct enumeration of the growths while
      attached to the substrate can be used, but
      is restricted to the larger organisms
      because (1) the problem of maintaining
      material in an acceptable condition under
      the short working distances of the objective
      lenses on compound microscopes, and
      (2) transmitted light is not adequate
   „   because of either opaque substrates and/or
      the density of the colonial growths.

   B  Most frequently,  periphyton is  scraped
      from the substrate and then processed
      according to several available procedures,
      the selection being based on the need, and
      use of the data.

      1  Aliquots of the sample may be  counted
        using methods frequently employed in
        plankton analysis.

        a  Number of organisms

        b  Standardized units

        c  Volumetric units

        d  Others

      2  Gravimetric

        a  Total dry weight of scrapings

        b  Ash-free dry weight (eliminates
          inorganic sediment)

        c  A comparison of total and ash-free
          dry weights

      3  Volumetric, involving centrifugation  of
        the scrapings to determine a packed
        biomass volume.
    4  Nutrient analyses serve as indices of
       the biomass by measuring the quantity
       of nutrient incorporated.

       a  Carbon

         1) Total organic carbon

         2) Carbon equivalents  (COD)

       b  Organic nitrogen

       c  Phosphorus - Has limitations
         because cells can store excess
         above immediate needs.

       d  Other

    5  Chlorophyll and other bio-pigment
       extractions.

    6  Carbon-14 uptake

    7  Oxygen production, or respiratory
       oxygen demand


K  EXPRESSION OF RESULTS

 A Qualitative

    1  Forms found

    2  Ratios of number per group found

    3  Frequency distribution of varieties
       found

    4  Autotrophic index (Weber)

    5  Pigment diversity index (Odum)
 B Quantitative

    1  Areal basis--quantity per square
       inch, foot, centimeter, or meter.
       For example:

       a   16 mgs/sq.  inch

       b   16. 000 ceUs/sq.  inch

    2  Rate basis.  For example:

       a   2 mgs/day,  of biomass accumulation
       b   1 mg O./mg of growth/hour
                                                                                     20-3

-------
Attached Growths (Periphyton or Aufwuchs)
REFERENCES

1  Blum, J. L.   The Ecology of River Algae.
      Botanical Review.  22:5:291.   1956.

2  Dumont, H. J.   A Quantitative Method for
      the Study of Periphyton.   Ldmnol.
      Oceanogr.  14(2):584-595.

3  Keup, L.E.  Stream Biology for Assessing
      Sewage Treatment Plant Efficiency.
      Water and Sewage Works.   113:11-411.
      1966.

4  Seligo, A.   Tiber den Ursprung der
      Fischnahrung.  Mitt.  d.  Westpr.
      Fisch.  -V.   17:4:52.   1905.

5  Sladeckova, A.   Ldmnological Investigation
      Methods for the Periphyton Community.
      Botanical Review.   28:2:286.  1962.

6  Srameck-Husek.  (On the Uniform
      Classification of Animal and Plant
      Communities in our Waters).
      Sbornik MAP 20:3:213. Orig. in
      Czech.    1946.
 7  Thomas,  N.A.   Method for Slide
       Attachment in Periphyton Studies.
       Manuscript. 1968.             "

 8  Weber, C.I.  Methods of Collection and
       Analysis of Plankton and Periphyton
       Samples in the Water Pollution
       Surveillance System.   Water Pollution
       Surveillance System Applications "and
       Development Report No. 19,  FWPCA,
       Cincinnati. 19+pp. (multilith).  1966.

 9  Weber, C.I. "Annual Bibliography
      Midwest Benthological Society.
      Periphyton.  1014 Broadway,
       Cincinnati, OH  45202.

10  Hynes, H.B.N. The Ecology of Running
      Waters. Univ. Toronto Press.
       555 pp.  1970.
 This outline was prepared by Lowell E. Keup,
 Chief, Technical Studies Branch, Division of
 Technical Support, EPA,  Washington,  DC 20242.
 20-4

-------
                              APPLICATION OF BIOLOGICAL DATA
 I   ECOLOGICAL DATA HAS TRADITIONALLY
    BEEN DIVIDED INTO TWO GENERAL
    CLASSES:

 A  Qualitative - dealing with the taxonomic
    composition of communities

 B  Quantitative - dealing with the population
    density or rates of processes occurring
    in the communities

    Each kind of data has been useful in its own
    way.
H  QUALITATIVE DATA

 A Certain species have been identified as:

   1  Clean water (sensitive) or oligotrophic

   2  Facultative, or tolerant

   3  Preferring polluted regions
      (see:  Fjerdinstad 1964,  1965; Gaufin
      & Tarzwell 1956; Palmer 1963,  1969;
      Rawson 1956; Telling 1955)

 B Using our knowledge about ecological
   requirements the biologist may compare
   the species present

   1  At different stations in the  same river
      (Gaufin 1958) or lake (Holland 1968)

   2  In different rivers or lakes (Robertson
      and Powers 1967)

   or changes in the species in a river or/lake
   over a period of several years.  (Carr
   & Hiltunen 1965; Edmondson & Anderson
   1956; Fruh, Stewart, Lee & Rohlich 1966;
   Hasler 1947).

 C Until comparatively recent times taxonomic
   data' were not subject to statistical treat-
   ment.
Ill  QUANTITATIVE DATA:  Typical
    Parameters of this type include:
                                2
 A  Counts - algae/ml; benthos/m ;
    fish/net/day
                 3
 B  Volume - mm  algae /liter

 C  Weight - dry wgt; ash-free wgt.

 D  Chemical content - chlorophyll;
    carbohydrate; ATP; DNA; etc.

 E  Calories (or  caloric equivalents)

 F  Processes -  productivity; respiration
IV  Historically, the chief use of statistics
 in treating biological data has been in the
 collection and analysis of samples for these
 parameters. Recently, many methods have
 been devised to convert taxonomic data into
 numerical form to permit:

 A Better communication between the
    biologists and other scientific disciplines

 B Statistical treatment of taxonomic data

 C In the field of pollution biology these
    methods include:

    1  Numerical ratings of organisms on the
       basis of their pollution tolerance

       (saprobic valency:  Zelinka & Sladecek
       1964)

       (pollution index: Palmer 1969)

    2  Use of quotients or ratios of species in
       different taxonomic groups (Nygaard
       1949)
 BI.EN.3a.12.70
                                                                                     21-1

-------
Application of Biological Data
   3  Simple indices of community diversity:

      a Organisms are placed in taxonomic
        groups which behave similarly under
        the same ecological conditions. The
        number of species in these groups
        found at  "healthy" stations is com-
        pared to that found at "experimental"
        stations.  (Patrick 1950)

      b A truncated log normal curve is
        plotted on the basis of the number
        of individuals per diatom species.
        (Patrick, Hohn,  & Wallace 1954)

      c Sequential comparison index.
        (Cairns,  Albough, Busey & Chanay
        1968). In this technique,  similar
        organisms encountered sequentially
        are grouped into  "runs".
      SCI =
                       runs
            total organisms examined
      d Ratio of carotenoids to chlorophyll
        in phytoplankton populations:


        OD4SO/QD866(MaP«tllrf 1968)
        OD435/OD67Q(Tanaka, et al 1961)

      e The number of diatom species present
        at a station is considered indicative
        of water quality or pollution level.
        (Williams 1964)
      ,  number of species (S)
        number of individuals (N)
              number of species (S)
        square root of number of individuals («/ N)
      j   Information theory:

         The basic equation used for
         information theory applications was
         developed by Margalef (1957).
                           N!
                   2  N  !
N, !. ..N  !
  b       s
        where I - information/individual;
        N ,  N, .. . N are the number of
        individuals  in species a, b, ...
        s, and N is their sum.

        This equation has also been used
        with:

        1) The fatty acid content of algae
           (Mclntire,  Tinsley, and Lowry  •
           1969)

        2) Algal productivity (Dickman 1968)

        3) Benthic biomass (Wilhm 1968)
         S - 1
                (Menhinick 1964)
            En. (ii  -  1) (Simpson 1949)
             N (N - 1)
        where n. = number of individuals
                 .  belonging to the i-th species,
                   and
              N = total number of individuals
REFERENCES

1  Cairns,  J.,  Jr., Albough,  D.W.,
      Busey, F, and Chaney, M.D.
      The sequential comparison index -
      a simplified method for non-biologists
      to estimate relative differences in
      biological diversity in stream pollution
      studies.  J. Water Poll. Contr. Fed. .
      40(9):1607-1613.   1968.

2  Carr, J. F. and Hiltunen, J.K.   Changes
      in the bottom fauna of Western Lake
      Erie  from 1930 to 1961.   Limnol.
      Oceanogr. 10(4):551-569.   1965.

3  Dickman,  M.  Some indices of diversity.
      Ecology 49(6): 1191-1193.  1968.
   21-2

-------
                                                            Application of Biological Data
 4  Edmondson, W.T. and Anderson,  G.C.
      Artificial Eutrophication of Lake
      Washington.   Limnol. Oceanogr.
      l(l):47-53.   1956.

 5  Fjerdingstad, E.  Pollution of Streams
      estimated by benthal phytomicro-
      organisms.  I. A saprobic system
      based on communities of organisms
      and ecological factors.   Internat'l
      Rev.  Ges.  Hydrobiol. 49(1):63-131.1964.

 6  Fjerdingstad, E.   Taxonomy and  saprobic
      valency of benthic phytomicro-
      organisms.  Hydrobiol. 50 (4):475-604.
      1965.

 7  Fruh, E.G., Stewart, K.M., Lee, G.F.
      and Rohlich,  G.A.   Measurements of
      eutrophication and trends.  J.  Water
      Poll. Contr.  Fed. 38(8):1237-1258.
      1966.

 8  Gaufin, A.R.   Effects of Pollution on a
      midwestern stream.  Ohio J. Sci..
      58(4):197-208.   1958.

 9  Gaufin, A.R.  and Tarzwell,  C.M.  Aquatic
      macroinvertebrate communities as
      indicators of organic pollution in Lytle '
      Creek.   Sew. Ind. Wastes. 28(7):906-
      924.  1956.

10  Hasler,  A. D.  Eutrophication of lakes by
      domestic drainage.  Ecology 28(4):383-
      395. 1947.

11  Holland, R.E.  Correlation of Melosira
      species with trophic conditions in Lake
      Michigan.   Limnol.  Oceanogr.
      13(3):555-557.   1968.

12  Margalef, R.   Information theory in
      ecology.  Gen. Syst.   3:36-71.  1957.

13  Margalef, R.   Perspectives in ecological
      theory.   Univ.  Chicago Press.   1968.

14  Mclntire, C.D.,  Tinsley,  I.J. and
      Lowry,  R. R.   Fatty acids in lotic
      periphyton:  another measure of
      community structure.   J. Phycol.
      5:26-32.  1969.
15  Menhinick,  E.F.  A comparison of some
       species - individuals diversity indices
       applied to samples of field insects.
       Ecology  45:859.  1964.
16  Nygaard, G.  Hydrobiological studies in
      some ponds and lakes,   n.  The
      quotient hypothesis and some new or
      little-known phytoplankton organisms.
      Klg. Danske Vidensk.  Selsk.  Biol.
      Skrifter 7:1-293.  1949.

17  Patten, B.C.  Species diversity  in net
      plankton of Raritan Bay.  J. Mar.
      Res.  20:57-75.   1962.

18  Palmer, C.M.  The effect of pollution on
      river algae.   Ann. New  York  Acad.
      Sci.  108:389-395.   1963.

19  Palmer, C. M.   A composite rating of
      algae tolerating organic  pollution.
      J., Phycol. 5(D:78-82.   1969.

20  Patrick, R., Hohn, M.H.  and Wallace,
      J.H.   A new  method for determining
      the pattern of the diatom flora.   Not.
      Natl. Acad. Sci.,  No. 259.
      Philadelphia.    1954.

21  Rawson, D. S.   Algal indicators  of trophic
      lake types.  Limnol. Oceanogr.
      1:18-25.  1956.

22  Robertson, S. and Powers, C.F.
      Comparison of the distribution of
      organic matter in the five Great Lakes.
      in:  J. C. Ayers and D. C. Chandler,
      eds.   Studies on the environment and
      eutrophication of Lake Michigan.
      Spec. Rpt. No.  30,  Great Lakes Res.
      Div.,Inst. Sci. &Techn., Univ.
      Michigan, Ann Arbor.   1967.

23  Simpson, E.H.   Measurement of diversity.
      Nature  (London) 163:688.   1949.

24  Tanaka, O. H.,  Irie,  S. Izuka, and Koga,  F
      The fundamental investigation on the
      biological productivity in the Northwest
      of Kyushu.  I.  The investigation of
      plankton.  Rec. Oceanogr. W. Japan,
      Spec. Rpt. No.  5,  1-57.   1961.
                                                                                      21-3

-------
 Application of Biological Data
25  Telling, E.   Some mesotrophic phyto-
       plankton indicators.  Proc.  Intern.
       Assoc.  Limnol.    12:212-215.   1955.

26  Wilhm, J. L.   Comparison of some
       diversity indices applied to populations
       of benthic macroinvertebrates in a
       stream receiving organic wastes.  J.
       Water Poll. Contr. Fed.  39(10):1673-1683.
       1967.
28  Williams, L. G.   Possible relationships
       between diatom numbers and water
       quality.   Ecology 45(4):810-823.   1964.
29  Zelinka, M. and Sladecek,  V.   Hydro-
      biology for water management.
      State Publ.  House for Technical
      Literature,  Prague.   122 p.   1964.
27  Wilhm, J. L.   Use of biomass units in
       Shannon's formula.  Ecology 49:153-156.
       1968.
 This outline was prepared by C.I.  Weber,
 Chief,  Biological Methods Section, Analytical
 Quality Control Laboratory. NJERC.  EPA,
 Cincinnati, OH 45268.
   21-4

-------
                   USING BENTHIC BIOTA IN WATER QUALITY EVALUATIONS
  I   BENTHOS ARE ORGANISMS GROWING
      ON OR ASSOCIATED PRINCIPALLY
      WITH THE BOTTOM OF WATERWAYS

      Benthos is the noun.

      Benthonic,  benthal and benthic are
      adjectives.

  II  THE BENTHIC COMMUNITY

  A  Composed of a wide variety of life
      forms that are related because they
      occupy "common ground"--the water-
      ways bottom'substrates.  Usually
      they are attached or have relatively
      weak powers of locomotion.  These
      life forms are:

      1  Bacteria

         A wide variety of decomposers work
         on organic materials, breaking them
         down to elemental or simple com-
         pounds (heterotrophic).  Other forms
         grow on basic nutrient compounds or
         form more complex chemical  com-
         pounds (autotrophic).

      2  Algae

         Photo synthetic plants having no true
         roots,  stems, and leaves.   The basic
         producers of food that nurtures the
         animal components of the  community.

      3  Flowering Aquatic Plants  (Pondweeds)

         The largest flora, composed of
         complex and differentiated tissues.
         Many are rooted.

      4  Microfauna

         Animals that pass through a U. S.
         Standard Series No. 30 sieve,  but
         are retained on a No. 100 sieve.
         Examples are rotifers and micro-
         crustaceans.  Some forms have
         organs for attachment to substrates,
      while others burrow into soft
      materials or occupy the interstices
      between rocks,  floral or faunal
      materials.

   5  Meiofauna

      Animals, mostly metazoans, that
      can pass a 1. 0 mm to 0. 5 mm
      screen.  Examples are naiad
      worms and flatworms.

   6  Macrofauna

      Animals that are retained on a
      No. 30 sieve.  This group includes
      the insects, worms,  molluscs,  and
      occasionally fish.  Fish are not
      normally considered as benthos,
      though there are bottom dwellers
      such as sculp ins and darters.

B  It is a self-contained community, though
   there is interchange with  other commun-
   ities.  For example:  Plankton settles
   to it, fish prey on it and lay their eggs
   there, terrestrial detritus leaves are
   added to it, and many aquatic insects
   migrate from it to the terrestrial en-
   vironment for their mating cycles.

C  It is a stationary water quality monitor.
   The low motility of the biotic  compon-
   ents requires that they "live with" the
   quality changes of the over-passing
   waters.   Changes imposed in  the long-
   lived components remain  visible for
   extended periods, even after the cause
   has been eliminated.  Only time will
   allow a cure for the community by  drift
   and reproduction.

HI HISTORY OF BENTHIC OBSERVATIONS

A  Ancient literature records the vermin
   associated with fouled waters.

B  500-year-old fishing literature refers
   to animal forms that are fish  food and
   used as bait.
BI. MET. fm.Se. 1.74
                                                                                    22-1

-------
Using Benthic Biota in Water Quality Evaluations
 C  The scientific literature associating
    biota to water pollution problems is
    over 100 years old (Mackenthun and
    Ingram,  1964).

 D  Early this century,  applied biological
    investigations were initiated.

    1  The entrance of State boards of Health
       into water pollution control activities.

    2  Creation of state conservation agencies.

    3  Industrialization and urbanization.

    4  Growth of Hmnological programs
       at universities.

 E  A decided increase in benthic studies
    occurred in the 1950 decade, and much
    of today's activities are strongly influenced
    by developmental work conducted during
    this period.   Some of the reasons for this
    are:

    1  Movement of the universities from
       "academic biology" to applied
       pollution programs.

    2  Entrance of the federal government
       into enforcement aspects of water
       pollution control.

    3  A rising economy and the development
       of federal grant systems.

    4  Environmental Protection Programs
       are a current stimulus.

IV  WHY THE BENTHOS?

A  It is a natural monitor

B  The community contains all of the
    components of an  ecosystem.

    1 Reducers

    2 Producers

    3  Consumers

       a  Detritivores and bacterial feeders
      b  Herbivores

      c  Predators

C   Economy of Survey

    1 Manpower

    2 Time

    3 Equipment

D   Extensive Supporting Literature

E   Advantages of the Macrobenthos

    1 Relatively sessile

    2 Life history length

    3 Fish food organisms

    4 Reliability of Sampling

    5 Dollars/information

    6 Predictability

    7 Universality

V   REACTIONS OF THE COMMUNITY TO
    POLLUTANTS

A   Destruction of Organism Types

    1 Beginning with the most sensitive forms,
      pollutants kill in order of sensitivity
      until the  most tolerant form is the last
      survivor.  This results in a reduction
      of variety or diversity of  organisms.

    2 The usual order of macroinvertebrate
      disappearance on a sensitivity scale
      below pollution sources is shown in
      Figure 2.
Water
Quality
Deteriorati
>
Stoneflies ,
Mayflies
ng Caddisflies
Amphipods
Isopods
Midges
Oligochaetes
> Water
Quality
Improving
 22-2

-------
                                           Using Benthic Biota in Water Quality Evaluations
      As water quality improves,  these
      reappear in the same order.

B   The Number of Survivors Increase

    1 Competition and predation are reduced
      between forms.

    2 When the pollutant is a food (plants,
      fertilizers,  animals,  organic materials)

C   The Number of Survivors Decrease

    1 The material added is toxic or has no
      food value.

    2 The material added produces toxic
      conditions as a byproduct of decom-
      position (e.g., large organic loadings
      produce an anaerobic environment
      resulting in the production of toxic
      sulfides, methanes,  etc.)

D   The Effects May be Manifest in Com-
    binations

    1 Of pollutants and their effects.

    2 Vary with longitudinal distribution
      in a stream.  (Figure 1)

E   Tolerance to Enrichment Grouping
    (Figure 2)

    Flexibility must be maintained in the
    establishment of tolerance lists based
    on the response of organisms to the
    environment because of complex relation-
    ships  among varying environmental
    conditions.  Some general tolerance
    patterns can be established.  Stonefly
    nymphs, mayfly naiads,  hellgrammites,
    and caddisfly larvae represent a grouping
    (sensitive or intolerant) that is general-
    ized quite sensitive to environmental
    changes.  Blackfly larvae,  scuds, sow-
    bugs,  snails,  fingernail clams, dragon-
    fly nymphs, damselfly nymphs, and most
    kinds  of midge larve are intermediate
    (facultative or intermediate) in tolerance.
    Sludge-worms,  some kinds of midge
    larvae (bloodworms), and some leeches
               DIRECTION OF FLOW
  111
  ID
  w
  o:
     A.
       8;
       fc,'
       i;
       I  I
     B.
M    ,  \

I    '   \
                          c.
OT
111
                           D.
to
in
w
I
                            i
                 TIME  OR DISTANCE

         ..NUMBER  OF  KINDS
         ..NUMBER  OF  ORGANISMS
         'I, SLUDGE  DEPOSITS
      Four basic responses oi bottom animals to pollution.
A. Organic wastes eliminate  the sensitive bottom animals
and provide food in the form of sludges for the surviving toler-
ant forms. B. Large quantities of decomposing organic wastes
eliminate sensitive bottom animals and the excessive quanti-
ties of byproducts of organic decomposition inhibit the tolerant
forms; in time, with natural stream purification, water quality
improves so that the tolerant forms can flourish, utilizing the
sludges as  food. C. Toxic materials eliminate the sensitive
bottom animals; sludge is absent and food is restricted to thai
naturally occurring in the stream, which limits the number oi
tolerant surviving forms. Very  toxic materials may eliminate
all organisms below a waste source. D. Organic sludges with
toxic  materials reduce the number of kinds by eliminating
sensitive forms. Tolerant survivors do not utilize the organic
sludges because  the toxicity restricts their growth. •
                     Figure 1
     are tolerant to comparatively heavy loads
     of organic pollutants.  Sewage mosquitoes
     and rat-tailed maggots are tolerant of
     anaerobic  environments.
                                                                                         22-3

-------
Using Benthic Biota in Water Quality Evaluations
 F   Structural Limitations

     I The morphological structure of a
       species limits the type of environment
       it may occupy.

       a  Species with complex appendages
          and exposed  complicated respiratory
          structures, such as stonefly
          nymphs, mayfly nymphs,  and
          caddisfly larvae, that  are subjected
          to a constant deluge of setteable
          particulate matter soon abandon
          the polluted area because of the
          constant preening required to main-
          tain mobility or respirotory func-
          tions; otherwise, they are soon
          smothered.

       b  Benthic animals in depositing zones
          may also be  burdened  by "sewage
          fungus" growths including stalked
          protozoans.  Many of these  stalked
          protozoans are host specific.

     2 Species without complicated external
       structures,  such as bloodworms and
       sludgeworms, are not  so limited in
       adaptability.

       a  A sludgeworm, for example, can
          burrow in a deludge of particulate
                                organic matter and flourish on the
                                abundance of "marina."

                              b Morphology also determines the
                                species that are found in riffles,  on
                                vegetation, on the bottom of pools,
                                or in bottom deposits.

                        VI  SAMPLING PROCEDURES

                        A   Fauna

                            1  Qualitative sampling determines the
                              variety of species occupying an area.
                              Samples may be taken by any method
                              that will capture representatives of the
                              species present.  Collections from  such
                              samplings indicate changes in the
                              environment, but generally do not
                              accurately reflect the degree of
                              change.  Mayflies, for example, may
                              be reduced from .100 to 1 per square
                              foot.  Qualitative data would indicate
                              the presence of both  species, but might
                              not necessarily delineate the change in
                              predominance from mayflies to sludge-
                              worms.  The stop net or kick sampling
                              technique is often used.

                            2  Quantitative sampling is performed to
                              observe changes in predominance.   The
                              most common quantitative sampling
                              tools are the Petersen and Elkman
              REPRESENTATIVE BOTTOM-DWELLING MACROANIMALS

          Drawings from Geckler,  j.f K. M. Mackenthun and W.M. Ingram,  1963.
          Glossary of Commonly Used Biological and Related Terms in Water and
          Waste Water Control, .DHEW. PHS, Cincinnati. Ohio, Pub. No. 999-WP-2.
   A
   B
   C

   D
   E
   F
   G
   H
(Plecoptera)
(Ephemeroptera)
Stonefly nymph
Mayfly nymph
Hellgrammite or
 Dobsonfly larvae (Megaloptera)
Caddisfly larvae  (Trichoptera)
Black fly larvae  (Simuliidae)
Scud             (Amphipoda)
Aquatic sowbug   (Isopoda)
Snail             (Gastropoda)
Fingernail clam   (Sphaeriidae)
Dams elf ly nymph  (Zygoptera)
Dragonfly nymph  (Anisoptera)
Bloodworm or midge
                  (Chironomjdae)
                  (Hirudinea)
                  (Tubificidae)
                  (Psyehodidae)
                  (Tubifera-Eristalis)
I
J
K
L
   fly larvae
M  Leech
N  Sludgeworm
O  Sewage fly larvae
P  Rat-tailed maggot
                                   KEY TO FIGURE  2
  22-4

-------
                         Using Benthic -Biota in Water Quality Evaluations
              F              G
                INTERMEDIATE
M


                  TOLERANT
                                                            22-5

-------
Using Benthic Biota in Water Quality Evaluations
        grabs and the Surber stream bottom
        or square-foot sampler.  Of these,
        the Petersen grab samples the widest
        variety of substrates.  The  Ekman
        grab is limited to fine-textured and
        soft substrates,  such as silt and sludge.

        The Surber sampler is designed for
        sampling riffle areas; it requires
        'moving water to transport dislodged
        organisms into its net and is limited
        to depths of two  feet or  less.

        The collected sample is screened with
        a standard sieve to concentrate the
        organisms; these are sorted from
        the retained material, and the number
        of each kind determined.  Data are then
        adjusted to number per  unit area,
        usually to number of bottom per
        square meter.

        Independently, neither qualitative not
        quantitative data suffice for thorough
        analyses of environmental conditions.
        A cursory examination to detect damage
        may be made with either method, but
        a combination of the two gives a more
        precise determination.  If a choice must
        be made, quantitative sampling would
        be best, because it incorporates a
        partial qualitative sample.
  B  Flora
        Direct quantitative sampling of natu-
        rally growing bottom algae is difficult.
        It is basically one of collecting algae
        from a standardor uniform area of the
        bottom substrates without disturbing
        the delicate growths and thereby dis-
        tort the sample.  Indirect quantitative
        sampling is the best available method.

        Artificial substrates,  such as wood
        blocks,  glass or plexiglass slides,
        bricks,  etc., are placed in a stream.
        Bottom-attached algae will grow on
        these artificial  substrates.  After two
        or more weeks, the artificial sub-
        strates are removed for analysis.
        Algal growths are scraped from the.
        substrates and the qunatity measured.
.Since the exposed substrate area and
exposure periods are equal at all of
the sampling sites,  differences in the
quantity of algae can be related to
changes in the  quality of water flowing
over the substrates.

The quantity of algae on artificial sub-
strates can be  measured in several
ways.   Microscopic counts of algal
cells and dry weight of algal material
are long established methods.

Microscopic counts involve thorough
scraping, mixing,  and suspension of
the algal cells.  From this mixture
an aliquot of cells is withdrawn for
enumeration under a microscope.  Dry
weight is determined by drying and
weighing the algal sample, then ig-
niting the sample to burn off the algal
materials, leaving inert inorganic
materials that  are  again weighed.
The difference between initial weight
and weight after  ignition is attributed
to algae.

Any organic sediments, however, that
settle on the artificial substrate along
with the algae are processed also.
Thus,  if organic wastes are present
appreciable errors may enter into
this method.

During the past decade, chlorophyll
analysis has become a popular method
for estimating  algal growth. Chloro-
phyll is extracted from the algae, and
is used as an index of the quantity of
algae present.   The advantages of
chlorophyll analysis are rapidity,
simplicity,  and vivid pictorial results.

The algae are. scrubbed from the
artificial substrate samples, ground,
then each sample is steeped in equal
volumes, 90% aqueous acetone, which
extracts the chlorophyll from the algal
cells.   The  chlorophyll extracts may
be compared visually.
   22-6

-------
                                         Using Benthic Biota in Water Quality Evaluations
      Because the chlorophyll extracts fade
      with time,  colorimentry should be used
      for permanent records. For routine
      records, simple colorimeters will
      suffice.  At very high chlorophyll
      densities, interference with colori-
      metry occurs, which must be corrected
      through serial dilution of the sample
      or with a nomograph.

    4  Autotrophic Index

      The chlorophyll content of the periphyton
      is used to estimate the algal biomass and
      as an indicator of the nutrient content
      (or trophic status) or toxicity of the
      water and the taxonomic composition
      of the community.  Periphyton growing
      in surface water relatively free of
      organic pollution consists largely of
      algae,  which contain approximately
      1 to 2 percent  chlorophyll a by dry
      weight. If dissolved or particulate
      organic matter is present in high con-
      centrations, large populations of
      filamentous bacteria,  stalked protozoa,
      and other nonchlorophyll bearing micro-
      organisms develop and the percentage
      of chlorophyll  a is then reduced.  If the
      biomass-chlorophyll a relationship is
      expressed as a ratio (the autotrophic
      index), values greater than  100 may
      result from organic pollution (Weber
      and McFarland,  1969; Weber,  1973).
    Autotrophic Index
Ash-free Wgt (mg/m  )
Chlorophyll a (mg/m2)
VII FACTORS INVOLVED IN DATA INTER-
    PRETATION

Two very important factors in data evalua-
tion are a thorough knowledge of conditions
under which the data were collected and a
critical assessment of the reliability of the
data's representation of the situation.

A   Maximum-Minimum Values

    The evaluation of physical and chemical
    data to determine their effects on aquatic
    organisms is primarily dependent on
   maximum and minimum observed values.
   The mean is useful only when the data are
   relatively uniform.  The minimum or
   maximum values usually create acute
   conditions in the environment.

B  Identification

   Precise identification of organisms to
   species requires a specialist in limited
   taxonomic groups.  Many immature
   aquatic forms have not  been associated
   with the adult species.  Therefore, one
   who is certain of the  genus but not the
   species should utilize the generic name,
   not a potentially incorrect species name.
   The method of interpreting biological
   data on the basis of numbers of kinds
   and numbers of organisms will typically
   suffice.

C  Lake and Stream Influence

   Physical characteristics of a body of
   water also affect animal populations.
   Lakes or impounded bodies of water
   support different faunal associations
   from rivers.  The number of kinds
   present in a lake may be less than that
   found in a stream because of a more
   unifrom habitat. A lake is all pool,
   but a river is composed of both pools
   and riffles.  The nonflowing water  of
   lake  exhibits a more  complete set-
   tling of particulate organic  matter that
   naturally supports a higher population
   of detritus consumers.   For these
   reasons,  the bottom fauna of a lake
   or impoundment cannot be directly
   compared with that of a flowing stream.

D  Extrapolation

   How  can bottom-dwelling macrofauna
   data be extrapolated to  other environ-
   mental components?  It must be borne
   in mind that a component of the total
   environment is  being sampled.  If the
   sampled component exhibits changes,
   then  so must the other  interdependent
   components of the environment.  For
   example, a clean stream with a wide
   variety of desirable bottom organisms
                                                                                    22-7

-------
Using Benthic Biota in-Water Quality Evaluations
    would be expected to have a wide vari-
    ety of desirable bottom fishes; when
    pollution reduces the number of bottom
    organisms, a comparable reduction
    would be expected in the number of
    fishes.  Moreover,  it would be logical
    to conclude that any factor that elim-
    inates all bottom organisms would
    eliminate most other aquatic forms
    of life.

 VII IMPORTANT ASSOCIATED ANALYSES

 A  The Chemical Environment

    1  Dissolved oxygen

    2  Nutrients

    3  Toxic materials

    4  Acidity and alkalinity

    5  Etc.

 B  The Physical Environment

    1  Suspended solids

    2  Temperature

    3  Light penetration

    4  Sediment composition

    5  Etc.

 K  AREAS IN WHICH BENTHIC STUDIES
    CAN BEST BE APPLIED

 A Damage Assessment

    If a stream is suffering from pollutants,
    the biota will so indicate.  A biol&gist
    can determine damages by looking at the
    "critter" assemblage in a matter of hours.
    Usually,  if damages are not found, it will
    not be necessary to alert the remainder
    of the agency's staff, pack all the equip-
    ment,  pay travel and per diem,  and then
    wait five days before enough data can be
    assembled to begin evaluation.
B   By determining what damages have been
    done, the potential cause  "list" can be
    reduced to a few items for emphasis and
    the entire "wonderful worlds" of science
    and engineering need not be practiced with
    the result that much data  are discarded
    later because they were not applicable to
    the problem being investigated.

C   Good benthic data associated with chemical,
    physical,  and engineering can be data
    used to predict the direction of future
    changes and to estimate the amount of
    pollutants that need to be  removed from
    the waterways.
REFERENCES

1 Hynes,  H. B. N.  The Ecology of Running
    Waters.  Univ. Toronto Press.  1970.

2 Keup,  L. E., Ingram, W.M. and
    Mackenthun,  K. M.  The Role  of
    Bottom Dwelling Macrofauna in Water
    PoUution Investigations.  USPHS
    Environmental Health Series Publ.
    No.  999-WP-38,  23 pp.  1966.

3 Keup,  L. E., Ingram, W.M. and
    Mackenthun,  K. M.  Biology of Water
    Population:  A  Collection of Selected
    Papers on Stream Pollution, Waste
    Water, and Water Treatment.
    Federal Water Pollution Control
    Administration Pub. No. CWA-3,
    290pp.  1967.

4 Mackenthun, K.M.   The Practice of
    Water PoUution Biology.  FWQA.
    281 pp.  1969.

5 Stewart, R.K.,  Ingram, W.M. and
    Mackenthun,  K.M.  Water Pollution
    Control, Waste Treatment and Water
    Treatment:  Selected Biological Ref-
    erences on Fresh  and Marine  Waters.
    FWPCA Pub. No..WP-23,  126pp. 1966.
 22-8

-------
                                         Using Benthic Biota in Water Quality Evaluations
Weber,  Cornelins I.,  Biological Field         	
 and Laboratory Methods for Measuring         This outline was prepared by Lowell E.
 the Quality of Surface Waters and              Keup, Chief, Technical Studies Branch,
 Effluents.  U. S.  Environmental Pro-           Div.  of Technical Support,  EPA,  Wash-
 tection Agency,  NERC, Cincinnati,             ington, D. C. 20242, and revised by
 OH .  Environmental Monitoring Series         Ralph M. Sinclair, Aquatic Biologist,
 670/4.73.001 July 1973                       National Training Center, EPA, WPO,
                                               Cincinnati, OH  45268.

                                               Descriptors:
                                              Aquatic Life, Benthos, Water Quality,
                                               Degradation, Environmental Effects,
                                               Trophic Level,  Biological Communities,
                                               Ecological Distributions
                                                                                  22-9

-------